University of New Hampshire University of New Hampshire Scholars' Repository
Doctoral Dissertations Student Scholarship
Fall 2002
Excavating the remains of empire: War and postimperial trauma in the twentieth-century novel
Elizabeth J. Andersen University of New Hampshire, Durham
Follow this and additional works at: https://scholars.unh.edu/dissertation
Recommended Citation Andersen, Elizabeth J., "Excavating the remains of empire: War and postimperial trauma in the twentieth- century novel" (2002). Doctoral Dissertations. 87. https://scholars.unh.edu/dissertation/87
This Dissertation is brought to you for free and open access by the Student Scholarship at University of New Hampshire Scholars' Repository. It has been accepted for inclusion in Doctoral Dissertations by an authorized administrator of University of New Hampshire Scholars' Repository. For more information, please contact [email protected]. INFORMATION TO USERS
This manuscript has been reproduced from the microfilm master. UMI films the text directly from the original or copy submitted. Thus, some thesis and dissertation copies are in typewriter face, while others may be from any type of computer printer.
The quality of this reproduction is dependent upon the quality of the copy submitted. Broken or indistinct print, colored or poor quality illustrations and photographs, print bleedthrough, substandard margins, and improper alignment can adversely affect reproduction.
In the unlikely event that the author did not send UMI a complete manuscript and there are missing pages, these will be noted. Also, if unauthorized copyright material had to be removed, a note will indicate the deletion.
Oversize materials (e.g., maps, drawings, charts) are reproduced by sectioning the original, beginning at the upper left-hand comer and continuing from left to right in equal sections with small overlaps.
Photographs included in the original manuscript have been reproduced xerographically in this copy. Higher quality 6" x 9* black and white photographic prints are available for any photographs or illustrations appearing in this copy for an additional charge. Contact UMI directly to order.
ProQuest Information and Learning 300 North Zeeb Road. Ann Arbor, Ml 48106-1346 USA 800-521-0600
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. EXCAVATING THE REMAINS OF EMPIRE: WAR AND POSTIMPERIAL TRAUMA IN THE TWENTIETH-CENTURY NOVEL
BY
ELIZABETH ANDERSEN
A.B. Bowdoin College, 1990
M.A. University of New Hampshire, 1995
DISSERTATION
Submitted to the University of New Hampshire
in Partial Fulfillment of
the Requirements for the Degree of
Doctor of Philosophy
in
English
September, 2002
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. UMI Number: 3057247
Copyright 2002 by Andersen, Elizabeth J
All rights reserved.
___ __ ® UMI
UMI Microform 3057247 Copyright 2002 by ProQuest Information and Learning Company. All rights reserved. This microform edition is protected against unauthorized copying under Title 17, United States Code.
ProQuest Information and Learning Company 300 North Zeeb Road P.O. Box 1346 Ann Arbor, Ml 48106-1346
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
c 2002
Elizabeth Andersen
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. This dissertation has been examined and approved.
-- yAcfip Dissertation Di or, Sandhya Shetty^r Associate Professor of English
Jao« E. Aikins, Professor of English
Elizabeth Jane Bellamy Professor of English
Robin M. Hackett, Assistant Professor of English
Mary E. Rhiel, Associate Professor of German
o r Dati
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABSTRACT...... v
CHAPTER PAGE
I. INTRODUCTION...... 1
II. “KNITTING TOGETHER EVERYTHING & ENDING ON THREE NOTES”: 2 BECOMES 3 IN VIRGINIA WOOLFS MRS DALLOWAY...... 53
III. EMPIRE, REVISED IN PAT BARKER’S REGENERATION TRILOGY...... 100
Empire, Revised ...... 108
Empire, Abroad...... 130
Empire at Home ...... 150
IV. “THE GREAT ADVENTURE INTO NOWHERE”: POSTIMPERIAL TRAUMA AND THE NEW PASSAGE EAST IN MARGARET DRABBLE’S THE GATES OF IVORY...... 167
Trauma...... 177
Women...... 205
Literature...... 215
V. “THE THEATRE OF WAR” VS. “MEMORIES OF RIOTS” IN TWO NOVELS BY AMITAV GHOSH...... 236
VI. CONCLUSION...... 290
BIBLIOGRAPHY...... 305
iv
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. ABSTRACT
EXCAVATING THE REMAINS OF EMPIRE: WAR AND POSTIMPERIAL TRAUMA IN THE TWENTIETH-CENTURY NOVEL
by
Elizabeth Andersen
University of New Hampshire, September, 2002
In “’’Excavating the Remains of Empire: War and Postimperial Trauma in the
Twentieth-Century Novel,” I investigate the implications of the residual presence of
empire in the contemporary novel set in England, by questioning that if it is generally
accepted that in the age of imperialism novels co-produced empire, what do they now, in
this historical moment of the late twentieth-century, produce in its stead? Do shame and
nostalgia for empire and the trauma of empire’s dissolution coexist in the postimperial,
postwar novel? I use war as the key point of entry into the empire and novel connection,
and claim that war operates in the novel on three essential fronts: as resulting from and
encoding imperial tensions, as the traumatic event which magnifies empire’s dissolution,
and as the only acceptable model for a nation in crisis. Because war both results from
and encodes imperial tensions, and novels are so often the battleground on which these
imperial tensions wrestle for signification and reformulation, then war in novels can serve
as the double lens which magnifies the residual workings of empire and the novel. I
begin with Virginia Woolf’s Mrs Dalbway, and claim that in it she reveals the
limitations of the binaries of war and empire, while also portraying the anxieties
regarding empire that have been raised by the First World War; I show how Pat Barker’s
Regeneration trilogy incorporates these two aspects as well, yet also furthers the
connection between war and empire by using war to work out the traumas caused by
v
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. empire’s loss; I claim that Margaret Drabble has a similar project in The Gates o f Ivory,
in which she too explicates this traumatic loss of cultural identity resulting from the end
of empire; and then I proceed to an examination of how Amitav Ghosh shows the
restrictions of war as the narrative of a nation in The Shadow Lines, while also proving
war to itself be a significant means of empire’s perpetuation. Despite the fact that the
British Empire has been officially dismantled, imperialism and the novel are still inter
connected.
vi
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
When the sun at long last began to set on the British Empire, it also left dark
certain key connections between empire and the novel. In the following study, I
investigate the implications of this residual presence of empire in the twentieth-century
novel set in England. The significance of empire to the nineteenth-century novel has
been thoroughly researched and analyzed, with studies such as Edward Said’s
Orientalism and Culture and Imperialism leading the way; Said’s reading of Jane
Austen’sMansfield Park, for example, in which he establishes how Austen
“synchronizes domestic with international authority,” shows how the pervasive, if
understated, imperialist references in the nineteenth-century novel are crucial to the
creation and depiction of a seemingly provincial England (87). If it is generally accepted
that in the age of imperialism novels co-produced empire, what do they now, in the
historical moment of the late twentieth-century, produce in its stead? Do shame and
nostalgia for empire and the trauma of empire’s dissolution coexist in the postimperial,
postwar novel? To answer these questions, I examine the function and representation of
the critical nexus of war and empire in a selection of novels set in England in the period
extending from the First World War to the mid-nineties.
War is my key point of entry into the empire and novel connection. To examine
war is really to examine empire, and even—or especially—in British novels, the two
1
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. World Wars, which are often parochially seen as Euro-American events, become
symptoms of a larger crisis—that of empire and imperial consciousness. As such a
symptom, war operates in the novel on three fronts. First, although war can exist without
empire, empire cannot exist without war. War is the primary tool of empire in both overt
and covert ways: the threat of war is used abroad to retain allegiance and the cult of war
is used at home to retain support. As the British Empire cemented its strength in the
second half of the nineteenth century, so “the army and its personnel rose in the public’s
esteem” (Mackenzie 5). Britain’s military image and its imperial image became
inseparable: each nourished the other. The popularity of the “military hero developed
out of the Indian Mutiny.... The language of war entered into hymns, tracts, and
sermons.... The public schools became wholehearted exponents of the new militarism,
closely intertwining it with patriotic and imperialist endeavor” (Mackenzie 5-6). War
became an intricate part of the image of empire, yet it was also a crucial means of its
power and control. Pat Barker identifies this in The Ghost Road, when she has her
character, W. H. R. Rivers, point out the irony involved when the British forbid the
Melanesian headhunters to hunt heads, so to speak (185). Rivers notes dryly that the
headhunters he lived with were “a people perishing from the absence of war” (207);
Barker then explicitly juxtaposes this observation with a journal entry from the British
soldier, Billy Prior, who is fighting in the Great War at the front in France, in which we
see people perishing from the presence of war. The paradox of empire was that it was
forcing some men not to fight, while simultaneously forcing other men to do just that In
one of these journal entries, Billy writes of how “Only the names meant anything. Mons,
Loos, the Somme, Arras, Verdun, Ypres.... But now...1 realize there’s another group of
2
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. words that still mean something, little words that trip through sentences unregarded: us,
them, we, they, here, there. These are the words of power” (G 257). These are the words
of empire too, as we shall see, and Barker’s characters repeatedly realize how much,
beyond words, war and empire have in common. The honors of one bleed into the
horrors of the other. Because of this interconnectedness, then, when war surfaces in the
twentieth-century novel, empire is sure to follow.
The second “front” of war in the twentieth-century novel is as a traumatic event
which makes clear that empire’s dissolution is imminent. Because trauma Mis an
experience that is not fully assimilated as it occurs” (Caruth 5), and because the response
to trauma is thus a delayed response, I posit the sudden popularity of World War I as a
topic in British novels written in the eighties and nineties as a belated processing of the
moment that would force a drastic change to the British cultural image. As Said claims
in Culture and Imperialism: “Imperialism and the novel fortified each other to such a
degree that it is impossible, I would argue, to read one without in some way dealing with
the other” (71). If we agree with Said, then, that novels have had a role in producing
empire, it is logical that novels will now have a role in producing—or coping with—its
absence. As turning points for empire, therefore, the two world wars often become the
locus for this approach to managing and synthesizing Britain’s lost imperial identity.
The role war plays in the theater of imperialism does not end with empire,
however, and this is where the third front of war enters the scene. Nationalism is always
quick to take imperialism’s place by tapping into the popular sentiment surrounding war,
for one, so even though the times are postimperial, we are never left for long without
hearing war propaganda. But war also maintains a kind of imperial presence by
3
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. dominating as the only acceptable model for a nation in crisis. In his novel, The Shadow
Lines, for example, Amitav Ghosh demonstrates how war becomes the only means of
telling the story of a nation; when other significant types of violence occur—such as
riots—they have no place in the national narrative, because such a national narrative is
based on imperial norms. In this way, war still functions as an extension of empire, long
after empire itself has crumbled; war is empire’s coliseum-sized remains. Therefore,
because war both results from and encodes imperial tensions, and novels are so often the
battleground on which these imperial tensions wrestle for signification and reformulation,
then war in novels can serve as the double lens which magnifies the residual workings of
empire and the novel.
The First World War has long been implicated as playing a role in the demise of
the British Empire. To begin with, this war is often seen as signifying the end of an era.
In The Great War and Modem Memory, Paul Fussell claims that the Great War “reversed
the Idea of Progress” (8), and as such ruptured not only a way of life, but an entire mode
of thinking. The war interrupted a patriotic innocence and thus became a point that
demarcated before—which was all good and reason and security and order—from after,
which was chaos and insecurity. Fussell points out how even the weather aligned with
such a theory: “all agree that the prewar summer was the most idyllic for many years. It
was warm and sunny, eminently pastoral.... For the modem imagination that last
summer has assumed the status of a permanent symbol for anything innocently but
irrecoverably lost” (23-4). Fussell further emphasizes the war as an ending by writing
that “Furthermore, the Great War was perhaps the last to be conceived as taking place
within a seamless, purposeful ‘history’ involving a coherent stream of time running from
4
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. past through present to future” (21). What is significant about this quotation, however, is
that Fussell fails to acknowledge or identify this “stream of time” as the linear progress of
imperialism, and that what the Great War was disrupting, in particular, was the image of
the strength and continuum of the British Empire. I argue that it is the innocence
surrounding the perception of the British Empire that is lost after World War I; it became
impossible, after the war, to miss the beginning dissolutions of empire.
Other critics and historians have not hesitated to make the connection between
World War I and the beginnings of the end of the British Empire. Claire Tylee, for
example, takes this same notion of a pre-war/post-war divide and unites it to the image of
empire. She writes that the “myth” of pre-war innocence “has combined with an idea of
Britain’s lost imperial splendour to support the current imagery by which the Great War
was viewed over and over in diaries and memoirs: that the War was like the Flood, the
Deluge, the Fall from Grace, and the world which was lost was Paradise” (245). James
Joll suggests that the situation was more complicated than this, and that doubts about the
empire were beginning to surface before the war. He explains that “For Britain, the
euphoria produced by the great imperial pageant in London at the time of Queen
Victoria’s Diamond Jubilee in 1897 was giving place to doubts...about Britain’s ability
to maintain her place as the strongest imperial power in the face of other challenges”
(177). Such doubts did not concern whether the empireshould continue its current
trajectory, but whether itcould. And significantly, Joll claims that this doubt first
surfaced as a result of a wan the South African or Boer war. This war “brought home to
many people the cost of empire in a way no earlier colonial campaigns had done” (Joll
177). The Great War would further erode imperial sentiment InPropaganda and
5
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Empire John M. Mackenzie also avers that what one war started, the other war continued:
“Some have seen the Boer War as cracking the imperial spirit More conventionally, the
Great War has been regarded as the critical turning point The war, it is alleged, was
followed by a period of pacifism, and militarism and imperialism were so intertwined in
the late Victorian and Edwardian periods that revulsion from the one led to rejection of
the other” (Mackenzie 9). Of course, the war itself was in part a war fought over the
threat made to Britain’s imperial status: “It was because the German challenge to
Britain’s imperial position was a general one rather than a specific set of territorial
demands that it seemed so dangerous” (Joll 181). And the war did destroy empires, as
well as the sentiment felt toward empires. A. J. P. Taylor observes that,
Before the war there had been four empires in Europe; after it, there was none. The Habsburg Monarchy broke up into national states; the core of the Ottoman Empire emerged as national Turkey; Russia and Germany survived somewhat diminished, but not Empires at any rate in name. The King of England was the only remaining Emperor in the world, in his capacity as Emperor of India; even that title had only another generation to run. (284)
Postwar, the British were right to feel that their empire was beleaguered. The First
World War was in reality both the beginning of the end of empire and the unignorable
signal that its dissolution was imminent. Regardless of how sunny and pastoral and
halcyon the summers to come might be, the war made the British anxious over their now
obviously troubled empire.
One of the characteristics of war that corresponds with the legacies of empire is
the language that comes with it: war thrives on, produces, and is produced by the simple
binary. For example, as Paul Fussell explains, the soldiers were forced to learn that “one
thing [was] opposed to another, not with some Hegelian hope of synthesis involving a
6
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. dissolution of both extremes...but with a sense that one of the poles embodies so wicked
a deficiency or flaw of perversion that its total submission is called for” (79). The
Germans were evil—they were “them”; everything about them was “other”. As one
soldier said, “On this side of our wire everything is familiar and every man is a friend,
over there, beyond the wire, is the unknown, the uncanny” (Gilbert and Gubar 267). War
seems inseparable from these binaries. There is us and them, winning and losing, good
and evil. This language of simple dichotomy is a tool of war that is shared with empire,
which also has an us/them binary as its base. This, of course, is not a new idea. In
Orientalism, Edward Said established just how dependent the West is on its depiction of
the East as its opposite. He writes that “European culture gained in strength and identity
by setting itself off against the Orient” (3), and “the Orient has helped to define Europe
(or the West) as its contrasting image, idea, personality, experience” (1-2). The binary is
a central component of the power/knowledge connection that orientalism uncovers, and
empire, fueled by orientalism, is itself dependent on such binaries. War—as the overt
handiwork of empire—can further expose how the binary distorts as it simplifies. The
effects of imposed binaries are frequently a central concern in novels that scrutinize
empire’s outcome.
The representation of the two World Wars in novels can also clarify an approach
to the remains of empire from another significant angle: both wars disrupted the
propaganda image of the British Empire as it was previously perpetuated by events of
overtly imperial violence, such as the 1857 Mutiny in India. In Colonial Power, Colonial
Texts, M. Keith Booker shows how this Mutiny became a favorite subject for novels in
the late nineteenth century. Because of the violent role the British played in the Mutiny,
7
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. one would think this imperial event would have been downplayed. Yet instead, as
Booker contends, “the Mutiny triggered an explosion of imperial discourse. The British
got as much mileage as possible from their successful suppression of the Mutiny by
making it central to their imaginary construction of the Raj and thereby using it as a
crucial prop to the prestige of the British government both in India and at home” (104).
As would happen again with World War I, numerous and gory rumors began to circulate
which exaggerated and created the horrors done to the British during the Mutiny. The
Mutiny thus became “enshrined at the center of the ritual of British power in India” and
“took on a prominence in late-nineteenth-century British literature that was out of all
proportion to its real historical significance” (Booker 104-5). Novels written with the
Mutiny as their focus expanded and elaborated upon these rumors and “transformed the
fictitious stories of rape and mutilation into factual evidence” (Sharpe 85). The different
facets of the Mutiny were twisted and re-played until they came to represent in the British
popular imagination the British Empire at its “best” These Mutiny fictions were so
popular because they reversed the colonizer/colonized roles in such a way that alleviated
any residual feelings of imperialist guilt. As Patrick Brantlinger points out in his chapter
on Mutiny fiction, “the imperialist dominators become victims and the dominated,
villains. Imagining the Mutiny in this way totally displaced guilt and projected repressed,
sadistic impulses onto demonicized Indian characters” (222).
The Mutiny not only continuously reappeared in the popular literature of the
times, but it also reappeared as an influence in imperialist decision-making. The Mutiny
enabled Queen Victoria to dispense with pretense and issue in her Queen’s Proclamation
of November 1858 that India was now Britain’s Indian Empire; the “English women’s
8
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. ravaged bodies”—elaborated upon in Mutiny fiction— “ushered in a new imperial
authority” (Sharpe 81). Over sixty-one years later, the Mutiny was still being used as an
excuse for imperialist cruelty; in herAllegories of Empire, Jenny Sharpe shows how
officials tried to excuse the British massacre of unarmed civilians and children at
Jallianwala Bagh on April 13,1919, by using the events of the Mutiny as a defense (114).
The Mutiny had become an imperialist rallying myth; swaddled in the rumors established
as fact by Mutiny fiction, the Mutiny became a safe symbol to use to justify all sorts of
imperial events.
Even E. M. Forster, a man well aware of the problems of empire and not
necessarily a proponent of it, used the resonances of the Mutiny, instead of more
contemporary events, in his twentieth-century novel, A Passage To India. Forster began
to write A Passage to India before World War I, and then had trouble with it and set it
aside for several years. During this break from the novel, Forster received a letter from
his friend, Malcolm Darling, a colonial administrator in England, which described the
events at Jallianwala Bagh in great detail. This massacre troubled Forster and many have
speculated that when he returned to his novel, it was changed because of it: “the war and
the Amritsar Massacre of 1919 were decisive steps in his experience, so that when he
resumed his pre-war Indian novel, it became a different and darker affair, also a more
complex and powerful one, than as originally conceived” (Forster’s Letters x). It is
curious that in the many published volumes of Forster’s correspondence, although he
discusses India and Britain’s presence there continually, he does not mention Jallianwala
Bagh directly; and in A Passage—supposedly so influenced by Jallianwala Bagh—there
are only allusions to it, yet there are several direct references to the Mutiny.1
9
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. By substituting the Mutiny for the more pertinent—to his topic and times—and
disturbing Jallianwala Bagh calamity, Forster becomes the forerunner for yet another
characteristic of the imperial and postimperial novel: performing a kind of imperialist
metonymy that is the equivalent of the sidelong glance. Perhaps out of feelings of guilt
and trauma, Forster evades the direct implications of Jallianwala Bagh and instead will
try to explicate them using the Mutiny as a more comfortable trope. In “Narrative
Witnessing as Memory Work,” Irene Kacandes reminds us that “literary texts can be
about trauma.... But texts can also ‘perform’ trauma, in the sense that they can ‘fail’ to
tell the story, by eliding, repeating, and fragmenting components of the story” (56).
Forster does not want to look directly at the most troubling aspects of empire; what his
novel fails to reveal is indicative of such a shifting in gaze. Sixty years later, empire will
still cause British novelists to perform such a shift: inThe Gates o f Ivory, Margaret
Drabble will choose to write about empire and its effects in the late eighties and early
nineties—yet instead of concentrating on one of England’s former colonies, she focuses
on Cambodia, a nation ravaged by France and other European and American powers.
The British Empire’s absence in Drabble’s novel is similar to the absence of Jallianwala
Bagh in Forster’s.
In Mrs Dalloway—n novel also written soon after the Jallianwala Bagh
event—Woolf, too, refers to the Mutiny instead: regarding Clarissa’s old aunt, Helena
Parry, Woolf writes that “For at the mention of India, or even Ceylon, her eyes.. .slowly
deepened, became blue, beheld, not human beings—she had no tender memories, no
proud illusions about Viceroys, Generals, Mutinies—it was orchids she saw, and
mountain passes and herself carried on the backs of coolies in the ‘sixties over solitary
10
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. peaks” (271); Helena Parry is, interestingly, “an indomitable Englishwoman, fretful if
disturbed by the War, say, which dropped a bomb at her very door, from her deep
meditation over orchids and her own figure journeying in the ‘sixties in India” (271).
The Mutiny does not disturb her, perhaps because it was made into successful
propaganda; the war, on the other hand, can interrupt her reverie. In the twentieth
century, novelists were still referring to the Mutiny—instead of more current imperial
events —since it was yet a “safe” code event synonymous with the propaganda version of
the British presence in India.
When World War I began, it appeared initially as if it might serve as a modem
version of the Mutiny and function similarly in literature. And at first this seemed to
work: the war was going to-be another event that reinforced the image of the British
Empire, a moment around which could coalesce the motivating feelings of nationalism
and patriotism. The initial literature written about the war—such as Rupert Brooke’s
famous “If I should die, think only this of me:/ That there’s some comer of a foreign
field/ That is for ever England” sonnet—did act as an extension of Mutiny propaganda.
War literature was to serve as a kind of cultural self-representation in the same way as
Mutiny literature did. It was retro in functionand in style; in The Ruling Passion,
Christopher Lane points out how the war poets, for example, were (and still are) popular
in that they allowed the reader to escape the contemporary issues confronting them in
modernist works. Lane suggests that the war poets’ popularity had jingoistic origins and
that such impulses “may explain why the war poets remain so enduringly popular, and
why their aesthetic seems central to Britain’s disavowal of its imperial dissolution and
economic turbulence at the war’s end” (196). Paul Fussell has written extensively on
11
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. how “literary” the Great War was; often faced with an abundance of free time, the British
soldiers read the English “classics” and anthologies such as the Oxford Book o f English
Verse (159). Such literature reinforced national cultural boundaries by reminding the
soldiers of the cultural self-representation which needed to be preserved, and for which
they were fighting.
It is not surprising that the British soldiers of World War I turned to “classic"
English texts, for when the war lasted much longer than had originally been predicted,
and when the horrors of trench warfare in particular became known, using a
propagandists image of war in literature to mask the dissolution of empire become a
much more complicated enterprise. Patriotic poems such as Rupert Brooke’s war sonnets
began to be replaced by poems critical of the war, such as those written by Wilfred Owen
and Siegfried Sassoon. Patriotism was now questioned rather than celebrated: for
example, in Sassoon’s poem, “Lamentations,” when a soldier breaks down upon hearing
of his brother’s death, the narrator dryly and sarcastically proclaims that “In my belief /
Such men have lost all patriotic feeling” (131); and in “Base Details,” Sassoon writes
regarding the upper strata of the military, and in the voice of a Major, that, “And when
the war is done and youth stone dead, / I’d toddle safely home and die—in bed” (131).
This is not the nationalist and imperialist propaganda put forth in accounts of the Mutiny.
In her trilogy, Pat Barker zeroes in on this disjunction originating with the Great War.
She begins Regeneration with the anti-war proclamation written by the real-life Sassoon,
in which he states that “I am not protesting the conduct of the war, but against the
political errors and insincerities for which the fighting men are being sacrificed” (3); she
then dwells on the paradoxes within Sassoon (and others), focusing on just how Sassoon
12
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. could be a “tremendously successfulbloodthirsty and platoon commander, and yet at the
same time, back in billets, out comes the notebook. Another anti-war poem”(Eye in the
Door 156). In this twentieth-century war, ruptures were forming which tended to reveal
the real state of the British Empire; so immediately after World War I, for example, E. M.
Forster could write a novel about British India which used the threat of a small colonial
mutiny to convey “a sense of historical crisis that is related specifically to the historical
experience of World War I” (Booker 3), and on the other hand, Virginia Woolf could
have war and empire surface repeatedly in her everyday London of Mrs Dalloway. As
with the later war poetry, war in these novels does not proselytize in the old way; rather,
it becomes a flare which spotlights the dissolution of the British Empire and the ensuing
apprehensions surrounding its demise.
It is important to note how historians continually refer to the feelings experienced
by the British after the Great War as “anxieties”. For instance, James Joll writes that “the
sense of British superiority which the existence of the Empire had helped to create over
many generations was...accompanied by an anxiety that the British were losing the
martial and administrative gifts which had won the Empire on which it was
believed...Britain's prosperity depended” (my italics) (Joll 179). That the British were
“anxious” over the state of their Empire after the war is understandable. What is
significant, however, is that such anxiety resurfaces in the eighties, a good forty years
past the official end of empire, and seventy years past the insight occasioned by the war.
In the eighties, cultural critics, literary critics, authors, and other writers joined the
historians in using tropes of malaise, ennui, and general illness surrounding issues of
the—now defunct—empire. For example, writing about the return of the British Raj in
13
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. these times, Salman Rushdie, in his essay “Outside the Whale,” declares that “the
refurbishment of the Empire’s tarnished image is under way,” that many British “turn
their eyes nostalgically to the lost hour of their precedence” and that “Britain is in danger
of entering a condition of cultural psychosis, in which it begins once again to strut and to
posture like a great power while, in fact, its power diminishes every year” (my italics)
(91-2). In a similar fashion, Simon Gikandi asks in his Maps o f Englishness: “And how
are we to make use of a past whose practical and theoretical consequences were often
negative and destructive—a past that casts such a long shadow over our present moment
that many of us still reel from its trauma?” (21). Rushdie and Gikandi are not alone in
making such characterizations. Contemporary British national and cultural self
representation is consistently referred to as stricken with a kind of malaise: Christopher
Lane debates whether or not “Britain’s situation would appear closer to melancholia than
mourning” (232); Benedict Anderson points out that a nation’s narratives are affected by
“all profound changes in consciousness, [which] by their very nature, bring with them
characteristic amnesias” (204); and Fredric Jameson has claimed that imperialism.appears
in Western literature as “formal symptoms” (64). While for some, the dissolution of the
British Empire enabled a creative “postimperial aporia,” for others, empire’s dissolution
had the opposite effect. This is not a call to pity for the “poor” colonizers; nor is it an
attempt to posit the English as victims: however, analyzing empire’s demise as a trauma,
because of the ensuing and parallel demise of the traditional English cultural identity,
goes a long way towards explaining such recurrent references of malaise and dis-ease.
In her book, Unclaimed Experience, Cathy Caruth examines Freud’s theory of
“traumatic neurosis,” writing that it is “the unwitting reenactment of an event that one
14
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. cannot simply leave behind” (2). If, as Gikandi claims, English identity or “Englishness”
“had been produced by a continuous conflict between the center and its Celtic and
colonial peripheries” (xvii), then it can be assumed that the loss of the use of these
peripheries as mirrors which reflected back a certain perception of England and the
English must have profoundly affected the construction of cultural identity. In chapter
two, I show how Virginia Woolf's Mrs Dalloway, written about one woman’s normal day
in London in June of 1924, is permeated with thoughts of empire and the war. Characters
will continually intersperse thoughts of “the dead; of the flag; of Empire” (25) in the
midst of their daily activities. Such a presence is indicative of the breach the war has
opened up. Having just experienced the war, Woolf naturally taps into its continued
effect on the everyday lives of everyday Londoners. Why, then, does a writer such as Pat
Barker return to the war in the trilogy she writes from 1991 to 1995? I use Cathy
Caruth’sUnclaimed Experience to argue that English novelists like Pat Barker return to
the war precisely to alleviate the implications of the demise of empire. War was the
traumatic moment which revealed to the British the very instability of their empire. If, as
Caruth reads Freud, trauma is alwaysnot “ known in the first instance” and “returns to
haunt the survivor later on” (4), then choosing war as a topic is a way to begin a cultural
healing by returning to explore what at the time was too painful to do so. “In trauma, that
is, the outside has gone inside without any mediation” (Caruth 59), so novels about this
trauma will serve as a means for such mediation. Caruth explains that “Through the
notion of trauma, I will argue, we can understand that a rethinking of reference is aimed
not at eliminating history but at resituating it in our understanding, that is, at precisely
permitting history to arise where immediate understanding may not” (Caruth 11). By
15
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. writing about the war and emphasizing its connections to empire, Barker uses
“history”—the events of World War I—to understand empire’s loss. Likewise, Margaret
Drabble—by including in her trilogy so many references to empire and how England has
changed because of empire’s dissolution—addresses what these constant illness
references are indicative of: the cultural need to re-live the trauma of the end of empire
as a working out of the question central to a traumatic neurosis—namely, “what does it
mean to survive?” (Caruth 60). InThe Radiant Way, A Natural Curiosity, and especially
in The Gates of Ivory, Drabble addresses just what it means to “survive” empire and its
dissolution, and portrays a new, postimperial, world order. In contrast, war plays a role
that is just as tightly connected to empire, yet not at all cathartic in Ghosh’s The Shadow
Lines. His narrator has to figure out a way to release the stranglehold that war still has on
his nation’s construction of its history. War is a remains of empire that Ghosh’s narrator
needs to excavate and wants to eradicate.
Since World War I is just the first major war in what will prove to be a century of
deadly skirmishes, my dissertation is not limited to the scope and implications of that
particular war. As Eric Hobsbawm claims, “Since August 1914 we have lived in the
world of monstrous wars, upheavals and explosions” (327), and I examine the
representation of many of these “wars and upheavals” as they are used in novels in
relation to empire. As outlined previously, I use war as the key point of entry into the
empire and novel connection, and claim that war operates in the novel on three essential
fronts: as resulting from and encoding imperial tensions, as the traumatic event which
magnifies empire’s dissolution, and as the only acceptable model for a nation in crisis. I
begin with the representation of World War I in novels, because that war first caused or
16
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. revealed anxieties over the British Empire’s strength and longevity. I use Virginia
Woolf's Mrs Dalloway, written shortly after the war, to emphasize how the anxieties
which the war created did not end with it; instead, the war fashioned a minefield of
doubts and insecurities through which the average English citizen of that time period had
to navigate her and his everyday.
My focus remains with World War I in my next chapter, in which I explore how
and why it is represented in the novels of a contemporary author looking back at that
specific historical moment with a specific need and intention in mind. I assert that it is no
coincidence that World War I became a popular subject in the late eighties and early
nineties, and that its sudden resurgence as a literary topic is indicative of the belated
processing of a cultural traumatic neurosis. As the moment which revealed the beginning
of the end of the British Empire, novelists turn to World War I to come to terms with and
become acclimatized to this change in cultural identity. In herRegeneration trilogy, Pat
Barker approaches World War I with the benefit of hindsight and concentrates on the
psychiatrist, W. H. R. Rivers, as a historical figure who can act as witness to—and
therefore make sense of—this dissolution of empire.
However, World War I is not the only historical event which contemporary
novelists use to process the demise of empire; so instead of limiting the focus of my
dissertation to the parameters of World War I, I also explicate novels in which the author
uses other wars as a way of commenting on and revealing similar significant truths about
empire’s remains. I first pass over the Second World War in favor of Margaret Drabble’s
use of the Cambodian genocide under the rule of the Khmer Rouge, deviating from
chronological order precisely because Drabble’s project with Cambodia has distinct
17
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. similarities to Pat Barker’s use of World War I. The Cambodian conflict, too, was also in
part a result of empire, with Pol Pot and his Khmer Rouge first replacing Sihanouk, who
was seen to have too close ties to the previous French colonizers, and then cementing
their support by taking a stance against what the American “empire” was doing to Viet
Nam with bombing raids that often crossed over the Cambodian border. Atrocity stories
of other violence—what Pol Pot did to his own people, what some Americans soldiers
did in Viet Nam—become recurrent topics in Drabble’s England, and follow in the
footsteps of the earlier stories of Mutiny and World War I transgressions. Her characters
focus on the horrors caused by other empires as a way of indirectly processing
simultaneous feelings of guilt and nostalgia for the dissolution of the British Empire.
They resituate their own feelings of loss into the obvious chaos of Cambodia, because
there the scars of war are overt—in contrast to the cloaking that forty years has wrought
on England’s diminished status—and also there the scars are not the “fault” of the British
Empire. Drabble’s use of the genocidal horrors of Cambodia parallels Barker’s use of the
unexpected horrors of World War I: both novelists turn to these specific historical events
to process the shift of cultural identity occasioned by the demise of the British Empire.
Finally, I move back in time to World War II and to various conflicts that
occurred in India in the sixties and seventies, such as India’s war against China in 1962,
and partition-related riots. With the end of World War II came the official end of the
British Empire, when India gained independence in 1947. World War II was
undoubtedly a tragedy for Europe and the western world, as it brought to fruition
anxieties that initiated with World War I; however, to India, World War II was a more
complex signifier, since it opened the door to a new world order, in which India’s
18
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. independence was inevitable. In The Shadow Lines, Amitav Ghosh shows how the war
was in many ways a happy time for his narrator’s relatives living in London. The
changes that the war was commencing had the possibility of being changes for the
better—from the viewpoint of the colonized. The colonizer’s bane became the boon of
the colonized. However, Ghosh’s portrayal of some of the benefits of World War II is
not simply positive, for in my dissertation I assert that while perhaps speeding the demise
of empire, war also becomes a way that the stranglehold of empire keeps a firm grasp on
India. War is the only available trope that a nation can use to explain and tell the stories
of its own struggles. It becomes the valiant violence, and silences all other types of
violence. Ghosh’s narrator comes to the realization that the riots that occur in India
during and after Partition do not become part of the historical record of India as a nation,
whereas India’s wars—such as its war against China in 1962—are analyzed, discussed,
and written about: such discourses of war do not allow room for accompanying
discourses of riots. War thus becomes part of the remains of empire, duplicating how the
narratives of the nations of the west still impose themselves on the narratives of the
nations of the east.
Although I begin with World War I in novels and what it reveals about empire, I
expand the focus of my dissertation to include other wars and violent conflicts which are
also used by authors to portray and comment upon the prominence of empire’s remains.
In doing so I disclose the multiple functions of war as it intersects with empire in the
novel: war shares the binaries of empire, it is the primary tool of empire, it becomes the
symptom of the crisis of empire, it carries on the tasks of empire, it magnifies the
workings of empire, it becomes empire’s coliseum-sized remains. The novels I choose to
19
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. include all contain, utilize, and develop several of these junctures between war and
empire, overlapping in some instances and in others proceeding in different directions. In
Mrs Dalloway, for example, Woolf reveals the limitations of the binaries of war and
empire, while also portraying the anxieties over empire raised by the First World War,
Pat Barker’s Regeneration trilogy incorporates these two aspects as well, and also
furthers the connection between war and empire, by using war to work out the traumas
caused by empire’s loss; Margaret Drabble also explicates this traumatic loss of cultural
identity resulting from the end of empire; and Ghosh shows the limitations of the binaries
of war while also proving war to itself be a significant means of empire’s perpetuation.
My dissertation identifies and speaks to the war/empire nexus in the novels of the
twentieth century.
In Excavating the Remains of Empire, I examine how twentieth-century wars and
violent upheavals are represented in novels, and conclude that novelists are frequently
using war specifically as an instrument that allows them to access, both directly and
indirectly, the topic of the British Empire and its dissolution. Novels, then, that in many
ways seem to be post-empire, are in fact as riddled with the remains of empire as earlier
novels were with the workings of empire. An important part of my project, therefore, is
to read certain novels fo r empire that have hitherto been neglected in postimperial
studies. If, as Said has claimed, “Without empire...there is no European novel as we
know it” (69), then it is necessary to extend such readings of empire in novels to those
novels written after empire’s demise: for if empire once played such a significant role in
the novel, then surely it does not just disappear after the official date of empire’s end.
20
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Empire must still be represented in novels—although perhaps in a different guise. I
claim that empire does still play an essential role in the novel written in the second half of
the twentieth-century, and I propose that a beneficial way of illustrating this empire
preoccupation is to briefly emphasize the many similarities between such novels written
towards the end of the twentieth century, and a novel that is widely acknowledged as
being “about” empire and its problems—such as E. M. Forster’sA Passage to India.
Forster’s A Passage has generated a small industry of books and essays devoted
to discussion and explication of what it reveals about imperialism. It is a text that
acknowledges the beginning of the end of empire: in doing so it breaks with previous
colonialist literature by, for example, “serv[ing] as a central literary challenge to the kind
of knowledge-based colonial power envisioned by Kipling in K im ” while also illustrating
the often overlooked “confluence of modernism and imperialism” (Booker 42). That A
Passage To India provides a commentary on empire has already been well-established, so
it is a helpful “touchstone” to use to make the connection between it and other novels
which are not widely acknowledged as having a similar imperial focus. As I have been
saying, there seems to be a frequent assumption made that when the British Empire was
dismantled physically or geographically, it was also dismantled symbolically; when
studies are made of empire in literature today, their focus is usually on novels written
overtly about the colonies—like Forster’s A Passage To India—or by authorsfrom the
former colonies. However, by comparing Forster's A Passage to novels that have been
“allowed” to be post-empire, the direct similarities between them help make the case that
empire is still a preoccupation and frequent theme in novels written forty to fifty years
after empire’s demise. Using Forster as a touchstone colonial text makes it clear that we
21
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. have, perhaps, been too quick to disassociate England and certain “English” writers from
the postcolonial situation. It becomes evident how prominent a place empire still sustains
in the English novel of the late twentieth century.
As two of the most prominent British modernist novelists, Forster and Woolf are
often paired, especially since they were also from the same social circles. But it is this
friendship and historical proximity that is used to bring the two together, rather than any
similarity in the subject matter of their novels. Such an absence is itself noteworthy: A
Passage to India and Mrs Dalloway were only published a few months apart, but in
contrast to the “industry” generated by A Passage, studies explicating empire in Mrs
Dalloway are relatively recent in date. As such, the connections made between the two
novels do not usually involve empire, despite the fact that comparisons between the two
can emphasize the pervasiveness of empire—and anxieties regarding it—in both novels.
Comparing the two is one way of demonstrating how novels set in London are as
significantly about empire as novels situated in the colonies.
The similarities between Mrs Dalloway and A Passage to India abound. For
example, as Clarissa learns from the experience of her “double” or alter ego, Septimus
Warren Smith, a World War One veteran, so Adela Quested, the main character of A
Passage To India, has a similar double in her traveling companion and future mother-in-
law, Mrs. Moore. Mrs. Moore— and the personal crisis she faces in India—has been
considered to be Forster’s portrayal of a particular kind of identity crisis occurring as a
result of the war “Her experience becomes, in fact, allegorical of the breakdown of
nineteenth-century reliance upon cultivation of human affection when faced with the
horror of the First World War” (Das xi). Septimus is devastated by the war, and Mrs.
22
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Moore is a representation of the devastation of the war both characters enable the
protagonists—Garissa and Adela—to experience an epiphany about their roles in the
world.
The similarities between the two novels extend further. Just as Adela is
tormented by the echo she hears after her trauma in the cave, so Clarissa is continually
bothered and interrupted by the sounds of Big Ben chiming out the hour. Furthermore,
throughoutMrs. Dalloway, Clarissa often appears to struggle against what her life has
become once she made the decision to marry Richard Dalloway. As I will show in
chapter two, she devises her own way of manipulating the traditional marriage role, and
is as content within it as she is discontent. However, her unhappiness makes her able to
understand and identify with the shell-shocked Septimus—a man ruined by merely
following along the common route laid out by empire: enlisting to fight for the
protection of us against them. The restrictions of marriage and the restrictions of empire
thus intersect Forster also has his main female character, Adela Quested, wrestle with
marriage, while using the revelations of empire to talk herself out of succumbing to such
a marriage. Marriage and empire change a woman in strangely conjunctive ways. For
example, Adela comes to India with a healthy skepticism as to the role of the British
there, but after agreeing to marry Ronny Heaslop, she automatically becomes an “Anglo-
Indian” and must carry the racist baggage that comes with such a title and identity. An
hour or two after the engagement occurs, Adela already seems different. Forster writes,
His [Ronny’s] voice grew complacent again; he was here not to be pleasant but to keep the peace, and now that Adela had promised to be his wife, she was sure to understand. 5’What does our old gentleman of the car think?’ she asked, and her negligent tone was exactly what he desired. (96)
23
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Adela has no Sally Seton with whom she can discuss the implications of marriage, so she
uses the canvas of empire to express her misgivings. She looks at the Marabar Hills as
the sun sets and muses, “How lovely they suddenly were! But she couldn’t touch them.
In front, like a shutter, fell a vision of her married life. She and Ronny would look into
the club like this every evening.. .while the true India slid by unnoticed” (47). She
connects what she dislikes about the role of the British in India, with what she fears she
will dislike about her role in marriage. Virginia Woolf makes a similar conflation
between marriage and empire when she has Clarissa frequently reassure herself about the
choice she made to marry Richard Dalloway instead of Peter Walsh, by negatively
equating Peter with his role as an administrator in India.
What is important and useful about these similarities is that they reveal a personal
and political anxiety that is connected to war and empire and what war has revealed
about empire. Such similarities expose a kind of minefield of cultural knowledge—an
imperial unconscious—which is potentially explosive and difficult to negotiate. Keith
Booker points out that “By the late nineteenth century India was so integral to the British
national self-image that the idea of a Britain without India was almost inconceivable”
(19). However, by the early twentieth century, when Forster and Woolf both wrote their
novels, the idea that Britain would soon be a Britain bereft of India was becoming
impossible to ignore; both novels encode this crisis and sense of loss as a critique of
imperialism. The trauma of this dissolution of empire subtly begins to infiltrate and
perhaps take the place of “the prominence of India as a motif in British literature”
(Booker 66).
24
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Parallels also exist between A Passage and Barker’s Regeneration trilogy, despite
the fact that war is only mentioned in the very last pages of A Passage. Forster has Aziz
declare to Fielding that “‘Until England is in difficulties we keep silent, but in the next
European war—aha, aha! Then is our time’” (321). Here Aziz alludes to how the chaos
that comes with war is also the chaos of empire, and it is in such moments that empire
reveals its vulnerability. Although Forster’s English characters in India frequently refer
back to the military “glories” of the Mutiny, only Aziz refers to the fact that there has just
been a “European war,” and that the peace which ensued from it is, perhaps, temporary.
Forster, although he does write quite critically about empire, mostly ignores the war and
cannot seem to resist the temptation to orientalize India, often positioning it as England’s
sensual and chaotic opposite, as seen both from the viewpoint of the English characters
who are prejudiced against India, and also from the point of view of the supposedly more
neutral narrative voice. Critical of the English presence in India and of the administrators
there who maintain that presence, Forster is still pessimistic at the thought of India
becoming England’s diplomatic equal. He even has the sympathetic Fielding scorn the
idea: “India a nation! What an apotheosis! Last comer to the drab nineteenth-century
sisterhood! Waddling in at this hour of the world to take her seat!” (322). In contrast,
Pat Barker, albeit with the benefit of hindsight, addresses many of the same issues
occurring in the same time-period as Forster, yet she embraces the war which Forster
ignores, connecting it specifically to the corruptions of empire which Forster readily
captured in his novel. Barker’s character W. H. R. Rivers—who is in many ways the
Fielding equivalent in her Regeneration trilogy—is able to see the scope of empire’s
inequities and its impending demise because of what the horrors of World War I have
25
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. revealed to him about the workings of empire. Rivers’s war experiences make him go
back in his mind and revisit his experiences as an ethnologist researching the Islanders of
the Torres Straits for his book on kinship. It is this juxtaposition that Barker has Rivers
make between war and empire which enables Rivers to grasp what remains just out of
Fielding’s reach, that empire is based on a system of fabricated dichotomies, whose
boundaries can, should, and will be dismantled.
It is significant that Rivers’s investigation into and processing of his own
experience as a British academic doing “fieldwork” in the colonies takes place in the
context of his work as a war psychiatrist working with shell-shocked soldiers. Thus, the
view that the reader gets of Rivers’s evaluation of empire is tempered by and in a way
inseparable from what he has witnessed on the frontlines of empire’s war. Rivers might
have felt the same way at the time he was in the Torres Straits in 1898—he of course
might then have viewed the witch-doctor Njiru as his equal, as he does when he
reminisces about his experiences. But because Barker presents Rivers’s colonial
experiences as a recollection made during the war, he—and the reader—sees empire
through the lens of war; the benefit he achieves from this retrospection parallels the
benefit Barker has in writing about empire after its demise. Therefore, whereas Forster’s
Aziz can make the realization that the desire of British women like Adela and Mrs.
Moore to simply see India is part of the way empire retains its power, when he claims
that “This pose of ‘seeing India' which had seduced him to Miss Quested at Chandrapore
was only a form of ruling India” (306), Fielding himself, although sympathetic to the
colonized, is not able to do the same. He cannot see the significance of his simply being
26
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. in India—and that, like Rivers’s ethnological observations, his presence there as a school
teacher is part of how empire works.
Just as Forster uses the Mutiny as a touchstone event, while avoiding addressing
the more recent and disturbing events at Jallianwala Bagh, so Margaret Drabble, inThe
Gates o f Ivory, writes about the dissolution of the British Empire by having her
characters be preoccupied with Cambodia, a country which—significantly—was not a
colony of Britain. Her characters—while forward-thinking enough to not overtly mourn
the loss of empire—frequently refer to the change in cultural identity caused by the
dissolution of empire. Stephen Cox, one of Drabble’s main characters, travels to
Cambodia with the perhaps irreconcilable goals of being artistically inspired and
researching the atrocities of Pol Pot. His passage east is very much motivated by the
colonial literature of the past—so much so that at a crucial moment for Stephen in
Cambodia, the narrator interrupts by declaring: “Beware what you read when young....
It may bring you to this shore, this brink, this bridge” (356). Stephen constantly has
Conrad in mind, but Kurtz is not Stephen’s only literary forebear, there is an underlying
Forster element to Stephen’s passage East, so that whereas he ends up, perhaps, a Kurtz,
he begins an Adela Quested.
If in The Gates o f Ivory, Conrad’s Heart o f Darkness functions as the 1857
Mutiny—as a rallying cry for empire despite the fact that many of the characters admit to
not grasping its import and will thus query “What actuallyhappens in it? Who is going
where and why?” (237)—then Forster is the Jallianwala Bagh, with the end of the kind of
passage East represented in his novels more what Stephen seems to be unconsciously
mourning. Stephen never mentions Forster—it is Conrad whom he tries to emulate—yet
27
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. his reactions in moments of crisis are voiced in Forster’s terms. He hears the “bourn
bourn” which was the sound of nothingness confronting Adela in the Marabar Caves; and
although lying sick in the jungle, his experiences are aligned with Adela’s when he
thinks, “Why try to describe the real thing? It was not even very real. It was a shadow of
a shadow on the wall of a cave” (356). Drabble has Stephen describe himself as an “ old-
fashioned book person,” and his passage East reflects this. In a postmodern way,
however, Stephen is aware of his anachronisms. While at a border camp waiting to begin
his journey into Cambodia, Stephen looks around at his various fellow-traveiers and
thinks, “Were they out of step with their age, all of them, a ragged hangover from the
past, emotional cripples, nostalgic dreamers of dreams, bora out of their true time?...
Have they been unable to adapt to the eighties?” (124). Drabble writes that “Stephen Cox
hangs between two worlds. He is a go-between” (275); yet Stephen also seems to “hang”
between two eras, the imperial and postimperial. By referencing Forster’s A Passage in
times of crisis, Drabble indicates that these crises are empire-related. When her
characters search for a personal and cultural identity in the historical moment of the late
twentieth century, it becomes evident that any passages East will be less Conrad and
more Forster—yet not even a Forster passage, quite. While Forster still posited India as
Britain’s other, despite his awareness of the problems inherent in doing so. Drabble has
her characters come to the belated conclusion that they can no longer define themselves
against a colonial—or postcolonial—East
Amitav Ghosh revisions A Passage to India in his novel, The Shadow Lines.
Ghosh opens The Shadow Lines with an Indian family making the “reverse” passage from
India to England. His novel begins: “In 1939, thirteen years before I was bom, my
28
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. father’s aunt, Mayadebi, went to England with her husband and her son, Tridib” (3). By
establishing such a passage in his first sentence, Ghosh signals to the reader that his novel
is a postimperial response to E. M. Forster’s A Passage To India. The passages that
Ghosh’s characters will make, from this 1939 trip to the narrator’s academic research trip
in the late seventies and early eighties, are very much o f the new world order, and as
such, are significantly different from the passages of Forster’s characters. Ghosh’s May
Price does travel to India like Adela Quested did before her, and, like Adela, unwittingly
ends up in the center of a conflict. However, whereas in Forster’s novel the conflict only
served to solidify the opposing mindsets of both the Indians and the English, and thus
sent each side back to their comer of the ring, so to speak, Ghosh’s narrator tries to de
code all the intricacies of the events set off by May’s visit. Many of the scenes in The
Shadow Lines reference scenes of A Passage; in the way that they differ can be seen
some of the transitions made from colonial to postcolonial times. However, Ghosh uses
the correspondence between the two novels to indicate that in the seventies—the present
time of the novel—there is still a “shadow” of colonialism which still plies the colonialist
trade, so to speak. Ghosh thus questions thepost of the postimperial state.
To see the method in the way Ghosh parallels and updates certain scenes from A
Passage, I am going to explicate a seemingly insignificant moment that occurs shortly
after Adela Quested has come to India to see her friend, Ronny Heaslop, in action as a
Colonial Administrator. While taking an evening car-ride in the Nawab’s car, they have
an accident and the car ends up in the embankment Thus ensues chaos—the kind which
Forster enjoys conceiving of as part of India and the experience of India. So picture the
scene: it is now quite dark, the car lies mostly off the road and in the embankment in the
29
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. countryside, the driver begins to fix the car, the Nawab is upset, Ronny and Adela putter
and hover, and whatever the car hit—a hyena, buffalo, and goat are all proposed as the
unlucky beast—is on the loose. What else can round out this scenario? Enter a pug.
Miss Derek, an Englishwoman who works for a Maharani in the Mudkul State, and has
more or less hijacked her employer’s car for a few days, appears on the road in said
car—just in the nick of time. Her companions are a harmonium and two dogs. Ronny
asks for a lift and she replies, “I’ll take three of you if one’ll sit in front and nurse a pug.
No more” (91). The Anglo-Indian driver is left behind repairing the car (there is no room
in Miss Derek’s car—and at this point no room in the universe—for such a conjoining of
England and India), Ronny and Adela are safely ensconced in the back where they can
resume holding hands, and the Nawab Bahadur? He’s stuck in the front with the pug on
his lap. It is colonial times: an Indian animal has caused chaos and damage, and an
English animal is used to humiliate an Indian man.
Now skip to about fifty years later. The English May Price—very much Adela
Quested’s counterpart—has come to India to see it, and to perhaps begin a relationship
with Tridib, the narrator’s uncle; Tridib “met” May when she was a baby and he a young
boy in London, and had recently started up a correspondence with May that was romantic
in subtext May, like Adela, is troubled by what is now Britain’s colonial past in India.
She is horrified by the Queen Victoria memorial in Calcutta, and is very much a
principled idealist who believes the world can change and that she can help change it
May and Tridib are taking the narrator along on a car-trip to Diamond Harbour. The
narrator is only eight or nine, here, yet he recognizes that there is tension between May
and Tridib: they seem to have been fighting. As they are speeding down the highway,
30
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. they see a shape in the road ahead, slow down as they pass it, and notice that it is a dog
who has been hit by a car and is dying, but is not yet dead. Tridib wants to keep going,
but May forces him to stop the car so that she can do something to help. What follows is
an absolutely horrific scene in which May uses a dull penknife to end the dog’s suffering.
No need for detail. Suffice it to say that Tridib at first thinks May is crazy to do what she
does, and May gets angry at Tridib for at first not helping: “Can’t you help a bit? she
said. All you’re good for is words. Can’t you ever do anything?” (170). To interpret this
dog scene is a more difficult venture than to interpret Forster’s pug and goat moment,
because it reflects its postcolonial tensions and interconnections which are not as black
and white as colonial tensions were made out to be. Tridib, who often is anglophile in
inclination, wants to do nothing here, while May, who has guilt over the colonization of
India, wants to help; everything is complicated further because to help here means to kill
the Indian dog. May does end its suffering, but only after adding a new kind of suffering
and fear to the mix.
May is able to do more than Adela, but as an Englishwoman in India with a
colonial legacy that has not been dismantled along with its colonial status, May ends up
stepping into the mire created by the partition that followed Britain’s precipitous and
disorganized withdrawal. The chaos that May unwittingly causes reveals how stringently
detrimental the connection still is between empire and India. May thus follows in
Adeia’s footsteps, yet this time the outcome is deadly. May ends up in the center of a
calamity that does not depart that significantly from the calamity unwittingly caused by
Forster’s Adela. Ghosh has May evoke Adela, and in doing so proves that many
tensions, nursed by the British Empire, have yet to dissipate. That Ghosh, and the other
31
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. novelists in this dissertation, use, reference, and revision Forster’s A Passage To India, a
touchstone text for the problems of empire, is emblematic of how empire—even in its
dismantled state—is still a central concern of the contemporary novel set in England.
In her essay, “Three Women’s Texts and a Critique of Imperialism” the
postcolonial critic, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, writes that “It should not be possible to
read nineteenth-century British literature without remembering that imperialism,
understood as England’s social mission, was a crucial part of the cultural representation
of England to the English” (262). If this is true of nineteenth-century literature, then it
seems even more important to remember imperialism—when its function as England’s
“social mission” was beginning to falter—as a crucial part of the “cultural representation
of England to the English” in the Hrst half of the twentieth century when reading another
“woman’s text”—Mrs Dalloway, a book written in the early 1920’s. And indeed, if Mrs
Dalloway is approached with empire in mind, it becomes evident how inextricably
imperialism is a part of Mrs Dalloway's London. In Elleke Boehmer’s Colonial and
Postcolonial Literature, she comments that “Virginia Woolf’s writing also houses
persisting imperialist attitudes alongside anti-colonial sentiment. This is despite—or
perhaps indeed because of—the fact that she did not herself experience the Empire at first
hand” (141-2). Whereas Woolf was never in the colonies, I argue in my chapter two,
“Knitting Together Everything & Ending on Three Notes”: 2 Becomes 3 in Virginia
Woolf’s Mrs Dalloway," that she did indeed “experience the Empire at first hand,” and
that, as Said proved with Jane Austen’s Mansfield Park, empire was likewise an
inextricable facet of Woolf’s London life.
32
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Since the events of Mrs Dalloway occur on one day of June 1924, not far from the
end of the war, there are simple references to war’s proximity. In the sixth paragraph of
the novel, Garissa Dalloway thinks, “For it was the middle of June. The War was
over...thank Heaven—over. It was June. The King and Queen were at the Palace” (5).
With this last sentence, Garissa comforts herself that all is now as it should be: the war
is over, the British Empire can claim victory, and the heads of the empire—the King and
Queen—are home; order has been maintained. Or so it seems; for the war has created a
rupture—not only for those touched by the deaths caused by the war, but for all who
share in the general cultural consciousness. War made the dark side of empire
unignorable, and the evidence for this is revealed in Mrs Dalloway by the fact that the
tragedies of war so repeatedly are connected to issues of empire, and lie so close to the
surface of characters’ conscious thoughts. For example, a few pages after Garissa thinks
of the end of war, a limousine passes by and rumors spread that it contains a Queen,
Prince, or Prime Minister. These rumors set off a chain-reaction of thought:
for in all the hat shops and tailors’ shops strangers looked at each other and thought of the dead; of the flag; of Empire. In a public house in a back street a Colonial insulted the House of Windsor which led to words, broken beer glasses, and a general shindy.... For the surface agitation of the passing car as it sunk grazed something very profound. (25-6)
The supposed presence of a head of the British Empire causes a “wound” which reveals
how the thought processions involving the London everyday of the ordinary English
citizen continually bleed into thoughts of empire. This bleeding cannot be easily
stanched, however; for as Mrs Dalloway progresses, many symbols of the British state as
easily trigger such hesitations and doubts about empire—a rift the war has caused.
33
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Virginia Woolf does not view war and empire as a pair unto themselves: instead,
she elevates the issue of gender relations to the side of war and empire, and considers
them an equally guilty trio. The language of all three institutions relies on a simplistic
binary that invariably compartmentalizes everything as this or that: in war, one side is
good, the other bad; empire is based on the us/them binary; and gender as a social
construct, of course, consists of women being “other’' to men. Woolf thought that
“Churchgoers’ practice in believing that men are better than women prepares them to
accept other hierarchies, such as ‘England is better than Germany’ or ‘our navy is better
than your navy’” (Phillips 131). Gender relations, empire, and war are constructed with a
framework of binaries—and in turn work to perpetuate this construction. In my second
chapter, then, I argue that in Mrs Dalloway, Woolf confronts these three issues which all
thrive on the division of everything into two, by having Clarissa Dalloway turn all
twosomes that she comes into contact with into three. In this way, Woolf uses the
master’s tools to dismantle the master’s house. Specifically, Woolf has Clarissa
Dalloway fight against the restrictions of the all-pervasive binary by consistently
choosing to bring a third person into her relationships.
Critics have long pointed out how Septimus Warren Smith serves as Clarissa
Dalloway’s double in the novel. Since Clarissa is in many ways the archetypal upper-
class middle-aged woman, it is significant that her alter ego in the book is an ill and
traumatized war veteran. By setting up all sorts of parallels and unexpected similarities
between Clarissa and Septimus, Woolf is able to raise the key point thatboth characters
have been wounded by war and are victimized by empire. However, Clarissa’s one
doubling with Septimus is far outnumbered by the many “threesomes” she is a part of.
34
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Such triangulation—and its ensuing power shifts and tensions—ultimately becomes a
more significant pattern than her pairing with Septimus Warren Smith. Clarissa is a
participant in five significant triangles: with her husband, Richard, and Peter Walsh; with
Peter Walsh and Sally Seton; with Doris Kilman and Elizabeth; with Septimus and Doris
Kilman; and with the old woman who lives across the street and Septimus. In each
relationship, it is Clarissa who continually brings a third person into what had been a
twosome; she seems to both enjoy and thrive upon the shifting balances of power which a
threesome enables. For example, when Garissa is feeling insecure about how her party is
turning out, she cheers herself up by reminding herself of her struggle with Miss Kilman
for Elizabeth’s affections. She thinks happily of “Kilman her enemy. That was
satisfying; that was real” (265). The comfortable and shifting dynamic of a trio bolsters
Clarissa: she escapes from the constraints of a binary by always complicating the
either/or with a third option. By having Clarissa always turn to a third option, Woolf is
able to subtly question the hierarchies that such binaries inevitably construct; she
connects the inherent inequalities within the traditional male/female relationship to
inequalities in the imperial world at large.
Woolf also attaches symbolic significance to the triangles which Garissa uses as a
refuge of sorts. An example of this which I explain in detail in the chapter is how in the
Clarissa-Richard-Peter triangle, Woolf complicates what is in some ways a simple love
triangle by constantly referring to Richard’s profession as a member of parliament in
England, and Peter’s as an Anglo-Indian colonial administrator. Such a comparison
always ends up in Richard’s favor, for Peter seems sullied by his connection to India:
doing the empire’s dirty work often makes Peter the weak link in that particular triangle.
35
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. (This is despite the fact that, like the Bertrams’ Antiguan plantation in Jane Austen’s
Mansfield Park, Peter Walsh’s work is the work that makes Garissa Dalloway’s London
financially possible.) The power shifts that are represented in the Garissa-Richard-Peter
triangle, therefore, go beyond the personal circumstances of both men desiring to marry
Garissa; instead Woolf uses the dynamics between the three characters to signify the
tensions which were beginning to manifest themselves in that particular historical
moment of 1924 post-war Britain. In such a comparison between a member of
parliament and a colonial administrator in India, Peter does not fare well: as an Anglo-
Indian, Peter Walsh becomes less the third point of the triangle and more the third wheel.
That most of her characters associate a negative connotation with Peter’s work in India
reveals much about Woolf’s own view of empire. By showing Garissa gaining insight
from and making things better for herself by changing a simple two to a more
complicated three, Woolf thus is able to hint at the benefits that would also be attained by
similarly complicating the simple binaries of empire and war.
In my third chapter, “Empire Revised in Pat Barker’s Regeneration Trilogy,” I
examine how Barker documents the cracking surface of Empire in her trilogy, using the
war as a way to expose both the discrepancies and hypocrisies of empire, as well as the
more positive changes that accompany its nascent dissolution. All three novels of
Barker’s World War I trilogy— Regeneration, The Eye In The Door, and The Ghost
Road—combine the actions and stories of fictional characters, with real-life people with
documented war stories of their own, such as the poets Wilfred Owen and Siegfried
Sassoon, and the psychiatrist, W. H. R. Rivers. Setting her fiction during the Great
War—an event which is considered to have had a significant and irreversible impact on
36
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. cultural consciousness, a marker of the end of an entire way of being, and blamed for
“revers[ing] the Idea of Progress” (Fussell 8)—enables Barker to portray this supposedly
new disillusionment, as well as show that the war did not so much create anew a
troubling situation, but rather ripped the curtain away from the long-established workings
of the British Empire. By constantly juxtaposing issues of war with issues of empire,
Barker shows that the upheaval revealed by the Great War was there fomenting just under
the surface all along.
Barker’s choice of topic for her trilogy can be seen as an indication that this
upheaval is still a concern in England today. All three novels were hugely successful:
Regeneration was shortlisted for the Booker prize and chosen by the New York Times as
one of the four best novels of 1992;The Eye in the Door won the 1993 Guardian fiction
prize; and The Ghost Road won the 1995 Booker Prize. Regeneration was made into a
movie, joining in the sudden popularity and spate of Hollywood World War II movies.
Furthermore, Barker was not the only one to be focusing on the World Wars; in the early
nineties, for example, Rebecca West’s The Return o f the Soldier and Susan Hill’sStrange
Meeting—both, war novels—were reissued. In a review inThe New Yorker of several
World War II books, John Gregory Dunne muses on how the publication of such books
“crowns a season during which we have seen America grow particularly fond of the
Second World War” because “the war in Europe is viewed largely as an American
triumph” (98). I will posit that the English have returned to the First World War for
precisely the opposite reasons—a reliving of the beginning of the end.
It is in The Ghost Road, the third novel of the trilogy, where Barker really makes
the connection between empire and war clear. The chapters alternate between the
37
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. activities of one of Dr. Rivers’s patients, Billy Prior, at the front, and Rivers’s own
memories of doing ethnological field work in the colonies of Melanesia. In case the
reader does not immediately see the cause and effect going on here, Barker includes
narrative hints, from the more subtle duplication of scene and language (switching from
Rivers’s tent in Melanesia to Billy Prior’s tent at the front), to explicit musings of the
war/empire connection made by Rivers himself. In addition to frequently pairing the
effects of war with the effects of empire, Barker’s Rivers probes the alleged differences
between the ways of the colonizers and the colonized. For example, after Rivers views
the shrine that his landlady has created for her soldier son killed in the war, he “thought
about what he’d just seen: the portrait, the flowers. A shrine. Not fundamentally
different from the skull houses of Pa Na Gundu where he’d gone with Njiru. The same
human impulse at work. Difficult to know what to make of these flashes of cross-cultural
recognition” (116-7). By dismantling these boundaries between the “us” of the English
and the “them” of the colonized Melanesians, Rivers questions the whole (shared)
foundation of war and empire.
Pat Barker’s Billy Prior, a fictional participant in World War I, is a product of
hindsight; this is not to say that Billy Prior is unbelievable, but that he is a man who
would be quite at home in the second half of the twentieth century, as well. Although
suffering from the same war-induced disease as Septimus Warren Smith, Billy reflects
the fact that Barker wrote her novels seventy years after Woolf wrote Mrs Dalloway;
shell shock is no longer a half-inexplicable condition. Whereas Septimus’s condition is
only sketched, Billy’s is analyzed fully. Cathy Caruth describes how “trauma is not
locatable in the simple violent or original event in an individual’s past, but rather in the
38
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. way that its very unassimilated nature—the way it was precisely not known in the first
instance—returns to haunt the survivor later on” (4). For Septimus, this trauma is his
experience in the war, in general, but more specifically his witnessing of the death of his
best friend, Evans. Woolf writes that “when Evans was killed, just before the Armistice,
in Italy, Septimus, far from showing any emotion or recognizing that here was the end of
a friendship, congratulated himself upon feeling very little and very reasonably. The War
had taught him. It was sublime” (130). Septimus does not consciouslyknow how he has
been affected by Evans’s death and thus it is that he now sees Evans everywhere he
looks.
In contrast, Billy Prior understands exactly what he is going through—although
such knowledge does not necessarily give him control over his mental state. Where
Septimus’s attraction to Evans is just hinted at—they are “two dogs playing on a hearth
rug” and ’They had to be together, share with each other, fight with each other, quarrel
with each other” (130)—Billy Prior is fully aware of his bisexuality. And whereas
Septimus’s shell shock has apparently been caused by his war experiences alone, Barker
has Billy Prior’s shell shock be caused by his war experiences as well as by his childhood
experiences of everyday English patriarchal life. While Septimus cannot escape from his
memories of Evans, Billy’s shell shock manifests itself by his ability to “blank out,” or
escape, certain experiences. As a child, Billy would go into a trance when his father
came home drunk and abused his mother; the same thing now happens to him when he is
at the front The war, then, works as a kind of extension of the patriarchal tensions that
Billy had to deal with as a young boy. When Billy blanks out at the front his persona
becomes that of a caricature of a super-warrior. This Billy is a “warrior double, a
39
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. creature formed out of Flanders clay” who tells his psychiatrist that ‘“I was bom two
years ago. In a shell-hole in France. I have no father”’ (E 240-5). As a soldier, this
double follows the wartime ideal to the letter, yet he is portrayed as frightening, not
admirable, and thus with his odiousness mocks the ideal. In contrast to Septimus, who
was harassed by his doctors, Billy seeks out psychoanalysis with the wonderful Dr.
Rivers in order to pinpoint exactly what is happening to him. Barker thus rewrites the
Great War and the beginnings of the dissolution of empire with a postmodern character
who can cope with the occurring historical crises. She makes him aware of what is going
on in a way that is soothing to the reader; for Billy, the trauma is known as it happens, so
it is never a trauma, quite. Barker sends Billy back in time to analyze the event from all
sides as it happens, thus thwarting the surprise of the trauma of the war and negating the
“compulsion to repeat” (Freud 21). Billy is a World War I soldier with the benefit of
post-World War II expertise.
It is the traits Barker emphasizes about her three main characters—Siegfried
Sassoon, Billy Prior, and W. H. R. Rivers—that reveal much about her methods
regarding empire. Barker’s Sassoon is supposed to be a portrayal of the real man, and as
such she does not deviate much from the known facts about his life and wartime
experiences. He is very much a man of his times and is tormented by the futility of
trench warfare. Barker emphasizes Sassoon’s many dual aspects: that he wrote an anti
war declaration while at the same time being a much medalled and respected soldier, that
he chose to return to the Front and would initiate daredevil raids—and then return to
camp and write an anti-war poem. He is a writer, yet he is writing from within the
historical situation; he does not have the benefit of hindsight In contrast as we have
40
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. seen, Barker’s Billy Prior—a wholly fictional character—is in many ways a postmodern
character. Billy crosses all boundaries: he can pass for both working and officer class,
he is both gay and straight, healthy and sick, pro and anti-war; more importantly,
however, Billy is always incredibly aware of what is going on around him and the
underlying reasons for it Barker has set loose into the fray of the Great War a
postmodern fellow equipped with hindsight and the mindset of the second half of the
twentieth century.
Ultimately, however, it is River’s task to psychoanalyze and help both Sassoon
and Billy. He is the hearer of their testimony of the war; he processes and integrates the
modem and postmodern viewpoints. Rivers is very much a Freudian—and as such is
slightly ahead of his own times. He has studied Freud’s theories, and takes the Freudian
approach to the treatment of his patients. As Shoshana Felman writes in Testimony,
Freud began the “psychoanalytic dialogue...in which the doctor’s testimony does not
substitute itself for the patient’s testimony, but resonates with it, because, as Freud
discovers, it takes two to witness the unconscious” (15). This is Rivers’ role in Barker’s
trilogy: he, perhaps as a stand-in for the reader, is able to go farther than Sassoon, a
victim of his times, and Billy, a victim of being out of his times. Rivers, as a hearer of
testimony, is the one who is able to acknowledge—and finally celebrate—empire’s
demise.
In the Thatcherite eighties, there was a rather bizarre resurgence of nostalgia for
empire evident in film projects, television, and general cultural commentary. As Salman
Rushdie declared in an essay written in 1983, “Anyone who has switched on the
television set, been to the cinema or entered a bookshop in the last few months will be
41
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. aware that the British Raj, after three and a half decades in retirement, has been making a
sort of comeback” (87). Why did nostalgia for empire re-awaken at this particular point
in time? Keith Booker claims that the “view of twentieth-century history as the story of
the decline and fall of the empire often shows up in British literature as a desire to
awaken from the nightmare of history. This ambivalence (even horror) toward history
can best be seen in a postcolonial work like Paul Scott’sRaj Quartet...” (129). Whereas I
agree with Booker that twentieth-century British literature frequently contains the “desire
to awaken from the nightmare” or trauma of the dissolution of empire, and that novels
with an overt empire theme like Paul Scott’s Raj Quartet are, perhaps, a logical place to
start, in my fourth chapter, ‘“The Great Adventure Into Nowhere’: Postimperial Trauma
and the New Passage East in Margaret Drabble’s The Gates o f Ivory,” I assert that it is
equally as important to examine how such trauma surfaces in novels that are wrongly
disassociated from this Raj revival and postcolonial tensions. It is in these novels where
we can find the answer to why empire’s nostalgia “makes a comeback” towards the end
of the twentieth century.
Salman Rushdie and Margaret Drabble often write about the same London, yet
Rushdie’s London is automatically considered to concern the remains of empire, whereas
Drabble’s London is not given this same kind of interpretation. As I explain in chapter
four, there seems to be a history of critics classifying Drabble’s writing as having
different aims from those of her postcolonial and postmodern peers. Roberta Rubenstein,
for example, will claim that Drabble “raises complex questions about competing social
and political forces in contemporary British life” (101), yet does not note how often these
questions are connected to issues of empire. Patricia Waugh asserts that Drabble
42
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. eschewed most stereotypical postmodern novel characteristics and instead returned “to
the traditional preoccupations of the psychological and domestic novel, but self
consciously from the perspective of writing as a woman” (24). However, Drabble
herself, in a speech she gave to the American Academy of Arts and Letters in May of
1997, sees her writing as being very much a political portrayal of the contemporary world
and classified her goals as being similar to that of Salman Rushdie. Complaining first
about the new abundance of nostalgic, historical novels, she queried, “But who, one
begins to wonder, is tackling the present? Have we abandoned it, despaired of it?” (23).
She answers these questions by championing Rushdie, claiming that “Rushdie grapples
both with the historical and the contemporary.... He confronts the contemporary world
and the urban world with a courage and an invention that outrun those who pursue him.
So it can be done” (23). Drabble then briefly outlined the novel she was working on(The
Peppered Moth), with its plot overtly Rushdiesque in scope. I believe that Drabble’s
most recent novels—the trilogy in particular—already share many components of a
Rushdie novel: they too are “historical and contemporary” and deal with the empire as it
is now—defunct—and not as it was in its “glory days”. So when Drabble concluded that
“The past can move us into the future, in a way that has nothing to do with nostalgic
retreat into the pastoral” (23), I claim that in her novels Drabble has already used the past
in such a way.
In The Gates o f Ivory, the thoughts of Drabble's characters frequently are
punctuated by references to empire. They grapple with what in the eighties and nineties
seems to be always waiting around the comen the realization of the demise of Britain’s
imperial identity and the necessity of forming a new, postimperial English identity. In
43
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Beyond The Pleasure Principle, Freud writes of how a person suffering from a traumatic
neurosis experiences a “compulsion to repeat” and will continually re-experience the
trauma, often in dreams and hallucinations. The traumatic neurosis forms, in part, as a
result of not being prepared for the trauma, and thus not having built up the requisite
anxiety which “protects its subject against fright and so against fright neuroses” (11).
That Drabble’s English characters are just now—forty or so years after the empire’s
official demise—coming to terms with a cultural identity that is no longer that of being
rulers over one-fifth of the land of the globe, connects to Freud’s idea of a traumatic
neurosis. The demise of empire is a culturally traumatic moment that is compulsively
returned to in order to build up the anxiety that will eventually serve as a passage to a
state of acceptance and acclimation to postimperial life. For example, in a melancholy
moment of reflection on London Bridge, Alix’s train of thought begins with her
husband’s illness and gradually travels to the figurative “Gates of Empire at Heathrow”
(294). She then thinks of the chain of peoples who have reflectively looked at the
Thames, “the No-people, the Celts, the Belgae, the Romans, the Angles, the Saxons, the
Normans, the Huguenots, the Dutch potters, the refugees from the pogroms of Russia and
Poland, the survivors of the Final Solution, the Hungarians, the Turks, the Indians, the
Pakistanis, the West Indians, the Africans, the Cypriots, the Vietnamese, the
Cambodians” (293-4). That there has been a history of a multitude of peoples in London
reassures Alix about the inhabitants of London today; perhaps the present is not so
completely divorced from the past. It is also significant that Alix’s list contains
references to empires that dominated over England; she connects her present time, then,
to other times when England were not the “rulers” so to speak. Alix’s feelings about
44
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. contemporary England vacillate, but that a character’s thoughts can elide smoothly from
personal trauma to aspects of England’s postimperial condition reveals an uneasiness
about the repercussions of this new condition.
Drabble makes it clear that the global cultural economy is, indeed, global.
Traveling in the east, Stephen Cox frequently comments on the international aspect of his
surroundings. Wherever he goes, his fellow travelers are quite a mix; he is often noting
“the motley of hotel guests. Japanese, German, Thai, American, Korean, French,
Swedish” (52). In addition, he experiences many moments of cultural amalgam, such as
when he is traveling in Aran, Thailand, and is invited to join a small village family who
are gathered around their TV watching an old movie about Mary Magdalene (171).
Stephen is not, however, completely at ease with this: with a friend he discusses “the
notion of progress and the cycles of history and its tragic empires rising and falling”
(119); he often muses fondly about the state of buildings and monuments during the
colonial era (226). Stephen is slightly ambivalent as to how postmodern his passage to
the east should actually be: he almost seems to regret that his passage to the East does
not land him in a completely alien and “other” world. Stephen travels to Cambodia to
experience an old-fashioned, imperial passage East. He specifically seeks out a kind of
Conradian imperial adventure, yet he finds instead a rather empty tragedy. In the
eighties, the adventure stories that Stephen grew up reading can not be duplicated. This
realization comes almost too late for Stephen, but Drabble implies that the next
generation—the generation that consists of Liz Headleand’s children and the first-person
narrator, Hattie Osborne—are able to better cope with, accept, and acclimate to
England’s new role in the postimperial world.
45
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Although seemingly willing to confront England’s postimperial state, Drabble’s
characters avoid a direct examination of their new condition by turning to Cambodia to
come to terms with how things are now. By focusing on the Cambodian genocide, the
characters make it an extension of twentieth-century traumas in general, and use it to
build up thean xiety needed to assuage their own cultural traumatic neuroses regarding
the end of the British empire—and try to do so indirectly, without having to delve into
the particulars of their empire’s decline. Drabble’s characters travel to Cambodia
because there the scars of war are overt, in contrast to the disjunctures of postimperial
England. However, Drabble’s characters also travel to Cambodia because there they can
work out their traumas relatively guilt-free: that is, Cambodia, not being an ex-colony of
the British Empire, is not England’s “fault”.
In this chapter I concentrate mainly on the third novel of Drabble’s most recent
trilogy, The Gates of Ivory. I claim that Drabble has the individual characters ofThe
Gates o f Ivory—together with her narrative voice of the text itself—react to and confront
empire’s decline in ways that serve as a specific response to how empire has been
represented in and produced by novels written throughout the long history of British
imperialism. She confronts the topic on three of the most firmly entrenched
literature/empire fronts: trauma and war, the symbolic and metaphorical use of women,
and the complicit role of literature, itself. Drabble examines the effect that the
dissolution of empire has had on everyday life in England, and establishes how literature
plays a central role in both bandaging and assuaging this trauma. Jameson writes that “it
is in our time, since World War II, that the problem of imperialism is as it were
46
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. restructured...” (47). We can leant about this restructuring by examining how
imperialism appears in novels like Drabble’s trilogy, the literature of our time.
In my final chapter, ‘“The Theatre of War” vs. “Memories of Riots” in Two
Novels by Amitav Ghosh,” I argue that Amitav Ghosh uses war in his novel The Shadow
Lines to show that the way events of western history are prioritized over the events of
eastern history is an insidious remnant of empire. Ghosh’s narrator is a boy who knows
England as well as he knows his own native city, Calcutta, despite the fact that when the
book begins, he has never been to England. His familiarity with London originates from
the long ago circumstance of his great great uncle, who was “a judge in the Calcutta High
Court” becoming friends with Lionel Tresawsen, a colonial administrator. The two
families have kept in touch, and the narrator grows up listening to the stories of his
second cousin, Tridib’s, stay in England as a young boy with Tresawsen’s daughter’s
family in 1939 on the eve of World War II. These stories are more than just stories to the
narrator his own identity is intertwined with them, and when he later visits London he
knows details of houses and neighborhoods as if he hadn’t just experienced these places
vicariously. His personal history is as much a mixture of England and India as is the
history of the two nations.
Cathy Caruth writes that “history, like trauma, is never simply one’s own, that
history is precisely the way we are implicated in each other’s traumas” (24); in The
Shadow Lines, Ghosh's narrator slowly becomes aware of how his Indian traumas are
given short shrift. Ghosh uses war to show how the conflicts of the west are prioritized
over the conflicts of the east, juxtaposing the centrality of the so-called World Wars with
the riots and violence experienced in India during and after partition. Ghosh asserts that
47
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. “The theatre of war, where generals meet, is the stage on which states disport themselves:
they have no use for memories of riots” (226). The narrator of the novel struggles against
this prioritization, although he has also internalized it. He is in love with his third cousin,
Ila, who spent many years of her childhood in London and is an anglophile, to say the
least; at times Ila’s views irk the narrator, especially when she speaks of war. Ila boasts
of the experiences of the Tresawsen family during World War II, and tells the narrator
that he wouldn’t understand the thrill of working against the Germans:
You wouldn’t understand the exhilaration of events like that—nothing really important ever happens where you are. JNothing really important? I said incredulously. JWell of course there are famines and riots and disasters, she said. But those are local things, after all—not like revolutions or anti-fascist wars, nothing that sets a political example to the world, nothing that’s really remembered. (102)
Sadly, Ila here is the voice of imperial propaganda, and she expresses the kind of mindset
that the narrator is up against in his quest to make history—and the history of
India—more inclusive of other constructs besides those of the west
The narrator’s grandmother sees England as the culmination of its wars, and she,
too, holds up England’s battles as actions India needs to emulate to become a united
country: “regimental flags hang in all their cathedrals and.. .their churches are lined with
memorials to men who died in wars, all around the world? War is their religion. That’s
what it takes to make a country” (76). When she thinks of a nation’s decisive or
laudatory action, she thinks of the two world wars and their characteristics, and when she
later travels to Dhaka in what is then East Pakistan, she is surprised that India and
Pakistan are not divided by the overt trappings of wan trenches and no-man’s-land and
the like. Again, Ghosh is using war as the framework for postcolonial issues of
nationalism, by demonstrating with war that events of western history are prioritized over
48
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the events of eastern history. Dipesh Chakrabarty writes that “‘Europe’ remains the
sovereign, theoretical subject of all histories, including the ones we call ‘Indian,’
‘Chinese,’ ‘Kenyan,’ and so on” (1); confronting such a subject becomes a central aspect
of Ghosh’s project. His narrator begins to realize that there are other worthy subjects as
he comes to see how the wars of the west and stories of it have displaced his own
experiences of riots.
When the narrator begins to research the riots he experienced in the sixties—riots
that were Partition-based—he discovers that “There are no reliable estimates of how
many people were killed in the riots of 1964. The number could stretch from several
hundred to several thousand; at any rate, not very many less than were killed in the war of
1962” (225). He ascertains that in contrast to this marked lack of data on the events of
the riots, there are shelves and shelves in the local library containing books about the
relatively minor war against China in 1962. War—an acceptable type of western
skirmish—is documented and archived, whereas no one has discussed or written about
the riots occurring around the same time. Some political events are championed while
others are silenced. By making such a point, Ghosh raises several important questions
which I explore in depth in that chapter; What is remembered and what gets to be
remembered as history? Why isn’t Partition part of the crisis of western and European
consciousness? In the oft-used dichotomy of global versus local, why does “global” so
often equal the western local? How can one keep these dominant narratives from
overtaking the narratives of one’s own life? Such questions will also resurface in
Ghosh’s later novel, The Glass Palace. Although more comprehensive and epic in scope
than The Shadow Lines, The Glass Palace features this same conflict between war and
49
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. riots. Ghosh cuts to the heart of the matter by having a character in this novel proudly
become an officer in the British army in India, before beginning to question such an
allegiance, and eventually defecting to the Indian National Army during World War II.
Having this character, Aijun, be directly involved in both war and the military allows
Ghosh to address in more detail and in a different setting the questions that the narrator of
The Shadow Lines experiences in libraries and from stories and hearsay: Aijun acts out
what the narrator of The Shadow Lines theorizes. The narratives of war position India
similarly to how colonial narratives—both historical and literary—positioned India;
therefore, the connections between war and nation have to be severed or revisioned to
more accurately reflect a truly postcolonial nation.
When Forster’s Adela Quested is making her way back home to England, she
meets an American missionary in Egypt who asks her, “‘to what duties, Miss Quested,
are you returning in your own country after your taste of the tropics?”’ and then
continues, “‘Observe, I don’t say to what do you turn, but to what do you return. Every
life ought to contain both a turn and a return” (265). Passages east used to be that simple
for the British—and that much of a resolved binary. The Empire, however, is already not
what it was, and Adela’s trip to India, where she could not keep her allegiances from
shifting back and forth from the colonizers to the colonized, is indicative of the beginning
of its end: the border between the binaries of us and them has become shadowy. Such
“shadow lines,” however, have not dissipated in the seventy plus years between Forster’s
writing of A Passage and Amitav Ghosh’s writing of The Shadow Lines. In contrast to
the advice Adela gets about a succinct turn and return, then, Ghosh’s narrator has a
50
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. family joke about their inability to distinguish between coming and going. He writes that
if “we happened to meet an acquaintance who asked: When are you going back to
London? we would launch into a kind of patter But she has to go to Calcutta first; Not if
I’m coming to London; Nor if you’re coming to Calcutta...” (150). Their identities are
still so connected to England that there is no distinct here and there, no obvious coming
from and going to. Ghosh explains,
Every language assumes a centrality, a fixed and settled point to go away from and come back to, and what my grandmother was looking for was a word for a journey which was not a coming or a going at all; a journey that was a search for precisely that fixed point which permits the proper use of verbs of movement (150)
His grandmother’s confusion originates from her alienation from her birthplace, Dhaka,
due to partition—another casualty of Empire. But what is important to note here is how
the issues Forster raises and explores in A Passage are still resonant in the novels written
about contemporary Britain. Long after the British Empire released its claims of
ownership over one-fifth of the earth, it still plays an integral—albeit different—part in
the British novel. In the following study I will examine just exactly what its role has
become. In each chapter I research the mutual implicatedness of empire and the novel,
using war or the tropes of war as the point of entry. In my chapters on Virginia Woolfs
Mrs Dalloway, and Amitav Ghosh’s The Shadow Lines, I extend and contribute to the
postcolonial scholarship that already exists; and in my chapters on Pat Barker’s
Regeneration trilogy and Margaret Drabble's The Gates o f Ivory, I offer a much-needed
analysis and exposure of how a neglected set of postwar British novels process empire’s
aftermath.
51
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. In each of the following chapters, war frames the British Empire as it appears in
novels which represent distinct historical moments. I examine the implications of the
progression of how empire is portrayed in a novel written as empire was beginning to
dissipate; how a contemporary author looking back at this same time period uses war to
expose the beginnings of this dissolution; how empire appears in novels at the end of the
century, fifty years past its official dismantling; and how the traces of empire still have
potency post-World War II in the former colonies. The remains of empire in the
twentieth-century novel are still structures to be reckoned with, and as such should not be
granted a museum-like untouchability: this dissertation aims to show how the clockwork
of empire still occasionally will chime out the hour.
52
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. CHAPTER II
“KNITTING TOGETHER EVERYTHING & ENDING ON THREE NOTES”: 2 BECOMES 3 IN VIRGINIA WOOLF’S MRS DALLOWAY
In Mrs Dalloway, Virginia Woolf first introduces the reader to her character
Septimus Warren Smith by describing him as “aged about thirty, pale-faced, beak-nosed,
wearing brown shoes and a shabby overcoat..( 2 0 ) . Having just spent the first twenty
pages of the novel following Clarissa Dalloway on a walk to buy flowers for the party
that she is giving that evening, the discerning reader immediately notices similarities
between this description of Septimus and that given of Clarissa pages earlier his “pale-
faced, beak-nosed” portrayal echoes Clarissa’s having “a touch of the bird about her, of
the jay, blue-green, light, vivacious, though she was over fifty, and grown very white
since her illness” (4). To note such parallels between Clarissa and Septimus, however, is
old hat: much has been written of how the two characters work as an incongruous pair,
with the shell-shocked Septimus strangely resonating with Clarissa’s middle-aged and
upper-class housewife. Virginia Woolf herself prepared for the making of such parallels
with an oft-quoted diary entry in which she writes that “Mrs Dalloway has branched into
a book; & I adumbrate here a study of insanity & suicide: the world seen by the sane &
the insane side by side—something like that” (Volume Two 207). In an entry written a
little over a month later, however, Woolf again comments on the progress she is making
with Mrs Dalloway. This time she writes that, “The doubtful point is I think the character
of Mrs Dalloway. It may be too stiff, too glittering & tinsely—But then I can bring 53
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. innumerable other characters to her support”( Volume Two 272). This entry has not been
given the attention of the first one quoted above, yet I will argue that it reveals more
about the significant underlying pattern of the novel and dynamic between the characters
than can be fathomed from simply seeing Clarissa and Septimus as doubles. For Woolf
does indeed “bring innumerable other characters to [Clarissa’s] support,” and she does so
repeatedly in a triangular manner which emphasizes what at that particular point in time
she was increasingly viewing as a critical and sinister nexus: the intersection of gender
relations, war and empire.
Clarissa Dalloway almost always relates to other characters as part of a
threesome. This triangulation—and its ensuing power shifts and tensions—ultimately
becomes a much more significant pattern than her pairing with Septimus Warren Smith.
The number of threesomes that Clarissa is a part of is cause alone for the reader to take
note; that they reflect Woolf’s own political concerns is an added bonus. Clarissa is a
participant in five significant triangles: with her husband, Richard, and Peter Walsh; with
Peter Walsh and Sally Seton; with Doris Kilman and Elizabeth; with Septimus and Doris
Kilman; and with the old woman who lives across the street and Septimus. In each
formulation, there are shifting balances of power and tensions which Clarissa seems both
to enjoy and upon which she thrives. For example, when Clarissa is feeling insecure
about how her party is turning out, she cheers herself up by reminding herself of her
struggle with Miss Kilman for Elizabeth’s affections. She thinks happily of “Kilman her
enemy. That was satisfying; that was real” (265). When she interacts with Richard, her
husband, her thoughts always return to Peter Walsh; when interacting with Peter Walsh,
she inevitably mentions Richard or Sally Seton. Clarissa always seems to be escaping
54
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. from the—perhaps emotionally dangerous—interactions of one-on-one to what she sees
as the more comfortable and shifting dynamic of a trio. In addition to having Clarissa use
these triangles as a refuge of sorts, Woolf attaches symbolic significance to them as well.
In the Clarissa-Richard-Peter triangle—which is in some ways the closest to the
traditional homosocial triangle as defined by Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, with the two men
bonding with each other as they compete for the attentions and affections of the one
woman—Woolf complicates this by constantly referring to Richard’s profession as a
member of parliament in England, and Peter’s as an Anglo-Indian colonial administrator.
Such a comparison always ends up in Richard’s favor, for Peter seems sullied by his
connection to India: doing the empire’s dirty work often makes Peter the weak link in
that particular triangle, despite the fact that Peter’s work makes Oarissa London life
materially possible. The power shifts that are represented in it, therefore, go beyond the
personal circumstances of both men desiring to marry Oarissa; instead Woolf uses the
dynamics between the three characters to signify the tensions which were beginning to
manifest themselves in that particular historical moment of 1924 post-war Britain.
The triangles have a multi-dimensional aspect that is ultimately more productive
than the customary pair. To see Oarissa as part of five significant threesomes, then,
enables a reading of Mrs Dalloway that is more layered than the traditional reading,
which has focused on Oarissa and Septimus as doubles. To return to the opening
quotation then, in which Septimus is described as “aged about thirty, pale-faced, beak
nosed, wearing brown shoes and a shabby overcoat...” (20), I propose that in addition to
noting the similarities between that portrayal of Septimus and Oarissa, one should also
note the significance of Septimus’s attire: his “shabby overcoat” there is akin to the
55
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. “green mackintosh coat” of Miss Kilman’s which Clarissa has just been ranting against
on the previous page, by complaining that “Year in year out she wore that coat; she
perspired...” (16). At the same time that Septimus is introduced as Clarissa’s double,
then, he is also introduced as Miss Kilman’s: the three of them—Clarissa, Septimus, and
Miss Kilman—form one of the many significant triangles that can be found throughout
Mrs Dalloway. Woolfs addition of a third person, side or angle blocks the magnification
the powerless give to the powerful, for an interrupted binary is more easily dismantled
when middle ground creates more room for maneuvering.
In Virginia Woolf against Empire, Kathy Phillips claims that Woolfs “works can
be seen to de-emphasize the failings of characters in their personal relations and instead
to investigate personalities as products of dangerous ideologies” (xiii-xiv). Yet Woolf
also uses the “personal relations” of her characters to act out against the pervasiveness of
political ideologies which she sees as insidious. She does this most consistently with
Clarissa Dalloway herself, by having Clarissa constantly choose to be in a triangular
relationship with two other people, thus showing a penchant for the shifting tensions and
power struggles that such a formation allows. In doing so, Clarissa is able to combat the
restrictions of the traditional marriage, while also—in typical Clarissa fashion—both
subverting and playing along with the binaries associated with empire and war. Phillips
rightly maintains that “What remains is for someone like Woolf to bring to
consciousness, in readers if not characters, the links among sexual dishonesty, money
lust, and colonization: the coordinates of.. .Mrs Dalloway,” yet she fails to see Clarissa’s
many threesomes as being precisely how Woolf highlights these links while also showing
56
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. resistance to them. Clarissa's constant need for a third person is symbolic of how Woolf
desires to complicate the binaric thinking so prevalent in those times of war and empire
to be complicated. Susan Bennett Smith is correct when she writes that “Oarissa is an
inadequate model of sane bereavement to counter Septimus’s insane grief’ (317); yet
there is a third person present at that moment when Oarissa is processing Septimus’s
death: the old woman across the street. Oarissa might be inadequate on her own, but
bringing in a third person gives her the strength she needs to make her “sane
bereavement” successful. Trudi Tate contends that “Garissa’s refusal to think about the
Armenian problem is a crucial moment in the novel, and provides us with ways into
thinking about the structural relationship between Oarissa and Septimus, the war-
neurotic soldier. Who is the victim, who the victimizer; who is responsible for the
suffering of others?” (159), yet I would argue that it is Woolfs belief that such a
question can only be answered by giving up the dichotomy of victim/victimizer etc.
Clarissa is not good and she is not bad, she is not merely the sane woman who will
counteract Septimus’s insanity; Woolf resists such easy categorization for her characters
as a way of mirroring how such categorization should be resisted in one’s political
thinking as well. In her diary, Woolf writes, “...I dig out beautiful caves behind my
characters; I think that gives exactly what I want; humanity, humour, depth. The idea is
that the caves shall connect...” (Volume Two 263). These “caves” do indeed connect:
and usually in the shape of a triangle.
Clarissa, Richard, and Peter share a connection that originated decades ago when
both Richard and Peter wanted to marry Clarissa. At first glance, their configuration
might seem to fit in the mold of the homosocial triangle as demarcated by Eve Kosofsky
57
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Sedgwick in her Between Men: two men compete for the affections of a woman, but in
the process create a bond between themselves, which “is as intense and potent as the
bond that links either of the rivals to the beloved” (21). In fact, Sedgwick continues, one
can see “the bond between rivals in an erotic triangle as being even stronger, more
heavily determinant of actions and choices, than anything in the bond between either of
the lovers and the beloved” (21). Sedgwick then sites Heidi Hartmann’s “The Unhappy
Marriage of Marxism and Feminism” in which she defines patriarchy itself as “a set of
social relations between men, which have a material base, and which, though
hierarchical, establish or create interdependence and solidarity among men that enable
them to dominate women” (Hartmann 14). Taking this a step further, Sedgwick asserts
that “large-scale social structures are congruent with the male-male-female erotic
triangles...” (25). Although such “large-scale social structures” definitely have a place
in the Clarissa-Richard-Peter triangle, Woolf has created this triangle with two particular
functions which are ultimately more complex and thus more rich than the homosocial
model in which two men bond while competing for the affections of one woman. In the
first, Clarissa situates her view of her marriage in between the viewpoints and different
personalities of the two men, and uses the competing affections of each man in a power
struggle which gives her comfort: in this way she has the marriage she wants without
submitting entirely. The second way that Woolf uses the triangle has less to do with the
personal relations of the characters and more to do with the political events and tenors of
post-war England: Clarissa, the perfect English hostess, sees Richard as a representative
of British rule at home, and Peter as a representative of the British Empire abroad. In
such a comparison, between a member of parliament and a colonial administrator in
58
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. India, Peter does not fare well: as an Anglo-Indian, Peter Walsh becomes less the third
point of the triangle and more the third wheel. The disdain people feel for Peter Walsh
is, on the one hand, indicative of typical class snobbery: that Peter has to make a living
for himself is too bad. On the other hand, however, by making most of her characters
associate their negative connotation with Peter’s work so intricately with its location in
India, Woolf reveals the new—and ambivalent—view of empire.
Clarissa made a choice years ago to turn down Peter’s proposal of marriage and
instead marry Richard Dalloway. Peter was devastated; reflecting on it in the present day
he thinks of ‘The final scene, the terrible scene which he believed had mattered more
than anything in the whole of his life (it might be an exaggeration—but still so it did
seem now)” (95-6), and “His relations with Oarissa had not been simple. It had spoilt
his life, he said” (292). Clarissa feels otherwise. She presents her reasons for her
decision to choose Richard early on in the novel, when she professes that “she had been
right—and she had too—not to marry him” and makes the claim mentioned before that
“in marriage a little license, a little independence there must be” (10)—independence
which Peter would not have allowed her. Clarissa does not seem to regret her choice, yet
she does have a need to constantly replay its pros and cons. Her marriage to Richard
needs Peter’s passion and possessiveness. By thinking of the alternatives she faced and
the fact that it was choices she made—her agency—which led to her life now, Clarissa is
reassured. But this reassurance, which relies on a constant interplay in Clarissa's mind
between Richard and Peter, is found not so much in the choice itself, but in the shiftings
of power that existed at the time of the choice and which still exist now. Garissa thrives
on the crosscurrents of power that such a triangle inevitably creates—and so, really, do
59
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Peter and Richard. In interactions between two, one of them will always bring up the
third.
Garissa is always vacillating between Richard and Peter. She will happily think
of the independence Richard grants her in their marriage, and then will have a good
moment with Peter and wonder “why did I make up my mind—not to marry him?” (61-
2). Garissa will feel that being married to Richard makes her “invisible; unseen;
unknown...this being Mrs. Dalloway; not even Garissa any more; this being Mrs.
Richard Dalloway,” (24) yet then she will think of how “Richard her husband” was the
foundation for the good in her life (43). Still later, she will switch back to being troubled
by her independence, when she discovers that Richard has been independently invited to
Lady Bruton’s luncheon without her. Garissa avers that “here, there, she survived, Peter
survived, lived in each other” (12) and then admits that she does not even read Peter’s
letters when she receives them” (60). Her thoughts about the two men reveal how they
constantly switch places in her good graces.
Richard and Peter have a similar compulsion. When Richard hears of Peter’s
return while lunching at Lady Bruton’s, he is immediately prompted to remember “That
Peter Walsh had been in love with Garissa; that he [Richard] would go back direcdy
after lunch and find Garissa; that he would tell her, in so many words, that he loved her”
(162). While walking home with Hugh Whitbread after lunch, “Richard’s mind,
recovering from its lethargy, set now on his wife, Garissa, whom Peter Walsh had loved
so passionately” (173). Such an appellation seems to be one that Richard enjoys
attaching to his thoughts of Garissa; it makes her more valued and interesting, and ups
the ante of their relationship: after all, she chose him over Peter. When Richard arrives
60
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. home having purchased some flowers for Garissa, he finds that he “could not bring
himself to say he loved her; not in so many words” (179); but he can bring himself to
immediately bring up and discuss Peter Walsh’s return—which is code enough, not an “I
love you” necessarily but a “You love me” (179).
Right after Garissa thinks to herself that it was Peter’s “lack of the ghost of a
notion what any one else was feeling that annoyed her,” Peter proves her wrong by
thinking, “I know what I’m up against...Garissa and Dalloway and all the rest of them”
(69). Peter, the rejected, is able to think fondly of Richard on his own—“He was a
thorough good sort” (112)—and Garissa on her own, yet when he thinks of them as a
couple he is inevitably angered: “With twice his wits, she had to see things through his
eyes—one of the tragedies of married life” (116). Still, it is Richard’s presence that
enables the happiest moment of Peter’s life, when they are all young and at Bourton and
Garissa leaves Richard to come back and get Peter to join them. Peter thinks “He had
never felt so happy in the whole of his life!... And all the time, he knew perfectly well,
Dalloway was falling in love with her; she was falling in love with Dalloway; but it
didn’t seem to mater. Nothing mattered. They sat on the ground and talked—he and
Garissa” (94). That Richard is about to “win” Garissa is what makes that moment of
time spent with her so perfect for Peter; its perfection requires Richard as the third. Peter
also uses Garissa: when he later tells Garissa about Daisy, the woman he is engaged to
marry, telling Garissa gives Daisy luster Daisy “and her two small children became
more and more lovely as Garissa looked at them” (68). Peter needs Garissa to know
about the details of his life to make those details real to himself. All three characters
61
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. seem to derive benefit from their threesome. The shift in power that it enables defuses
the tension of a binary. In an unusual way, the resulting situation is more equitable.
The power-play that Garissa finds so beneficial is most evident in the scene
where she and Peter are reunited after his long absence in India. As they chat, their
struggle for one-upmanship goes back and forth—which is Woolfs point No character
has all of the power all of the time. Fittingly, after Garissa and Peter embrace, they both
take out “weapons”—Peter his knife and Garissa her scissors—and, thus prepared, the
battle begins. Their words are civil and stable enough, but their thoughts oscillate
wildly. When Peter asks what Garissa is sewing, Garissa thinks “He’s very well
dressed.. .yet he always criticizes me” (60). Peter at the same time is thinking about how
all the time he’s been in India, Garissa has been doing tasks like this one, mending her
dress, while married to “the admirable Richard,” and as he thinks this he becomes “more
and more irritated, more and more agitated” (61). Sensing his distress, Garissa is
calmed and it is at this point that she remembers that Peter is “perfectly enchanting” and
happily wonders, “and why did I make up my mind—not to marry him?” (61-2).
Garissa, in a Freudian slip mistake, refers to her father’s dislike for Peter, which reminds
them both that Peter wanted to marry hen “Of course I did, thought Peter; it almost
broke my heart too, he thought; and was overcome with his own grief.... I was more
unhappy than I’ve ever been since, he thought” (62). Peter then gets annoyed with his
grief and heartbreak and stops feeling nostalgic, whereas by now Garissa’s own
nostalgia for their days at Bourton are in full-swing. Garissa becomes teary and “wiped
her eyes” (62); Peter, not moved in the same way, temporarily has the power, and his
62
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. response is to be annoyed: “’Yes,’ said Peter. “Yes, yes, yes,” he said” but “Stop! Stop!
he wanted to cry” (64).
Peter thinks of his life and how it must seem a failure to the Dalloways; yet
Clarissa has become insecure at this point as well, since Peter did not join in with her
nostalgia, and thinks of how Peter is “Always making one feel, too, frivolous; empty-
minded; a mere silly chatterbox” (65). Both brought low, the battle becomes overt.
Clarissa retorts, Woolf writes,
‘Well, and what’s happened to you?’ she said. So before a battle begins, the horses paw the ground; toss their heads; the light shines on their flanks; their necks curve. So Peter Walsh and Clarissa, sitting side by side on the blue sofa, challenged each other. His powers chafed and tossed in him.... ‘Millions of things!’ he exclaimed, and, urged by the assembly of powers which were now charging this way and that and giving him the feeling at once frightening and extremely exhilarating of being rushed through the air on the shoulders of people he could no longer see, he raised his hands to his forehead. (66)
Peter has the courage, at this point, to tell Clarissa that he is in love. Clarissa doesn’t
know what to do with this information: in her thoughts she first scoffs at such a
notion—‘That he at his age should be sucked under in his little bow-tie by that monster!”
(67)—and then is made forlorn by it: “He has that, she felt; he is in love” (67). Clarissa
feels jealous; Clarissa feels bereft Yet Peter feels vulnerable. Both believe they have
lost. When Peter gets out his weapon again, his pocket-knife, Clarissa is able to rally at
the sight: “For Heaven’s sake, leave your knife alone! she cried to herself in
irrepressible irritation; it was his silly unconventionality, his weakness” (69). Peter tries
to keep up his defiance, thinking, “I know all that...I know what I’m up against” (69),
but he breaks down: Peter cries. And since Clarissa can now afford to be gracious, she
graciously kisses him.
63
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. But then Garissa deflates her own power by thinking, “If I had married him, this
gaiety would have been mine all day! J i t was aM over f°r her. The sheet was stretched
and the bed narrow” (70). In her thoughts, Garissa calls out “Richard, Richard!”, yet
then remembers he is independently lunching with Lady Bruton. Lost, then, Garissa
needs the triumvirate and turns to Peter, inwardly proposing, ‘Take me with you” (70).
Ever the warrior, Garissa composes herself and walks over to Peter. Watching her do
so, Peter thinks “And it was awfully strange.. .how she still had the power, as she came
tinkling, rustling, still had the power as she came across the room” (71). Peter tries to
wrestle this power away from Garissa, and turns to use their triangle as a weapon:
“‘Tell me,’ he said, seizing her by the shoulders. ‘Are you happy, Garissa? Does
Richard—’ JThe door opened” (71). Garissa sees her chance for escaping from what
has suddenly become an uncomfortable one-on-one: she happily pounces on the
newcomer, her daughter, Elizabeth: “‘Here is my Elizabeth,’ said Garissa, emotionally,
histrionically, perhaps” (71). Defeated—for there is no Peter-Garissa-young daughter
triangle—Peter makes his escape and runs outside. It is an emotionally exhausting battle
for Peter and for Garissa. Garissa wins, though, and she does so by expertly surfing the
waves of the shifting power dynamic; although often flummoxed, Garissa ultimately
knows when to bring in Richard to use their mdnage k trois to her advantage. With Peter
around, Garissa’s marriage has extra facets; she uses Peter and his feelings for her to
escape from the binary of husband and wife. Garissa skillfully navigates the love
triangle.
There is another factor—besides Garissa’s not choosing him—that works against
Peter Walsh in the Garissa-Peter-Richard triangle: he does the work of empire in the
64
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. colonies. Richard works for England, but his doing so at home as a member of
parliament seems only to add gloss to his patina. For instance, when Peter sees Clarissa
after a long absence, he notices Richard’s influence on her, which he describes as being
“a great deal of the public-spirited, British Empire, tariff-reform, governing-class spirit”
(116). In contrast to Hugh Whitbread’s symbolism of the sillier aspects of the British
fa9ade, Lady Bruton “preferred Richard Dalloway of course. He was made of much
finer material” (157). Lady Bruton gets Richard to advise her, and Milly Bmsh considers
him “always so dependable; such a gentleman too” (162). Woolf creates Richard as
“being pertinacious and dogged, having championed the down-trodden and followed his
instincts in the House of Commons” (175), and although he is “rather speechless, rather
stiff,” he also has surprising moments of political liberalism, such as when he thinks,
“and prostitutes, good Lord, the fault wasn’t in them, nor in young men either, but in our
detestable social system and so forth” (175). Like Clarissa, he cannot quite be pigeon
holed, and one gets the distinct impression that Richard, although stodgy, does good
work.
In contrast to this, Peter is presented as a failure, one who, when his name comes
up at Lady Bruton’s luncheon, makes everyone smile and think of “some flaw in his
character” (162). What is consequential about these alleged short-comings of Peter’s is
that they are usually connected to his work in India. Where Richard’s work in England
is seen by some as cause for admiration, Peter’s work in the colonies is cause for slightly
embarrassed scorn. He is sullied in the eyes of Garissa’s London circle by his
connection to the colonies. Regarding the homosocial triangle in E. M. Forster’s A
Passage To India, Sara Suleri writes that “In place of the orientalist paradigm in which
65
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the colonizing presence is as irredeemably male as the colonized territory is female, A
Passage To India presents an alternative colonial model: the most urgent cross-cultural
invitations occur between male and male, with racial difference serving as a substitute
for gender” (133). Woolf is similarly devising such a model in Mrs Dalloway. only
instead of replacing gender with the issue of racial difference, Woolf has Peter acquire a
negative effeminacy from his contact with the female colonized territory; thus tainted, he
becomes the weak rival in the triangle and loses clout both with Clarissa, his desired, and
Richard, his competitor. “He was the best judge of cooking in India” (237), and whereas
this makes “him attractive to women who liked the sense that he was not altogether
manly,” it does not impress the likes of Garissa and Richard. As Suleri contends for
Forster “Geography thus functions as a cultural determinant.. .and as a consequence
becomes a figure for the inefficacy of colonial travel, whether it be across acceptable
cultural or sexual borders” (146). Peter’s geographical decision to do empire work
results from his own sexual disappointment (Clarissa’s choice of Richard) while
simultaneously affecting his sexual desirability, which is lessened by his becoming an
Anglo-Indian. In this manner, Woolf suggests that there is an understated dishonor
connected to work in the colonies; the cultural opinion regarding empire is shifting.
The amount of negative connections made between Peter and his work in India is
overwhelming. Although Clarissa is always remembering Peter’s witty “sayings,” his
letters from India “were awfully dull” (4). Garissa, jealous, is horrified to hear that Peter
is married: but she seems most horrified by the fact that “he had married a woman met
on the boat going to India! Never should she forget all that!... Never could she
understand how he cared. But those Indian women did presumably—silly, pretty, flimsy
66
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. nincompoops” (10). Of course on the one hand this is most indicative of Garissa’s own
prejudices; yet on the other hand, his attraction to and attractiveness towards Anglo-
Indian women contaminates Peter. Even his association with such people—partners of
colonial workers—makes Peter’s character suspect Immediately after thinking of Peter
on his way to India, Oarissa declares, “his whole life had been a failure. It made her
angry still” (11). This is a frequent juxtaposition: when Peter tells Clarissa of his
fiancle, she thinks, “What a waste! What a folly! All his life long Peter had been fooled
like that; first getting sent down from Oxford; next marrying the girl on the boat going
out to India; now the wife of a Major in the Indian Army—thank Heaven she had refused
to marry him!” (68). India seems inextricable from Peter’s wastes and follies, and Woolf
signals these aspects of the British Empire by making the foolish Peter representative of
Empire in the colonies.
When Peter leaves Clarissa’s house, he eventually cheers up, and when he sees
his reflection, asserts “And there he was, this fortunate man, himself,” yet then connects
this fortune to the fact that “All India lay behind him; plains, mountains; epidemics of
cholera...” (my italics) (72). Clarissa contends that Peter always had trouble
appreciating the Englishness of England: “But Peter—however beautiful the day might
be, and the trees and the grass, and the little girl in pink—Peter never saw a thing of all
that” (9). As such, he is immune to the charms of the English pastoral. Yet such a
“quirk” is magnified by his time spent in the colonies. He is “the other” upon his return
to England: “the earth, after the voyage, still seemed an island to him, the strangeness of
standing alone, alive, unknown, at half-past eleven in Trafalgar Square overcame him.
What is it? Where am I?” (77-8). London is unrecognizable to him, and what he has
67
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. seen and experienced in the colonies is, in its own way, unrecognizable to people like
Clarissa and Richard. In his own thoughts Peter defends himself, asserting, “For he had
a turn for mechanics; had invented a plough in his district, had ordered wheel-barrows
from England, but the coolies wouldn’t use them, all of which Clarissa knew nothing
about” (73). As other critics have suggested, the refusal of the workers to implement
Peter’s tools makes Peter’s efficacy as an administrator suspect (Phillips 15); however,
Clarissa, as Peter points out, “knew nothing” about any of his colonial activities: it is
almost as if it would be unseemly to hear the details of empire’s work abroad. Peter was
in India, his letters were dull, he is—somehow—even more of a failure upon his return
for no acknowledged reason other than where he has been.
Often, in his own mind at least, Peter’s time abroad adds a positive sense of
mystery to his character. While walking down the streets of London, his recent return
makes him special: “he was an adventurer, reckless, he thought, swift, daring, indeed
(landed as he was last night from India) a romantic buccaneer” (80); yet even this goes
slightly askew, for when he has these thoughts, Peter is following a woman he spotted on
the street, and is fantasizing that she is encouraging him to do so. His idea of “daring”
seems more like “creepy” to the reader. Peter’s “daring” spirals to being “careless of all
these damned proprieties...respectability and evening parties” (80); in his own tame way
Peter imagines he has “gone native”. He is no Kurtz, of course, there are no heads on
sticks decorating his property, but his propriety has slipped a notch; he was always
skeptical of Clarissa’s hostess abilities and her parties, and now his skepticism can be
blamed on India. Such antagonism does go both ways. When Peter sees Clarissa
sewing, he contrasts her life with his: “here she’s been sitting all the time I’ve been in
68
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. India; mending her dress; playing about; going to parties; running to the House and back
and ail that...” (61). Yet Peter also is disdainful—or at least ambivalent—regarding his
own activities abroad. He is proud of the fact that he descends “from a respectable
Anglo-Indian family which for at least three generations had administered the affairs of a
continent,” yet he also thinks in an aside: “it’s strange...what a sentiment I have about
that, disliking India, and empire, and army as he did” (82). Towards the end of the book,
Peter even undermines his own authority by turning to Richard Dalloway for real
knowledge about India, in a scene where Woolf's two uses of the Oarissa-Richard-Peter
triangle intersect After having decided that he will go to Clarissa’s party after all, he
twice thinks that “he wanted to ask Richard what they were doing in India” and “What
did the Government mean—Richard Dalloway would know—to do about India?” (244).
Peter bears the taint of empire while Richard has the authority over it Woolf has Peter
always be Richard’s inferior. Because of his love for Clarissa, Peter has a bond with
Richard, making it logical that he would turn to Richard for information and guidance.
That Richard is the doyen in matters pertaining to India, however, is indicative of the
stigma that certain affairs of empire were acquiring.
Clarissa is part of another triangle with Peter which is also concerned with
marriage. Before Richard Dalloway arrived at Bourton, Clarissa, Peter and Sally Seton
were experiencing a summer which Clarissa uses as a marvelous touchstone throughout
the entire novel. Clarissa is fueled by these particular memories of times shared with
Peter and Sally. Significantly, she returns to no such memory of Richard. In “Rewriting
Family Ties: Woolf's Renaissance Romance,” Diana Henderson notes that “What
Clarissa need not live is the romance material that Woolf wants to reconceive, to revive
69
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. in a way that does not subdue female subjectivity. The solution would not be to return to
the old bourgeois one-and-only-love and marriage plot” (150). Clarissa returns, instead,
to the triangle; but unlike the triangle she shares with Peter and Richard—in which she
always chooses to turn a twosome into a threesome—in this instance Clarissa desires yet
fails to remain an exclusive pair with Sally. Peter always intrudes, and Clarissa cannot
forgive him for it. The dynamics of this triangle reveal the strength and pressures of the
traditional marriage plot; Woolf has the tensions between Clarissa, Sally, and Peter
illustrate just what Clarissa is up against with regards to the marriage plot of her own
life.
While reminiscing about Bourton, Clarissa thinks of how she was so in love with
Sally Seton that “Peter Walsh might have been there,” but she does not know for sure:
she was only, and blissfully, aware of Sally. Clarissa continues on to remember “the
most exquisite moment of her whole life,” which is when Sally Seton kisses her on the
lips (52). It is at this moment that the unfortunate Peter chooses to make the two into
three, and interrupts their kiss with an inane question. Clarissa avows that this
interruption “was like running one’s face against a granite wall in the darkness! It was
shocking; it was horrible!” (53). In love with Clarissa himself, Peter of course interrupts
on purpose with “his determination to break into their companionship” (53). Clarissa can
never forgive Peter for this; and one wonders whether she punishes Peter for it by later
forcing him to always be the third who interrupts her marriage to Richard. It is
interesting, however, that Woolf never presents Sally’s view of this interrupted kiss. For
Sally seems quite fond of Peter, and the two of them have many connections. To begin
with, Clarissa’s father dislikes them both, which, as Peter points out, “was a great bond”
70
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. (90). Secondly, Sally is Peter’s advocate: she wants Clarissa to marry him. Her motives
are not clear perhaps she knows that there is a secure emotional place for her in a Peter-
Clarissa marriage; or perhaps she just does not like Richard. At any rate, when they are
young, Sally writes to Peter all summer confiding in him how much Clarissa likes him:
“how they had talked of him; how she had praised him, how Clarissa burst into tears”
(95). Later, Peter thinks of how Sally had “implored him, half laughing of course, to
carry off Oarissa, to save her from the Hughs and the Dalloways and all the other
‘perfect gentlemen’ who would ‘stifle her soul’” (114). When Peter and Sally meet up at
Clarissa’s party, she repeats these sentiments, even though she herself has long been
absent from Clarissa’s life. She asks Peter, “to be quite frank then, how could Clarissa
have done it?—married Richard Dalloway?” (288). Sally has forgiven Peter for that
interruption; the two of them derive comfort from remembering a pre-Richard Dalloway
Clarissa. They both represent and reveal the limitations of the choices available to
Clarissa. For when Sally makes the claim that “Clarissa had cared for him [Peter] more
than she had ever cared for Richard. Sally was positive of that” (293-3), the reader
knows that Clarissa had cared for Sally even more.
Clarissa herself prioritizes the triangle she forms with Peter and Sally at her party.
She looks at Peter and Sally chatting, and acknowledges that they have significantly
shaped her past more than Richard has done. Henderson writes that “the return of
Clarissa’s long ‘lost’ sibling surrogates (her youthful loves Peter Walsh and Sally Seton)
challenges the centrality of the conventional marriage plot that led Clarissa away from
those friends to become Mrs. Richard Dalloway” (137). Clarissa shared with Sally the
one pairing that she did not want to be anything but* it was a twosome she loved, but
71
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. which could not withstand the conventional marriage expectations. As Henderson
enables us to see, however, Woolf does use the Garissa-Peter-Sally triangle as a means
of subverting the “centrality of the conventional marriage plot,” and she does so right up
to the last page of the book. Peter and Sally keep punctuating their conversation by
asking where is Garissa? They need her to complete their triangle. When she does
return to the party, Sally once again pleads Peter’s case: by going to talk to Richard
Dalloway, she leaves Peter and Garissa together to share the final moment of the novel.
This prevents its ending with Garissa joining her husband and daughter in what would
have been the conventional marriage plot portrait.
Whereas Garissa derives a kind of soothing, nostalgic comfort from her
memories of her interactions with Sally and Peter, the comfort she gets from the tense
connections between herself, her daughter, Elizabeth, and Elizabeth’s tutor, Doris
Kilman, is antagonistic in nature. Garissa despises Miss Kiiman, and despises the allure
she holds for Elizabeth; however, this negative energy seems to recharge Garissa. She
flourishes upon it and will return to Miss Kilman in mind when Miss Kilman is not
present in body. Before Miss Kilman appears in the novel, Garissa reminisces for a
moment about the tutor she had as a youth, a “Fraulein Daniels” (11). We learn later that
Miss Kilman, too, is of German descent, so it could be that Garissa—ever one to mix the
present with the past—is recalling or re-living an old antagonism she felt towards this
Fraulein Daniels, who gave Garissa only “a few twigs of knowledge” (11). However,
like so many of Garissa’s interactions, she actively triangulates this one: the issue
becomes not her dislike for Miss Kilman, but how this dislike for Miss Kilman will
enable her to participate in a power struggle against Miss Kilman for Elizabeth’s
72
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. affections. Garissa’s first reference to Miss Kilman is to express her annoyance that
Elizabeth likes and is taken in by her. In the triangle Garissa creates with Richard and
Peter, because she has genuine feelings for both men, the power struggle between the
three of them that she so relishes must remain somewhat under the surface, taking second
place to her affection for both men. She has no such affection for Miss Kilman, so the
power struggle aspect is as obvious to Garissa as her power struggle with Richard and
Peter is to the reader it is overt. Woolf has Garissa begin to list some of the small
details that annoy her about Miss Kilman, but she soon abandons them to get to the heart
of the matter
For it was not her one hated but the idea of her, which undoubtedly had gathered into itself a great deal that was not Miss Kilman; had become one of those specters with which one battles in the night.. .for no doubt with another throw of the dice, had the black been uppermost and not the white, she would have loved Miss Kilman! But not in this world. No. (16-17)
But in a way, Garissadoes love Miss Kilman: she loves to hate her. Such a tension
between two people over a third is Garissa’s existential crux, and when she goes on to
describe how such hatred rocks the foundation of her world, one cannot help but think
that there is a part of Garissa that is positively fueled by this negative energy. Such
hunches are confirmed at the end of the novel, when, at a low point at her party, and
when Garissa is despairing of it ever coalescing into a triumphant event, she cheers
herself up by thinking, “Kilman her enemy. That was satisfying; that was real. Ah, how
she hated her—hot, hypocritical, corrupt; with all that power; Elizabeth’s seducer; the
woman who had crept in to steal and defile (Richard would say, What nonsense!). She
hated her; she loved her. It was enemies one wanted, not friends...” (265-6). Garissa
wants someone who will both torment her and come to her rescue. Woolf specifically
73
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. makes Garissa drawn to those who will allow the binaries to be blurred: she can both
love and hate Miss Kilman, she can have a marriage with Richard that allows in—and
indeed depends upon—other people. Trudi Tate avers that “The struggle between
Garissa and Miss Kilman over Elizabeth’s affection, for example, can never be resolved
so that both are satisfied or victorious. Towards the end of the novel Garissa recognizes
this, and relishes her discovery of the power struggle” (154). It is this more complex
power struggle inherent in a threesome that Garissa so desires.
Miss Kilman is not the only phantom at Garissa’s party, for it is, of course,
Septimus’s absence that becomes the party’s core. Garissa, Miss Kilman, and Septimus
form another significant threesome. Karen Levenback makes a persuasive case for
seeing the integral role Miss Kilman plays in the novel as being of equal consequence to
the oft-noted role of Septimus. She observes that ‘To isolate Septimus Smith as the
doppelganger of Garissa Dalloway is to miss the importance of Doris Kilman, for ‘Miss
Kilman did not hate Mrs. Dalloway’; she understood Mrs. Dalloway and her limitations
all too well” (80). Indeed the similarities between the three characters often overlap.
Miss Kilman, for example, seems to relish the power struggle between herself and
Garissa over Elizabeth as much as Garissa does: she wants “to overcome her; to
unmask her” (189). Like Garissa, Miss Kilman first professes hatred towards her and
then clarifies that to hating the idea of Garissa and what she represents (189). Where
Garissa pushes thoughts of Miss Kilman temporarily out of her head with declarations of
“Nonsense, nonsense” (17), Miss Kilman pushes thoughts of Garissa out of her head by
thinking “of Russia” (195). Like Garissa, Miss Kilman uses a third person in their
power struggle. She thinks, “At any rate she had got Elizabeth” (195), showing that she
74
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. knows full well the shape of their battle. Miss Kilman uses Elizabeth as a pawn, and
when Elizabeth leaves her, thinks, “She had gone. Mrs. Dalloway had triumphed” (201).
Without that third person Miss Kilman knows the combustion will fizzle.
Miss Kilman and Septimus Warren Smith are even more alike. Both are from the
lower classes; both were working their way up before the war, and then had the war
interfere with and disrupt their upward mobility. As Gay Wachman contends, “InMrs
Dalloway, only Septimus and Doris Kilman oppose the postwar, ruling-class values
embodied in the Dalloways and their essentially exploitative colonialist circle” (123).
Both—Septimus in his overcoat and Miss Kilman in her green mackintosh—are now
shabby. People look at Miss Kilman and wonder if there is something wrong with her, as
they occasionally do with Septimus: a clerk sees Miss Kilman “muttering” to herself in
the Army and Navy stores, and “the girl serving thought her mad” (196). Kilman’s
“fanatical religious zeal. ..begins at about the same time as Septimus’s aberrational
behavior became manifest” (Levenback 80). In “The Female Victims of the War inMrs
Dalloway” Masami Usui makes the point that “The bond between Septimus and Clarissa
should be understood as a common sense of victimization by the war and by patriarchal
values” (151). If this is true for the bond between Septimus and Clarissa, then it is even
more so for the bond between Septimus and Doris Kilman. Miss Kilman’s life
circumstances were completely derailed by the war she lost her job and with it her sole
means for supporting herself. And as Usui herself goes on to contend, “Womanhood was
still valued and judged by men” and so “Kilman’s lack of beauty, money and social
status symbolize a deeply rooted patriarchal view of a single, independent, and strong
woman without social rank” (161). Kilman is smart enough to make this connection for
75
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. herself: “’I’m plain, I’m unhappy’” (MD 200 and Usui 162). Her physical looks cause
her to be a victim whom no one will rescue.
“Patriarchal values” do give Septimus at least one advantage over Miss Kilman.
When Woolf describes Septimus’s background, we see that Septimus is employed by Mr.
Brewer, a man who, in the old boy manner, looks out for Septimus’s well-being. He sees
potential in Septimus and can envision him advancing to the company’s higher echelons
“‘if he keeps his health’ said Mr. Brewer, and that was the danger—he looked weakly;
advised football, invited him to supper and was seeing his way to consider
recommending a rise of salary,” yet at this point Septimus thwarts him by enlisting (129).
After the war, when Septimus’s shell-shock begins to manifest itself, Mr. Brewer kindly
gives him a leave of absence and writes him a glowing letter of recommendation which
Septimus shows to the doctor. Of course in the long run, this supportive network is not
enough to save Septimus; however, it stands in great contrast to Miss Kilman’s
employment experience. Woolf explains: “And then, just as she might have had a
chance at Miss Dolby’s school, the war came; and she had never been able to tell lies.
Miss Dolby thought she would be happier with people who shared her views about the
Germans. She had had to go” (187). Although Miss Kilman later has the “good fortune”
to meet Richard Dalloway, who pities her and hires her as Elizabeth’s tutor, as a woman
who must support herself, her value in the patriarchy comes to an unceremonious end.
She is its victim in a way that Septimus is not—although there are other ways of viewing
Miss Kilman besides as a merely pitiable character. As Wachman asserts: “Socialist,
pacifist, and a lesbian historian, Kilman plays an important role as an outsider, opposing
76
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. with her solitary feminist consciousness the structures of the patriarchy in Woolf5 s
reconfigured history of the aftermath of the First World War” (137).
Although a large portion of Mrs Dalloway consists of Clarissa being haunted by
the ghosts of her past at Bourton, as readers we are forced to make a distinction between
her ghosts and all the many times that Septimus Warren Smith is haunted by seeing
visions of his friend, Evans, who was killed in the war. Septimus is insane and Clarissa is
sane, and as Woolf noted in her diary, Mrs Dalloway is to be a study of just such a
pairing; this is the most common way of interpreting the novel. Commenting on
Septimus's shell-shock-induced insanity, John Mepham explains that Septimus “sees
only two possibilities—meaning is everywhere or it is nowhere; our experience is full or
it is empty; excitation or desolation. This way lies insanity” (150). Claire Tylee views
Septimus and Clarissa as being linked by their imperial restraints. She writes that ‘The
novel plots their mutual constraint by the values of an imperial political system” (150).
Karen Levenback connects this directly to the binaries of war, clarifying that Septimus
“returns unable to read Shakespeare, in whom he sees evidence of the same either-or,
life-denying vision that is concomitant with war” (74). Sane, Clarissa does not view life
in such an extremely bifurcated manner; Clarissa can see both sides of an issue. She can
see Septimus's death as—for her at least—both a tragedy and a choice. But Woolf has
more going on here than merely counteracting Septimus’s insanity with Clarissa’s sanity.
Septimus and Clarissa are paired, but as Woolf wrote in the other diary entry already
quoted, “I can bring innumerable other characters to her support”(Volume Two 272). In
doing so, she successfully blurs the borderline between the either/or of Septimus’s
insanity and Clarissa’s sanity, thus mirroring the possibility of how all such simplistic
77
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. binaries can and should be made more complex. Therefore, where on the one hand
Garissa’s “‘use’ of Septimus to sustain her own spirit replicates the nation’s recent use of
many such naively patriotic young clerks in the war—destroying them to sustain an
idealized image of English duty and nationhood” (Henderson 151), on the other hand
Woolf writes a way out of the simple thinking that so often is part and parcel of the
“image of English duty and nationhood” by having Garissa turn to other characters as
well—and indeed always insist upon bringing in these other characters. Woolf therefore
has Garissa at her party use both the idea of Miss Kilman and Septimus’s suicide to
reach her own epiphany. And when the image of Miss Kilman fades with the immediacy
of the shock of Septimus’s death, it is not long before Garissa once again will make a
twosome into a threesome by bringing the old woman across the street into her thoughts
of herself and Septimus. As she had once used her view of the everyday of the woman in
the house across the street to calm her feelings against Miss Kilman (191-2), so she does
again with the turmoil she feels over Septimus’s suicide. Garissa is despairing at the
comparison she makes between herself and Septimus: “Somehow it was her
disaster—her disgrace. It was her punishment to see sink and disappear here a man, there
a woman, in this profound darkness, and she forced to stand here in her evening dress.
She had schemed; she had pilfered. She was never wholly admirable” (282). But then
Garissa notes the woman across the street: “She parted the curtains; she looked. Oh, but
how surprising!—in the room opposite the old lady stared straight at her!” (283). This is
the first time that the old woman has interacted with Garissa by returning and sharing her
gaze. Garissa is not “alone” with Septimus; she now no longer forms a pair with
Septimus, but a trio with him and the old woman across the street Either/or has been
78
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. thwarted: “But what an extraordinary night!” (2S3). Clarissa then turns and returns to
the party in general, and to a different triumvirate in particular “She must find Sally and
Peter” (284). Pairs will dissolve as she moves from three to three.
The many character triangles that Clarissa is a part of connect with many of the
specific political points and opinions Virginia Woolf is known to have professed. One
aspect of Woolf’s project in Mrs Dalloway is to create an awareness of the negative
effects of the simple binaries that proliferated during World War I. She had long been a
vocal critic of the rigid social and cultural distinctions that accompanied the gender
binary, having experienced the educational limitations that were imposed on women
firsthand when her brothers went off to acquire an education at school that Woolf had to
acquire on her own at home. What Woolf does in Mrs Dalloway, however, is to set it in
1924—a time close enough after the war for the us/them propaganda binaries expounded
during it to still be culturally present—and then to make the connection between these
binaries of war, both with the same us/them binaries upon which the British Empire is
based,and the dangerous simplicities of the gender binary. Of course, nothing is as
simple as us/them and him/her, and one of the techniques which Woolf uses to make this
point is to always bring a third person into Garissa’s relations. As we have seen, the
Dalloways’ version of husband-and-wife always becomes husband-and-wife-and-Peter.
Garissa even chooses to marry Richard Dalloway because she knows that with him she
will have this kind of leeway: “For in marriage a little license, a little independence there
must be between people living together day in day out in the same house; which Richard
gave her and she him.. .But with Peter everything had to be shared; everything gone into.
79
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. And it was intolerable” (10). Yet Garissa chooses to view the independence Richard
gives her through this possessiveness of Peter’s: one is not complete without the other,
and Garissa seems to need the tension that exists between the two.
This extension of the boundaries of the traditional male/female relationship is
indicative of how Woolf believes the false binaric constructs that make up war and
empire should be similarly complicated and dismantled. Kathy J. Phillips writes of how
“One of [Woolf’s] most interesting juxtapositions associates Empire making, war
making, and gender relations in a typical constellation” (vii). The example Phillips
proceeds to use is taken fromJacob's Room, the novel Woolf wrote before Mrs
Dalloway. Although Woolf began her formulation of this triangular “constellation” in
Jacob's Room, it is in Mrs Dalloway that it really becomes a central pattern; as such, it is
one that Garissa will replicate in all of her relations and interactions throughout the book.
As William Handley points out, “Woolf is interested not in fixing human beings but in
unhinging them, in demonstrating how individuals are constantly impinged upon by
social forces that shape their internal reality” (112). If this is true, then how Woolf has
her individuals navigate these social forces can be seen as her proposed answer to the
problems which the restraints of these forces impose. In Mrs Dalloway, Garissa is
always able to better understand herself and her interactions with others by subverting the
traditional binaric relations and constantly bringing a third person into the mix. By
showing Garissa gaining insight from and making things better for herself by changing a
simple two to a more complicated three, Woolf thus is able to hint at the benefits that
would also be attained by similarly complicating the simple binaries of empire and war.
80
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. The problem with a binary is that all the power inevitably ends up on one side of
it A powerful us needs a weak them to remain powerful. The enemy in a war needs to
be “bad” so that one’s own country can be “good”. Man needs woman to be the weak
other. As Woolf so aptly and sarcastically phrases it in A Room of One’s Own, “Women
have served all these centuries as looking-glasses possessing the magic and delicious
power of reflecting the figure of man at twice its natural size” (35). Characteristically,
Woolf then proceeds to connect this disparity of gender to war and empire, commenting
that:
Without that power...The glories of all our wars would be unknown...The Czar and the Kaiser would never have worn their crowns or lost them. Whatever may be their use in civilized societies, minors are essential to all violent and heroic action. That is why Napoleon and Mussolini both insist so emphatically upon the inferiority of women, for if they were not inferior, they would cease to enlarge. That serves to explain in part the necessity that women so often are to men. (AROO 35-6)
As stated previously, adding a third person, side or angle can block the magnification the
powerless give to the powerful, for an interrupted binary is more easily dismanded when
middle ground creates more room for maneuvering. Gilles Deleuze claims this space for
Virginia Woolf direcdy when he writes that ‘The only way to get outside the dualisms is
to be-between, to pass between the intermezzo—that is what Virginia Woolf lived with
all her energies, in all of her work, never ceasing to become” (126). He elaborates upon
this by asserting that “It is the middle where one finds the becoming, the movement, the
velocity, the vortex. The middle is not the mean, but on the contrary an excess. It is by
the middle that things push. That was Virginia Woolfs idea” (206). Phillips takes a
similar approach to Woolf when she points out that Woolf often “focuses on the lowly,”
having, for example, the cook comment on the prime minister’s appearance at Clarissa’s
81
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. party, and that “She does so not to give exhaustive evidence from the foreground of
social conditions, but to orient the gaze, through juxtaposition and metaphor, toward the
background links among Empire, military, and gender relations, which together
constitute a comprehensive imperial ideology” (xxix). By adding a third “channel” or
route for power to pass through, Woolf magnifies this “middle” which Deleuze refers to,
and the “background links” referred to by Phillips: the triangle structure she usesMrs in
Dalloway, then, interferes with the way that power is traditionally maintained and
recharged. The triangle of characters exposes a more complex pattern of shifting
allegiances which can also work to undermine the binaries of gender, war, and empire:
triangulated, their inter-relatedness is revealed.
In her diaries written during the war, Woolf's commentary often proves how
aware she was of the machinations of the propaganda of wan how it simplified all
outlooks, paring all issues down to that of us vs. them and good vs. evil, thus making war
more compelling. She writes that ‘The Northcliffe papers do all they can to insist upon
the indispensability & delight of war. They magnify our victories to make our mouths
water for more” {Volume One 200). Yet she also reveals how persuasive such
propaganda can be, discovering that she herself was not always immune to the fervor it
produced. In an entry for March 14,1918, Woolf quips that,
What excited me was the evening paper.... [I] read that the Prime Minister needed our prayers. We were faced with momentous decisions. We Britons must cling together. In a week or even a few days facts must be faced which would change the British Empire for ever. We evolved from this an offer of peace to France: but it appears to be only LG’s way of whipping up his gallery. Anyhow, I was whipped. {Volume One 128)
In this passage she mockingly acts out her “proper” role as receiver of propaganda: she
self-consciously reacts the way she is supposed to react. But of course Woolf knows to
82
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. distrust the simplicity of the views put forth. Woolf does not necessarily see the war as
an aberration disconnected from what came before or will come after. As Kathy Phillips
points out, “Woolf consistently depicts the perpetuation of this dangerous ideology
through the British public schools, universities, social classes, churches,
professions...marriage and gender expectations. These institutions all reinforce each
other, so that a unifying imperial outlook regulates life at home and dictates behavior
overseas” (221). Thus, when the war ends, Woolf does not see cause for celebration: all
the institutions that created the war are still in place. Phillips points out that World War I
“is presented in all Woolf’s books not as an anomaly or an external threat to British
society, but rather as its inevitable result” (1). It follows, therefore, that in her diary
Woolf refuses to see the peace celebrations as anything other than slightly pathetic and
meant for those who have been seduced by the war’s propaganda. She notes that even
the celebrations are divided by a binary: “there seemed to be no mean between tipsy
ribaldry & rather sour disapproval” ( Volume One 217). Writing about a more formal
celebration that occurred a few months later, Woolf grumbles that “One ought to say
something about Peace day, I suppose, though whether it’s worth taking a new nib for
that purpose I don’t know,” and later she clarifies her disdain, pointing out that ‘There’s
something calculated & politic & insincere about these peace rejoicings”(Volume One
292). Viewing the war as a contained eruption with the Peace Day celebrations acting as
the period to its sentence does not work for Woolf. She will explore this uneasiness in
her novels. As Karen Levenback contends in her book, Virginia Woolfand the Great
War, Woolf’s postwar novels “reveal the author’s engagement with ambiguities and
realities that blur the lines between peace and war; civilians and combatants; survivors
83
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. and victims; and, most basically, life and death” (27). It is Woolfs project to “blur the
lines” of these binaries.
Woolf sees the gender binary as being part and parcel of the binaries of war and
empire. Each creates simplistic divisions that work to uphold the power of one side. As
Phillips describes, Woolf thought that “Churchgoers’ practice in believing that men are
better than women prepares them to accept other hierarchies, such as ‘England is better
than Germany’ or ‘our navy is better than your navy’” (131).2 Although in 1938 when
writing Three Guineas, Woolf will infer that “feminine discourse encourages an erosion
of boundaries, permitting a collaboration betweenyou and us rather than the absorption
of us by you” (Hanley 58), in Mrs Dalloway Woolfs view is more understated. Trudi
Tate elaborates upon this inModernism, History and the First World War. “Who was to
blame for the disaster of the war, and who would take responsibility for the peace?
Woolf does not simply criticize men and exonerate women, as some critics have
suggested; rather, her writing directs both satire and sympathy in complex and
unexpected ways” (151-2). Tate claims that one of the ways Woolf does this is to make
Clarissa “a strongly paradoxical figure. The text constructs her quite explicitly as
someone with whom we are invited to sympathize and whom we are forced to judge”
(167). Practically nothing or no one in Mrs Dalloway remains in its comer of the box, so
to speak. Septimus’s damage from the war is paralleled with Clarissa’s patriarchal
constrictions—despite the fact that Garissa herself often takes refuge in these
constrictions. Clarissa will feel sorry for the suffering of Lady Bexborough, who lost her
son in the war, and for Septimus, but feels nothing but antipathy towards Miss Kilman’s
war misfortunes, and indifference regarding the carnage suffered by the Armenians—a
84
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. people whose fate Richard Dalloway has some control over. Woolf thus even wants her
readers’ opinions of Clarissa Dalloway to occupy a middle space: even the binary of like
and dislike will be thwarted.
Kathy J. Phillips’ Virginia Woolf against Empire was the first book-length study
of the prominent role that empire plays in Woolf's novels. But critics before and since
have theorized about Woolf's interest in and opinions regarding empire, war, and gender
in general, and in how they unfurl inMrs Dalloway in particular. Many have used the
connection between Garissa and Septimus as an entry into such a discussion. Trudi Tate
claims that Woolf makes the point of how much the war effected the average London
citizen if Clarissa, a civilian, can have so much in common with Septimus, a shell
shocked soldier (147). Karen Levenback adds to this line of thought by commenting that
“What she came to see progressively in the war years proper was that the civilian
experience of the war was no less real for being inherently ironic and that the facts of life
thereafter would be measured against the experience of the war whether on the front or
on the streets or in the village” (16). Diana Henderson expands this civilian/soldier
connection beyond the war, arguing that Mrs Dalloway “tries to expose the particular
social structures that limit the lives of women and nonelite men, associating oppression
with the workings of empire and patriarchy” (144). In doing so she shows how many of
the points made about war inMrs Dalloway also hold true for empire and gender
relations in that novel as well. The connection between Clarissa and Septimus works as
a good first step towards uncovering the pervasiveness of the effects of the
“constellation” of empire, war, and gender relations, but escalating this examination from
85
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the one significant doubling in the novel to the multiple significant triumvirates will
enable us to uncover even more.
In his essay, ‘“We All Put Up With You Virginia’: Irreceivable Wisdom about
War,” Roger Poole avows that “There is a case for regarding Mrs Dalloway as the finest
‘war novel’ that World War I produced” (79). He maintains that in addition to the
connection between Clarissa and Septimus, war has a constant presence inMrs
Dalloway, in fact, he goes so far as to claim that its “absence” is also significant, and that
Woolf is commenting on war when she has so many of her characters shy away from
thoughts of it (Poole 80). Other critics concur Nancy Bazin and Jane Lauter assert that
‘To read Virginia Woolf’s fiction intelligently, the reader must recognize fully the extent
to which war shaped her vision and the reasons why it had such an impact” (14), while
William Handley suggests that “Woolf’s aesthetic project.. .is a fighting response to the
war, to the hierarchical structure, culture, and rigid psychology of a society that pulls
itself toward this destructive end” (111). Mark Hussey extends such assertions to
WoolTs entire oeuvre, declaring that “all Woolf’s work is deeply concerned with war;
that it helps redefine our understanding of the nature of war; and that from her earliest to
her final work she sought to explore and make clear the connections between private and
public violence, between the domestic and the civic effects of patriarchal society,
between male supremacy and the absence of peace, and between ethics and aesthetics”
(3). And finally, Karen Levenback effectively encapsulates these sentiments when she
writes that “In fact, any effort to assess WoolT s writings or her life without a sense of
her experience of the Great War is as incomplete as it would be in a study of Robert
Graves, for example, who was a combatant, or D. H. Lawrence, who, like the Woolfs,
86
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. remained a civilian” (4). The consensus is that Mrs Dalloway is a war novel and
Virginia Woolf a war novelist: she captures how on a day in June of 1924, the war is still
very much a part of everyone’s everyday.
By constantly weaving the war into such a seemingly post-war sunny June day is
precisely how Woolf emphasizes that when it comes to the Great War there is no “over”.
She immediately establishes this contradiction on the third page of the novel by having
Garissa muse:
For it was the middle of June. The War was over, except for some one like Mrs. Foxcroft at the Embassy last night eating her heart out because that nice boy was killed and now the old Manor House must go to a cousin; or Lady Bexborough who opened a bazaar, they said, with the telegram in her hand, John, her favourite, killed; but it was over; thank Heaven—over. (5)
After Garissa proclaims in that passage that “The War was over,” she immediately gives
the lie to this by listing several of the ways in which it is not over. Clarissa herself might
not have lost a family member in the war—although her Uncle William’s death seems at
least emotionally connected to the war, being described as “He had turned on his bed one
morning in the middle of the War. He had said, ‘I have had enough’” (15)—but she is
surrounded by people who have experienced such losses. Such contradictions continue
throughoutMrs Dalloway. Garissa even contradicts herself before she reaches the
flower shop that is the destination of her morning walk; she thinks that, “This late age of
the world’s experience had bred in them all, all men and women, a well of tears. Tears
and sorrows; courage and endurance, a perfectly upright and stoical bearing” (13). It is
not just Garissa—a woman for whom the past is always very much present—who is
preoccupied with the war: it seems to pervade the minds of everybody in London. A
“Little Mr. Bowley” looks at some women and thinks, “poor women, nice little children,
87
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. orphans, widows, the War—tut-tut—actually had tears in his eyes” (28). Mr. Brewer,
Septimus’s boss, remarks upon how his business has been affected by the war, “so prying
and insidious were the fingers of the European War” (129). Even the complacent
Richard Dalloway thinks, when he is walking across London to tell Clarissa he loves her,
that “Really it was a miracle thinking of the war, and thousands of poor chaps, with all
their lives before them, shoveled together, already half forgotten; it was a miracle” (174).
Septimus—for whom, of course, the war is overtly ever-present—carries its presence to
extremes. He hallucinates how “The dead were in Thessaly, Evans sang, among the
orchids. There they waited till the War was over...” (105). Dead and alive are still
waiting for the war’s “ending.” But one cannot dismiss Septimus’s feelings about the
war as being a result of his shell-shock, for Woolf has all young men—even the sane
ones—appear to be on a hair-trigger where war is concerned. When the gray car
containing the unknown representative of the British Empire passes, Woolf writes of
how “Tall men,” “men of robust physique,” and “well-dressed men” “stood even
straighter, and removed their hands, and seemed ready to attend their Sovereign, if need
be, to the cannon’s mouth, as their ancestors had done before them” (26). If war is
indeed “over,” it certainly seems easy to begin it again.
In other novels, Woolf appears conflicted about the supposed divide between pre
war and post-war times. Josephine Schaefer makes this claim for To The Lighthouse,
maintaining that “Certainly Virginia Woolf was aware of how flawed the prewar
civilization of England was, and in To The Lighthouse she both reflects and rejects
nostalgia for that world that lies irrecoverably on the other side of the Great War” (145).
In Mrs Dalloway, however, such a notion is a binary to which she will not adhere. She
88
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. even seems to mock the tenor of such thinking by having Clarissa comment that “before
the War, you could buy almost perfect gloves” (15). By connecting the pre-war mindset
to this trivial example of gloves instead of to the more expected concept of a pre-war
innocence, Woolf insinuates an underlying continuity: there is no pre-war and post-war,
in part because war is a natural extension of the long established political and social
culture of England.
In the same year that Woolf wrote Mrs Dalloway, she also wrote the essay
“Thunder at Wembley,” in which she observes a storm raining upon the Empire
Exhibition at Wembley Stadium and the procession leading up to it. Literally, therefore,
it is raining on empire’s parade, and Woolf clearly uses the exhibition as a symbol for the
British Empire itself. This Empire Exhibition was “first proposed in 1913, but postponed
because of the war and turned into a demonstration of the Empire’s strength and
resources after the ordeal of war...” (Joll 180). Woolf addresses this pageantry,
recognizing empire’s imminent demise in this attempt to disguise its newly precarious
state. In purple prose, Woolf observes that “Colonies are perishing and dispersing in
spray of inconceivable beauty and terror which some malignant power illuminates. Ash
and violet are the colours of its decay. The Empire is perishing; the bands are playing;
the Exhibition is in ruins. For that is what comes of letting in the sky” (186-7). The sky,
here, is making the sun never setting on the British Empire a moot point. Woolf displays
a similar awareness of empire’s dissolution inMrs Dalloway. Like war, an awareness of
empire appears repeatedly in the everyday consciousness of the London civilians.
Significantly, it is the dilapidation of empire upon which the characters usually remark.
89
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. To be fair, there are moments in Mrs Dalloway where empire is mentioned or
thought of without reference to its demise. Garissa, for example, finds it reassuring to
think of the King and Queen being “at the Palace” where they should be, signaling how
everything is right in her world (6). Often, however, what starts out to be a positive
reference to empire will go strangely awry. As the gray car passes through the gates of
Buckingham Palace, the people feel a thrill of patriotism which begins seriously enough,
yet turns silly. Woolf writes of how they “all the time let rumour accumulate in their
veins and thrill the nerves in their thighs at the thought of Royalty looking at them; the
Queen bowing; the Prince saluting; at the thought of the heavenly life divinely bestowed
upon Kings...” (27). This list, which begins with the rather strange visceral location of
the thrill experienced, deteriorates from the onlookers being thrilled at the thought of the
Queen inside the car to being thrilled by “the Queen’s old doll’s house” and the Prince’s
newly acquired slim figure (27-8). One cannot help but hear the mocking in WoolTs
tone.
Furthermore, such more or less “neutral” references to empire are far out
numbered by moments where empire appears pathetic and askew. To begin with, the
fact that the identity of the person in the gray car is so uncertain seems significant. When
Woolf writes that “nobody knew whose face had been seen. Was it the Prince of
Wales’s, the Queen’s, the Prime Minister’s? Whose face was it? Nobody knew” (20),
such anonymity for the head of the British Empire stands in contrast to Queen Victoria’s
marked presence as monarch during the empire’s heyday. A few pages later, Woolf
again mentions the anonymity of the person in the car and this time takes the symbolism
of decay even further. For she begins by writing of how the people who watch the car
90
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. are experiencing a brush with greatness, so to speak; however, she continues by
proclaiming that they are
within speaking distance of the majesty of England, of the enduring symbol of the state which will be known to curious antiquaries, sifting ruins of time, when London is a grass-grown path and all those hurrying along the pavement this Wednesday morning are but bones.... The face in the motor car will then be known. (23)
What might seem like a tribute on a first reading—the fact that the head of England in
the car will still be known in centuries to come—becomes overshadowed by the passing
reference to London as “a grass-grown path”: what is Woolf saying about the British
Empire by projecting its central city as greenery-covered rubble? One can hardly take it
as a vote of confidence in empire’s ability to remain afloat. And indeed Woolf returns to
such moments of unsettlement In an oft-quoted passage, Woolf writes that even though
the car has passed, the feelings its presence had stirred still remained:
for in all the hat shops and tailors’ shops strangers looked at each other and thought of the dead; of the flag; of Empire. In a public house in a back street a Colonial insulted the House of Windsor which led to words, broken beer glasses, and a general shindy.... For the surface agitation of the passing car as it sunk grazed something very profound. (25-6)
This roiling beneath “the surface” has something to do with empire and the changes that
are occurring to it: thoughts of empire are connected to thoughts of “the dead,” and the
colonies are now speaking back.
Like the car in this scene, an airplane soon follows which Woolf also portrays as
causing its viewers to question the fitness of empire. The plane is spelling out a word
that the people below have trouble reading: its message is not clear to them. Woolf
writes of how “The clouds to which the letters E, G, or L had attached themselves moved
freely, as if destined to cross from West to East on a mission of the greatest importance
91
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. which would never be revealed, and yet certainly so it was—a mission of the greatest
importance” (30). The British Empire’s mission has always been one “from West to
East”, yet it is significant that here such movement is for an undefined mission. Its
raison d’etre is no longer clear—and is, perhaps, fading like the letters made out of
cloud; furthermore, reassurance as to its importance seems to be needed—so much so
that its “greatest importance” must be stated twice. Such a need indicates insecurity.
And still the examples pile up: Peter Walsh sees a young regiment marching and at first
notices “on their faces an expression like the letters of a legend written round the base of
a statue praising duty, gratitude, fidelity, love of England” (76). Yet upon a closer look,
he notes that “they did not look robust. They were weedy for the most part, boys of
sixteen, who might, to-morrow, stand behind bowls of rice, cakes of soap on counters”
(76). Their future, like the future of the British Empire, begins to appear bleak. When
Clarissa looks in the shop windows at the pretty things for sale, she sees “the
shopkeepers were fidgeting in their windows with their paste and diamonds, their lovely
old sea-green brooches in eighteenth-century settings to tempt Americans...” (6).
Significantly, it is the Americans who have the money to buy the decorations of empire,
and Garissa, whose “people were courtiers once in the time of the Georges” who “must
economise” (6) and must later repair her own sea-green dress. It is not Clarissa’s
ancestors’ British Empire anymore.
Woolf also comments on the state of England and the British Empire by using a
triumvirate of characters that Clarissa is connected to, yet not directly a part of: Helena
Parry, Lady Bruton, and Hugh Whitbread. Aunt Helena lived in Burma and India in the
1860s and 1870s; now, in 1924, she lives in her memories of those days in the colonies,
92
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. and seemingly could be a representative of how the British Empire used to be. Aunt
Helena is preoccupied with her own personal memories of life in the colonies: she
remembers the orchids she collected and painted, as well as “herself carried on the backs
of coolies in the ‘sixties over solitary peaks” (271). She is an elderly woman, so it is
perhaps not surprising that she lives now ensconced in her memories of times past
However, it is significant that Woolf specifically makes Helena someone who has
experienced the usual “glory days” of empire, yet has “no tender memories, no proud
illusions about Viceroys, Generals, Mutinies,” while at the same time being “fretful” and
“disturbed by the War” (271). Helena thinks nothing of what was presented at the time
as empire’s military triumphs; she does not use them to counteract or hold up against the
military horrors of World War I. Instead, the war interrupts her memories of old Empire,
which have become a watercolor landscape—and even that memory will soon die with
Miss Parry. War causes empire’s memories to dissolve like empire itself.
In contrast to Helena Parry’s watered down memories of empire in the past, Lady
Bruton is very much concerned with empire now. Much is made of Millicent Bruton’s
lineage: she is descended from a long line of generals and Sirs and men who were
involved in the government of England and its colonies. Lady Bruton is not married and
has no children, however, so the line will end with her; and since she is female, she was
not able to follow in the career footsteps of her famous forebears. Woolf writes that “if
ever a woman could have worn the helmet and shot the arrow, could have led troops to
attach, ruled with indomitable justice barbarian hordes...that woman was Millicent
Bruton” (274-5), yet her gender makes her ineffectual. Lady Bruton is preoccupied with
empire’s present state, but the specifics of her preoccupations do not bode .well for the
93
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. British Empire. When she has Hugh Whitbread and Richard Dalloway over for lunch,
she has them compose a letter for her regarding emigration, her latest cause, which is
described as “that project for emigrating young people of both sexes bom of respectable
parents and setting them up with a fair prospect of doing well in Canada” (164). It is
telling that the representative of present-day empire in Mrs Dalloway is concerned
primarily with getting people out of England to a place where they have better chances
for success. The emigration letter-writing at Lady Bruton’s luncheon is interrupted by
the arrival of newspapers—“the news from India!” (168). Such a juxtaposition of the
two issues—Lady Bruton’s frequent switching back and forth from the need for
emigration to India as “a tragedy” (274)—enables the reader to make the connection
between empire and the need to escape from it Again, as the character who is empire’s
champion, Lady Bruton’s naysaying reveals how unstable is the ground on which empire
rests. Even at Clarissa’s party Lady Bruton “had the thought of Empire always at hand”
(275) and manages to speak to the Prime Minister in a private room “about India” (279).
But then Woolf mentions Lady Bruton’s future death, which at that point also seems to
be the death of empire; it is as if Lady Bruton will take England’s heyday with her when
she dies, since she cannot imagine being anything but English, even in death: Woolf
writes that “one could not figure her even in death parted from the earth or roaming
territories over which, in some spiritual shape, the Union Jack had ceased to fly. To be
not English even among the dead—no, no! Impossible!” (275). Because of her sex
Lady Bruton cannot accomplish for empire what she would like, and she has no sons
who could do so; as the character most concerned with the British Empire, her status
reveals the Empire to be a dead end.
94
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. If Virginia Woolf means for Helena Parry and Millicent Bruton to be
representatives of the British Empire’s concerns abroad, than Hugh Whitbread is
symbolic of her worst fears of what England has become at home. Hugh is all surface
niceties and empty ritual: he has a kind of court job at Buckingham Palace, but no one is
quite sure what he actually does there. As Clarissa notes, “he was almost too well
dressed always” (7), and he attends functions and social gatherings alone, since his wife
Evelyn is a permanent invalid (7). Like Lady Bruton, he has no children to whom he
will directly pass on his way of life. Woolf writes that “He did not go deeply. He
brushed surfaces; the dead languages, the living, life in Constantinople, Paris, Rome;
riding, shooting, tennis, it had been once... He had been afloat on the cream of English
society for fifty-five years. He had known Prime Ministers” (155). Hugh represents a
way of life that is changing, but his way is not admirable; again, Hugh is all fa9ade.
Lady Bruton gets Richard Dalloway to advise her about the subject matter, but she has
Hugh help her write her letters, because Hugh is so adept at the language of political
commentary. Although Richard laughs at Hugh’s caution and bombast, Lady Bruton
marvels at how “he began carefully writing capital letters with rings round them in the
margin, and thus marvelously reduced Lady Bruton’s tangles to sense” (166). Woolf
will often make characters think of England and English society, and then think of or see
Hugh. For example, Clarissa runs into Hugh in London right after she thinks of her own
need to economize and contrasts that with the thought that “her people were courtiers
once in the time of the Georges” (6); it is after that thought that she notices Hugh, who is
just such a courtier. At Clarissa’s party, Peter Walsh thinks, “Lord, lord, the snobbery of
the English!... How they loved dressing up in gold lace and doing homage! There!
95
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. That must be, by Jove it was, Hugh Whitbread, snuffing round the precincts of the great”
(262). Sally Seton sees through Hugh and tells him “he represented all that was most
detestable in British middle-class life” (110). She complains that “He’s read nothing,
thought nothing, felt nothing” and considers him “a perfect specimen of the public school
type.... No country but England could have produced him” (110). Hugh is always
viewed as being quintessentially English, and the other characters who see him as such
mean this as an insult. After noticing Hugh at Clarissa’s party, Peter thinks that “God
knows the rascals who get hanged for battering the brains of a girl out in a train do less
harm on the whole than Hugh Whitbread and his kindness” (263). With Hugh and
England so connected, Woolf indicates its precarious state. If “Mrs Dalloway is a
penetrating indictment of British imperialism, the ‘tolerable show’ which covers over a
hollow heart, the ‘damnable humbug’ that reduces to ‘stuffing and bunkum’ what is
owed to the young and the war-dead” (Tylee 152), then Woolf’s use of the wobbly
triangle of Aunt Helena, Lady Bruton, and Hugh establishes the political changes that are
occurring to the show of imperialism. Empire has reached the end of its line, and the
fa9ade it has left is easily ridiculed.
In one of the moments when Clarissa is thinking fondly of Peter Walsh, she
recalls how “She owed him words: ‘sentimental,’ ‘civilized’; they started up every day
of her life as if he guarded her. A book was sentimental; an attitude to life sentimental.
‘Sentimental,’ perhaps she was to be thinking of the past” (53-4). Peter, who at Bourton
was Clarissa’s tutor in the ways of the world, sets up a strict binary for Clarissa to
follow. Of course, Clarissa is to play the sentimental female to Peter’s civilized male,
96
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. and equally certain is that the sentimental side of the binary is the strong civilized us’s
weak them. Peter will later think that Clarissa has become “sentimental,” and he will
mean the term as an insult In that same paragraph, he. proceeds to think of the work he
has done bringing “civilization” to India: the wheel-barrows mentioned previously that
the coolies disdain (73). As Peter walks through the streets of London, he constantly
refers to civilization and things civilized. He considers that “the future of civilization
lies...in the hands of young men...such as he was, thirty years ago; with their love of
abstract principles; getting books sent out to them all the way from London to a peak in
the Himalayas” (75-6); civilization will thus be sent from England to where Peter is
doing civilization's work in the colonies. He muses, “A splendid achievement in its own
way, after all, London; the season; civilization” (82), and then, “there were moments
when civilization, even of this sort, seemed dear to him as a personal possession;
moments of pride in England” (82). Virginia Woolf, however, knows better, and sets out
to complicate Peter’s simplistic civilization/sentimental binary. For besides getting
English literature sent to him in the Himalayas, Clarissa also “comes” to Peter there as he
philosophizes about civilization on his high perch. Peter admits that Clarissa “had come
to him; on board ship; in the Himalayas; suggested by the oddest things.... and always
in this way coming before him without his wishing it, cool, lady-like, critical; or
ravishing, romantic, recalling some field or English harvest” (232-3). Then, when Peter
returns from his life in the colonies-empire work which is often portrayed as a male
adventure—when he should be able to demarcate the border between civilization and
sentimental without even thinking about it, Woolf creates a confusion in Peter that he is
not aware of, but that the reader—sentimental book in tow—realizes. For Peter first sees
97
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Rezia trying to rein in Septimus’s shell-shock and thinks they are “lovers squabbling
under a tree; the domestic family life of the parks. Never had he seen London look so
enchanting.. .the civilization, after India, he thought...” (107). Still later, Peter will
begin to discourse about civilization and sentimental after being prompted by the sound
of an ambulance—“That was civilization. It struck him coming back from the East—the
efficiency, the organization, the communal spirit of London” (229)—which the reader
knows is carrying Septimus, a man ruined by “civilization.” Peter is all in a muddle and
does not know it His binary does not—and should not—stand.
As a character, Clarissa has been criticized for her insularity and seeming self-
centeredness. She believes that when the war ended all returned to normal, for instance,
and she is rather flippantly dismissive about the subject of Richard’s committee-work,
the plight of the Armenians (Tate 153). Woolf would be more sympathetic towards
Clarissa; for in her diary she herself wrote that “In the way of history the Germans have
gone back to Germany. People go on being shot & hanged in Ireland.... The worst of it
is the screen between our eyes & these gallows is so thick. So easily one forgets it—or I
do.... Is it a proof of civilization to envisage suffering at a distance...? ’ (2,100)
Clarissa, caught up in the bustle of a June day in the London of 1924, is prone to view
short-sightedly the world from her mostly comfortable side of the binary—or so one
might cursorily think. For Woolf gives Clarissa the underlying tendency to always turn a
two into three, which enables her to circumvent the restrictions of conventional marriage.
Clarissa thrives on the power-struggles inherent in a triangular relationship—indeed, she
seeks them out. Woolf’s most significant “constellation,” as Phillips has noted, is the
juxtaposition of “Empire making, war making, and gender relations” (vii); by having
98
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Clarissa complicate the gender issue with her triumvirates, she demonstrates a way for all
the simple binaries so prevalent in the times to be thus dismantled. In a diary entry about
composing the end of Mrs Dalloway, Woolf writes, “There I am now—at last at the
party, which is to begin in the kitchen, and climb slowly upstairs. It is to be a most
complicated spirited solid piece, knitting together everything & ending on three notes, at
different stages of the staircase, each saying something to sum up Clarissa” (2,312). By
making Clarissa herself always choose “three notes” over two, Woolf proposes the first
step towards “knitting together everything” that is in a bifurcated disarray.
99
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. CHAPTER m
EMPIRE, REVISED IN PAT BARKER’S REGENERATION TRILOGY
In The Ghost Road the wartime prostitutes are all “great enthusiast[s] for Empire”
(G 36), but they stand alone. The soldiers fighting in the Great War are “the Sons of
Empire,” but they are small and sickly and their fatigues do not fit, since “some of the
Sons of Empire didn’t get much to eat when they were kids” (G175-6). The soldier who
appears in all three books of Pat Barker’s trilogy, Billy Prior, writes of how while
retreating from the front line after an interminable battle, “I waited for the sun to go
down. And the sodding thing didn’t. IT ROSE” (G197-8). While nearing the end of the
Great War, the British Empire, it seems, is losing its luster its sons want its symbolic
sun to set Pat Barker has much to say about Empire. By giving all three books of her
Regeneration Trilogy a Great War setting, she reconstructs an effective vantage point for
viewing the British Empire at the crucial moment of the beginning of its end. At one
point Ruth Head, a character in Regeneration, guiltily confesses that she rather enjoys
the air raids of the war, that she experiences “an immense sense of exhilaration” during
them, and that she has “this feeling that the ...crust of everything is starting to crack” (R
164). It is this—the cracking surface of Empire—which Barker documents in her novels,
using the war as a way to expose both the discrepancies and hypocrisies of empire, as
well as the more positive changes that accompany its nascent dissolution.
100
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. The Great War is often reflected upon as signifying the end of a halcyon era and
the beginning of the disunities of the modem age. Much has been made of the perfect
summer season experienced in 1914, and how in hindsight it contributed to the before
and after demarcation of the war. In his book. The Great War and Modem Memory, Paul
Fussell claims that “Although some memories of the benign last summer before the war
can be discounted as standard romantic retrospection turned even rosier by egregious
contrast with what followed, all agree that the prewar summer was the most idyllic for
many years” (23), and that “For the modem imagination that last summer has assumed
the status of a permanent symbol for anything innocently but irrecoverably lost” (24).
Throughout the trilogy, Barker works to erase this line between the times by showing
how the tenets of war are an extension of the tenets of Empire—and both are crumbling.
Other critics and historians have not hesitated to make the connection between the
horrors of World War I and the beginnings of the end of the British Empire. Claire
Tylee, for example, takes this same notion of a pre-war/post-war divide and unites it to
the image of empire. She writes that the “myth” of pre-war innocence “has combined
with an idea of Britain’s lost imperial splendour to support the current imagery by which
the Great War was viewed over and over in diaries and memoirs: that the War was like
the Hood, the Deluge, the Fall from Grace, and the world which was lost was Paradise”
(245). In Propaganda and Empire, John M. Mackenzie avers that: “Some have seen the
Boer War as cracking the imperial spirit More conventionally, the Great War has been
regarded as the critical turning point. The war, it is alleged, was followed by a period of
pacifism, and militarism and imperialism were so intertwined in the late Victorian and
Edwardian periods that revulsion from the one led to rejection of the other” (Mackenzie
101
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 9). Of course, the war itself was in part a war fought over the threat made to Britain’s
imperial status: “It was because the German challenge to Britain’s imperial position was
a general one rather than a specific set of territorial demands that it seemed so dangerous”
(Joll 181). And the war did destroy empires, as well as the sentiment felt toward empires.
As A. J. P. Taylor observes, “Before the war there had been four empires in Europe; after
it, there was none.... The King of England was the only remaining Emperor in the world,
in his capacity as Emperor of India; even that had only another generation to run” (284).
The British were right to feel that their empire was beleaguered. The First World War
was in reality both the beginning of the end of empire and the unignorable signal that its
dissolution was eminent. Regardless of how sunny and pastoral and halcyon the
summers to come might be, the war made the British troubled over their now obviously
troubled empire.
In her Regeneration Trilogy, Pat Barker thus reveals the beginnings of the
dissolution of the British Empire, both at home and abroad. The question that arises,
then, is why use war to discuss empire? Why does Barker bother to intersperse Rivers’s
thoughts of his time in Melanesia, for example, with Billy Prior’s experience as a soldier
at the front? Why mix fictional characters with historical figures? Answers to such
questions can be found in a motif that recurs in articles written about England in the past
few years. Journalism about England often will contain references to its postimperial
state, usually putting this in terms of loss and pessimism. For example, Tony Blair is
quoted inThe New Yorker as saying, “Britain is a great country that has been through the
pain of losing an empire, of having started this century as probably the superpower of the
world...” (119). And in a more recent Nation article the past tense is optimistically used
102
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. to claim that “under this longed-for Labour government we have seen competent
management and an end to postimperial gloom” (23). As I document in greater detail in
Chapter 4, in the mid-nineties it was a frequent occurrence to hear England’s postimperial
state mentioned as a malady, an illness to be cured, or a trauma from which the English
were struggling to recover. We might understand this cultural phenomenon in the terms
laid out by Cathy Caruth, as she writes about Freud’sBeyond the Pleasure Principle: “In
trauma, that is, the outside has gone inside without any mediation” (59), and continues on
to explain how mediation is needed for there to be recovery, so often a person who has
experienced a trauma will have dreams of the traumatic event as a means of trying to
process that what happened was not recognized at the time that it occurred. As Caruth
writes, “The return of the traumatic experience in the dream is not the signal of the direct
experience but, rather, of the attempt to overcome the fact that it was not direct, to
attempt to master what was never fully grasped in the first place” (62). In her trilogy,
Barker’s approach to war is as an event that can expose Empire and be used as a means of
“grasping” its demise; she returns to the Great War and specifically explores and
processes its connection to this demise. In the nineties, when Barker wrote the trilogy,
enough time had passed for it to be evident that the Great War in many ways signaled the
beginning of the end of the British Empire, as well as for it to be acknowledged how
significant such a demise was for the nation’s self-image. The end of the twentieth
century becomes an opportune time to return to the war and examine it as a crucial
moment for empire. And as Pat Barker travels to the beginning of Empire’s end, she
does not go unarmed.
103
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. The traits Barker emphasizes about her three main characters—Siegfried Sassoon,
Billy Prior, and W. H. R. Rivers—reveal much about her approach to empire. Barker’s
Sassoon is supposed to be a portrayal of the real man, and as such she does not deviate
much from the known facts about his life and wartime experiences. He is very much a
man of his times and is tormented by the futility of trench warfare. Barker emphasizes
Sassoon’s many paradoxes: that he wrote an anti-war declaration while at the same time
being a much medalled and respected soldier, that he chose to return to the Front and
would initiate daredevil raids—and then return to camp and write an anti-war poem. He
is a writer, yet he is writing from within the historical situation; he does not have the
benefit of hindsight. In contrast, Barker’s Billy Prior—a wholly fictional character—is in
many ways a postmodern character. Billy crosses all boundaries: he can pass for both
working and officer class, he is both gay and straight, healthy and sick, pro and anti-war,
more importantly, however, Billy is always incredibly aware of what is going on around
him and the underlying reasons for it; he has superb analytical skills. He is almost a
time-travelen Barker has set loose into the fray of the Great War a postmodern fellow
equipped with hindsight and the mindset of the second half of the twentieth century.
However, when the trilogy begins, Billy, like Sassoon, is suffering from shell
shock, and it falls to Rivers to psychoanalyze and cure both Sassoon and Billy. He is the
hearer of their testimony of the war; he processes and integrates the modem and
postmodern viewpoints. Rivers is very much a Freudian —and as such is slightly ahead
of his own times. He has studied Freud’s theories, and takes the Freudian approach to the
treatment of his patients. As Shoshana Felman writes in Testimony, Freud began the
“psychoanalytic dialogue...in which the doctor’s testimony does not substitute itself for
104
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the patient’s testimony, but resonates with it, because, as Freud discovers, it takes two to
witness the unconscious” (15). This is Rivers’s role in Barker’s trilogy: he, perhaps as a
stand-in for the reader, is able to go farther than Sassoon, a victim of his times, and Billy,
a victim of being out of his times. Rivers, as a hearer of testimony, is the one who is able
to acknowledge—and finally celebrate—empire’s demise.
It is also Rivers who constantly makes the connections between the experiences
and traumas of the soldiers at the front with his remembered experiences of his ethnology
work in colonized Melanesia. The war becomes less of a Euro-centered event as Rivers
is able to take the knowledge he acquired from his observations of the colonized
Melanesians struggling to adapt to the new British laws they are forced to abide by, and
use it to help in his treatment of English soldiers suffering from shell shock. The victims
of empire and the victims of war share symptoms, and Barker establishes such
similarities to erode the us/them dichotomy upon which empire rests. However, Barker’s
choice of using the real Dr. Rivers as her character who will serve as witness to the war
testimony of the soldiers is an essential one. For Rivers—as an ethnologist and
psychiatrist who thus has studied and observed the effects of colonization on other
cultures, and the effects on those who have to fight to enable such colonization to
continue—occupies the perfect vantage point for both dismantling the binaries of empire
and war, and processing the loss of an imperial identity. It is his expertise in both fields
that makes him the right medium for Barker’s purposes.
Rivers was said to be “among the first in England to support the discoveries of
Freud in the field of psychoneurosis and psychotherapy” (Showalter 181). He made the
theories of Freud—and psychoanalysis itself—palatable to the English public by
105
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. “minimizing the significance of the sexual drives in Freudian theory” (Showalter 189).
His knowledge and ability as a psychoanalyst is a crucial element of his value to Barker.
In her book, Imperial Leather, Anne McClintock contends “ .. .that psychoanalysis and
material history are mutually necessary for a strategic engagement with unstable
power...” (73-4); and in The Order o f Things, Foucault claims that “Psychoanalysis and
ethnology occupy a privileged position in our knowledge.. .but rather because.. .they
form an undoubted and inexhaustible treasure-hoard of experiences and concepts, and
above all a perpetual principle of dissatisfaction, of calling into question, of criticism and
contestation of what may seem, in other respects, to be established” (373). Well-versed
in both fields, who better than Rivers to call into question, criticize, and contest the tenets
of empire? Rivers himself saw an essential connection between the two disciplines. His
friend and fellow scientist, G. Elliot Smith, claimed that “Ethnology had no attractions
for Rivers until his work in Psychology was responsible for drawing him into this field of
investigation” (Smith x). And in the introduction to his two-volume study of Melanesian
society, Rivers writes that “If, however, the two studies [ethnology and psychiatry] are
thus to go on side by side, it is impossible that either can progress without making
assumptions based on knowledge which belongs properly to the domain of the other”
(The History o f Melanesian Society, 1,7). Barker will make use of this intersection and
overlap by having Rivers analyze and witness the soldiers’ war trauma, and recollect how
he analyzed and witnessed the newly restricted lives of the colonized Melanesians. It
will be Rivers’s awareness and realization of what is occurring in that particular moment
of the British Empire— juxtaposed with his recollections of occurrences in the colonies a
few years before the war—that Barker will employ in her trilogy.
106
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. When Barker originally conceived of her idea for a trilogy, she “hoped to write
‘an entirely noncombatant account’ of the First World War” (Morrison 80). This does
not end up being the case, yet although the trilogy is focused upon the battlefront
experiences of two soldiers and the doctor who treats them, Barker is able to give at least
equal thematic weight to the changes that the war brings to the domestic front as well. As
Anne McClintock argues, “...imperialism is not something that happened elsewhere—a
disagreeable fact of history external to Western identity” (5); rather, British imperialism
is specifically constructed in England. Barker thus balances her portrayal of the
tribulations of empire’s frontlines—war and the colonies—with a portrayal of such
dissolution beginning to occur at “home” in England itself. InThe Eye in the Door,
especially, Barker explores the effects of the dissolution of Empire at home3: her wartime
England is a place where the vision of Empire’s panopticon is beginning to blur, and
there is less distinction between the watcher and the watched. “Imperialist capitalism
relied on rigid codes of expression and behavior at home as well as abroad” (Wachman
8), as did imperialism itself, and Barker shows how during the war, certain of these
“codes” were more strictly enforced. She emphasizes the gender discrepancy that the war
opens up: as the men’s hope and helplessness increase, so do the new wartime
opportunities for women.
Barker also portrays how class divisions continue to create tensions both in
England and at the front* as Billy Prior’s father remarks, “time enough to do summat for
the Empire when the Empire’s done summat for you” (R 56). And perhaps most
importantly, Barker repeatedly returns to the trials and paranoias surrounding issues of
homosexuality. Much is continually being made of the rumored German list of 47,000
107
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. English homosexuals, and both civilians and soldiers closely follow the trial—the so-
called Pemberton Billing affair—where the accusations of such a list are formalized.
Barker makes the trial a frequent topic of conversation in the trenches. Whereas
Regeneration begins with Sassoon’s declaration against the war—which becomes the
central theme of that novel —The Eye in the Door begins with Billy Prior first attempting
his luck with a young woman, but eventually going home for a tryst with a fellow officer.
Such affairs are repeatedly highlighted in the trilogy, and there is ambiguity surrounding
the sexual orientation of all of the main characters. Barker uses homosexuality to
illustrate how the empire is trying—and of course failing—to have control over all
aspects of its citizens’ lives.
Empire. Revised
Throughout theRegeneration Trilogy, Barker establishes the connections between
war and empire by breaking down the pre-war/post-war binary, and by showing how
smoothly the tenets of war extend from the tenets of empire. She thus is able to portray
empire crumbling abroad in the war, and empire dissembling at home as a result of the
war. But perhaps her most interesting and significant method for approaching the
phenomenon of empire at this particular moment of the beginning of its end resides in the
traits she gives to her three main characters. There are many ways in which these three
characters —Siegfried Sassoon, Billy Prior, and W. H. R. Rivers—are linked. In
Regeneration, for example, Sassoon and Prior are both patients of Rivers. Rivers
develops relationships with both men that intrigue him enough to keep in touch with them
108
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. after they have been discharged from Craiglockhart In The Eye in the Door and The
Ghost Road, Rivers will continue to act in the role of therapist, both helping and learning
much himself from Sassoon and Prior. The three men have other connections as well:
they have friends and inclinations in common, and all three seem to share an awareness of
the paradoxes and inanities of the war—to varying degrees, they know what is going on.
Barker also gives them symbolic associations: all are “doubled” in some way, and
aware of a split in their lives. On a simpler level, too, the three men are always reflected,
whether in the present or in past recollections. For example, Sassoon thinks of how “A
memory tweaked the edges of his mind. Another glass, on the top landing at home, a
dark, oval mirror framing the face of a small, pale child. Himself. Five years old,
perhaps. Now why did he remember that?” (R 145). Perhaps because Rivers and Prior
also recall significant moments in their childhoods where they sat on the top landing and
looked at their reflection—in Rivers’s case a portrait of his namesake relative which
scared him (and caused his stuttering), and in Prior’s a glass-fronted barometer which
Prior used to escape from the sounds of his parents’ fighting. Rivers also sees other
reflections of himself, in moments such as “Night had turned the window into a black
mirror. His face floated there, and behind it, Siegfried and the rumpled bed” (£ 233).
And in the beginning of The Eye in the door, Prior, in Manning’s house, looks about him
and sees that “Everything was under dust-sheets except the tall mirror that reflected,
through the open door, the mirror in the hall. Prior found himself staring down a long
corridor of Priors, some with their backs to him, none more obviously real than the rest”
(£ 10). These reflective reflection moments are not a matter of narcissism: rather they
act as a clue to how the reader can choose to see the trilogy. In addition to serving the
109
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. plot, Barker reflects Sassoon, Prior, and Rivers in such a manner that enables the reader to
see them as mapping a way for the Great War to speak about the British Empire’s
beginning dissolution, as well as what that means to the contemporary reader. Sassoon
ultimately is a character of his times, a modernist who cannot transcend modernist
anxieties; Billy Prior is the postmodern character “sent back” to the Great War to do
things right; and Rivers acts as the hearer of testimony, the one who can model how to
analyze, synthesize, and come to terms with historical events.
Barker emphasizes Sassoon’s need to see and experience both sides. He is a
warrior and a pacifist, yet is not comfortable being either he seems to need to switch
back and forth and hover in-between, and is himself troubled by this need. In contrast,
both Prior and Rivers accept that a certain amount of duality is a necessity in the modem
world. Rivers admits that he is “a deeply divided man” yet thinks this division helps in
his professional life (E 141); Prior’s divisions seem to help him—they double his skills.
But Sassoon struggles against the duality that he is constantly acting out. Rivers sees him
as a man “striving for consistency, for singleness of being” despite the fact that his
“internal divisions had been dangerously deepened by the war” (E 229). In The Eye,
Barker has Sassoon claim, “I keep thinking how big it is, the war, and how impossible it
is to write about” (220). Yet of course, Sassoon is known for his writing about the war;
he is one of the most prominent of the Great War poets. Barker very much presents
Sassoon as a writer; it is important that in the midst of all the general turmoil of the war
and Sassoon’s particular turmoil of declaring himself against it and suffering from shell
shock and related hallucinations, Sassoon remains, prominently, a writer—and a working
writer at that (Fittingly, too, Rivers was known to have “encouraged the writing of
110
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. poetry as therapy” (Tylee 61).) It was at Craiglockhart that the real Sassoon met the real
Wilfred Owen and helped him with his poetry. Using the manuscripts that exist of
Owen’s poetry covered with Sassoon’s comments, Barker fictionalizes these working
sessions and devotes several chapters to creating these rather unusual writers’ workshop
scenes. Despite his claim of the “impossibility” of writing about the war, Barker portrays
a Sassoon who is determined to do just that.
In Testimony, Shoshana Felman and Dori Laub write that witnessing the
Holocaust has been an “as yet unresolvedcrisis o f history, a crisis which in turn is
translated into a crisis o f literature insofar as literature becomes a witness, and perhaps
the only witness, to the crisis within history which precisely cannot be articulated,
witnessed in the given categories of history itself’ (xviii). Although the Holocaust of
course has its own unique horrors, the trauma experienced by soldiers in the trenches
make Felman’s theories applicable to aspects of the Great War as well. This is why
Sassoon—a writer in real life—is so useful for Barker. In her trilogy she writes overtly
about war while also addressing the issue of war as the beginning of the end for the
British Empire. In The Ghost Road she tackles this directly by interspersing Rivers’s
recollections of the empire abroad with war moments at the front In Regeneration she
prepares for this by having Sassoon the writer continually attempt to document the trauma
he witnesses and experiences. Sassoon is the one who translates the “crisis of history”
(unresolved at this point as to what it will mean for empire) into a “crisis of literature.”
Sassoon is the witness of the experience of trench warfare, but he is also a “witness” in a
larger sense of a heretofore unarticulable crisis.
I l l
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Sassoon, as the character who is in many ways the representative of his times, is
also constrained by them. He does not seem able to gain the kind of larger-picture
awareness that Billy Prior and Rivers can glean. He approaches the war as the war and
wrestles with it on the terms with which it has been presented—which are often the
propagandists binaries which he is able to see through. For Sassoon, then, ‘Telling thus
entails a reassertion of the hegemony of reality and a re-extemalization of the evil that
affected and contaminated the trauma victim” (Laub 69); he writes to make things right
again. Felman explains that;
Both [psychoanalysis and literature], henceforth, will be considered as primarily events o f speech, and their testimony, in both cases, will be understood as a mode oftruth’s realization beyond what is available as statement, beyond what is available, that is, as a truth transparent to itself and entirely known, given, in advance, prior to the very process of its utterance. The testimony will thereby by understood, in other words, not as a mode of statement of, but rather as a mode ofaccess to, that truth. (15-6)
This intersects with what Barker is doing in Regeneration: she uses Sassoon’s writing
and Rivers’s psychoanalysis as a first step towards explicating the significance of the
Great War as Empire’s first major twentieth-century ailment, which led directly to its
precipitous decline. She devotes several chapters to showing Sassoon in action as a
writer, both to establish his writing as this “mode of access to” the truths of the war, and
as a symptom of its ailment
When Sassoon and Owen meet at Craiglockhart, Sassoon is already a poet of
some fame, whereas Owen is just beginning his brief career as poet Owen is familiar
with Sassoon’s work and is rather star-struck by him; he is flattered when Sassoon shows
interest in helping him revise his poems. In most of the workshop scenes that Barker
creates, Sassoon is helping Owen with his “Anthem for Doomed Youth.” Sassoon, to a
112
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. certain extent, seems overly preoccupied that Owen gets it “right,” that the poem works
not only as art but as art that tells—and documents—the truth. He does not at all want to
see the war glorified, and criticizes with an “Owen, for God’s sake, this is War Office
propaganda” (R 141). By their next workshop session, Owen has revised much and
Sassoon admits that the poem is “transformed (R 157). Sassoon is still worried,
however, that there are too many inherent contradictions in Owen’s poem, and comments
that “I just don’t like the idea of.. .making it out to be less of a horror than it really is” (R
157). Before both men are discharged from the hospital, they meet for one last workshop.
This time they meet in the lounge, and Barker writes that “They had the room to
themselves, except for one other member, and he was half hidden behind the Scotsman”
(/? 217). As they read and revise their poetry out loud, then, they already have a listener,
someone who—perhaps—is taking note of their testimony. When their goodbyes have
been said, and Sassoon has left the lounge, Barker once again mentions this third man,
writing that “the unseen listener had gone” (R 219). She thus emphasizes the role that
writing is to play in Regeneration; it is “a mode of access to” (Felman 16) the crisis of
empire to which she is using war as an entry.
In contrast to Sassoon, Barker creates a completely fictional character, Billy Prior,
who in many ways is quintessentially postmodern. He is a product of hindsight; this is
not to say that Billy Prior is unbelievable, but that he is a man who would be quite at
home in the second half of the twentieth century as well. Barker gives Billy an almost
uncanny awareness of the tensions surrounding the war he understands the war’s
upheaval. One of the methods Barker uses to portray Billy’s many transformative talents
is to make him always two things at once. Whereas Sassoon is not comfortable being one
113
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. way or the other and hovers between in a manner that is annoyingly noncommittal, Billy
Prior can fit both sides of a binary almost perfectly. When he first appears in
Regeneration, he is suffering from mutism. He cannot or will not speak, yet when he
writes notes to Rivers on a pad, he prints all in capitals because it is “CLEARER” (R 42).
He refuses to communicate normally, while simultaneously making sure that what he
does communicate will be immediately understood. This paradox fittingly introduces
Prior’s character, for throughout the entire trilogy Prior crosses all lines skillfully.
Several times Rivers notes how Prior seems both large and small, weak and
strong. When Rivers hears Prior speak for the first time, he notes that “Hearing Prior’s
voice for the first time had the curious effect of making him look different. Thinner, more
defensive. And, at the same time, a lot tougher” (R 49). To Rivers, Prior almost always
seems to appear just as easily one way as he does the other; he reminds Rivers “of a
toddler clinging to his father’s sleeve in order to be able to deliver a harder kick on his
shins” (E 76). He is dependent and independent, needy and ferocious. When Prior’s
parents come to visit him at Craiglockhart and introduce themselves to Rivers, Prior’s
duality becomes more explicable. On the one hand his father tried to toughen Billy as a
child, forcing him to stand up for himself and fight the kids that teased him; his mother,
on the other hand, tried to keep him inside, encouraged him to study and rise out of the
class into which he was bom. Mr. Prior blames Billy’s double identity on his wife, telling
Rivers, “He’s neither fish nor fowl, and she’s too bloody daft to see it” (R 57). He tells
Rivers that Billy is aware of his double identity and “underneath doesn’tthank her for it”
(R 57). While perhaps not thankful for this ability, Billy does take full advantage of it
He frequently changes his accent and mannerisms to become the epitome of whatever
114
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. class the situation calls for. His viewers are always fooled. When Prior first meets Sarah
in a cafd, she thinks that he is of the officer class he is dressed to be. When he tells her
his name is Prior, “She burst out laughing. ‘Don’t you lothave Christian names?'
‘Billy.’ He wanted to say, and I’m not ‘you lot’” (R 89).
Civilians are led to believe that class issues do not matter at the front, that the
army is all one big happy family, and that the only divisions are between the British and
the Germans. Prior, ever observant, knows of course that this is not true. He sees the
divisions and is angered by them. He grumbles to Rivers, “The only thing that really
makes me angry is when people at home say there are no class distinctions at the front
Ball-ocks. What you wear, what you eat. Where you sleep. What you carry. The men
are pack animals” (R 67). It is perhaps in order to defy these distinctions then, that Prior
so easily acts one class and then the other. He changes class appearance any time and in
any situation. While liaisoning with Charles Manning, an officer who solicits Prior in
London, he realizes that Manning would be more at ease if Prior seemed more working
class. No problem—he simply takes off his shirt, spikes up his short hair, hangs a
cigarette from his lip and “roughens” his accent: “He’d transformed himself into the sort
of working-class boy Manning would think it was all right to fuck. A sort of seminal
spittoon. And it worked” (£11). Echoing Prior’s father, Manning later thinks, “All the
same, the basic truth was the man was neither fish nor fowl nor good red herring.
Socially. Sexually too, of course, though this was a less comfortable reflection” (£ 20).
Although Prior can act the part of the upper class officer, his loyalties remain with
the lower class. He and Manning have many skirmishes regarding class and the
assumptions that are connected with it. Prior often loses his temper and apologizes, but
115
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. usually with qualifications that are not voiced. For example, after a particularly heated
argument over class issues, Prior says to Manning, MTm sorry too.... You’re right, of
course. Class prejudice isn’t any more admirable for being directed upwards.’ Just more
fucking justified” (£ 203). Prior is troubled by how his ability to seem to belong to both
classes is viewed by those he respects. He can ignore his father’s comments, but when
his friends say similar things, he cannot dismiss them as easily. Although effortless, his
switches from side to side are consciously performed. When his childhood friend, Mac,
tells him that he does not trust him because he is in the “‘Officers’ mess one night, back
streets of Salford the next Equally at home or...Equally not at home, in both,”’ Prior is
defensive, yet is prepared to argue his reasons clearly, pointing out to Mac that the
binaries Mac constructs of good vs. evil, proletariat vs. aristocrat, are not so cleanly and
admirably constructed. For Mac is a conscientious objector, and Prior instructs him:
“Well, let me tell you, Mac, the part of the proletariat I’ve been fighting with—the vast
majority—they’d string you up from the nearest fucking lamp-post and not think twice
about it” (£ 110). The binaries are a construct, and Prior will not hesitate to cross their
false borders.
Even the binary of sickness and health is one that Billy Prior will not “respect”
He is sent back to England from the front originally because of mutism caused by shell
shock. He goes to Craiglockhart to be cured by Rivers, and is more or less cured while
there. However, the asthma which he had tried to hide flares up, and when he has his
medical boards at the end of his Craiglockhart stay, he is given a London desk job
because of it Prior says, “‘I’m only asthmaticpart of the time’” (R65). He is only
anything “part of the time” and sick aind healthy is just one of the many binaries he
116
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. fudges. Prior and Rivers act as each other’s double in many complex ways throughout
the trilogy. When they meet at the hospital, the first way that their roles cross is a result
of Prior not being content with being solely the patient: he wants to be the doctor as well.
In one of his first sessions with Rivers after he gets his voice back, Prior says:
‘I don’t see why it has to be like this anyway.’ ‘Like what?’ ‘All the questions fromyou, all the answers from me. Why can’t it be both ways?’ (R 50)
Prior studies Rivers just as much as Rivers studies Prior. He reads Rivers’s book,The
Todas, and often immediately asks Rivers whatever question Rivers has just asked Prior.
Prior tells Rivers that he does not “agree with the treatment” Rivers is using on him (R 5).
He suggests to Rivers that Rivers try hypnosis. Rivers is frequently frustrated with
Prior’s role-switching, and one time retorts, “’You know one day you’re going to have to
accept the fact that you’re in this hospital because you’re ill. Not me. Not the CO. Not
the kitchen porter. You'” (R 97). Prior cannot stand to be so classified and role restricted.
Barker intends Prior to be versatile so that he can cope with the anxieties and
tensions of the war and empire’s dissolution; it is almost as if she sends Prior back to do
everything right. As I have already mentioned in my introduction, one way of seeing
Prior’s sophistication is to compare him to another literary shell-shock victim: Virginia
Woolf’s Septimus Warren Smith. Although suffering from the same war-induced disease
as Septimus, Billy reflects the fact that Barker wrote her novels seventy years after Woolf
wrote Mrs Dalloway\ shell shock is no longer a half-inexplicable condition. Whereas
Septimus’s trauma is only sketched, Billy’s is analyzed fully. Cathy Caruth describes
how “trauma is not locatable in the simple violent or original event in an individual’s
past, but rather in the way that its very unassimilated nature—the way it was preciselynot
117
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. known in the first instance—returns to haunt the survivor later on” (4). For Septimus, this
trauma is his experience in the war, in general, but more specifically his witnessing of the
death of his best friend, Evans. Woolf writes that “when Evans was killed, just before the
Armistice, in Italy, Septimus, far from showing any emotion or recognizing that here was
the end of a friendship, congratulated himself upon feeling very little and very reasonably.
The war had taught him. It was sublime” (130). We witness here how Septimus has not
been able to “assimilate” the traumas of the war. As a survivor, Septimus is continually
haunted by images of Evans, yet he does not consciously know how he has been affected
by Evans death.
In contrast, Billy Prior understands exactly what he is going through—although
such knowledge does not necessarily give him control over his mental state. Where
Septimus’s attraction to Evans is just hinted at—they are “two dogs playing on a hearth
rug” and ’They had to be together, share with each other, fight with each other, quarrel
with each other” (Woolf 130)—Billy Prior is fully aware of his bisexuality. Billy is also
aware of the game of sex and doesn’t hesitate to play it as needed. As mentioned
previously, in The Eye he goes from Myra to Manning and then switches his class
appearance to make Manning more at ease. His lovemaking to Sarah, his fiancde, is
tender, yet he is also quite capable of using sex as a humiliation—as he does with the
class snob Birtwhistle. As he explains to Rivers later when discussing this episode,
Birtwhistle “happens to represent everything in England that isn't worth fighting for.
Which made him a rather bracing companion” (G 101). Billy is attracted to his fellow
soldiers, and is honest to himself about that fact and about the tensions it causes. He
worries about the possible sadism involved in being attracted to those whom one can
118
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. order about and control, thinking “This doesn’t matter with a lover, where it’s just a
game, but here the disproportion of power is real and the nakedness involuntary” (G 175).
He later muses how “soldiers’ nakedness has a quality of pathos, not merely because the
body is so obviously vulnerable, but because they put on indignity and anonymity with
their clothes, and for most people, civilians, most of the time, the reverse is true” (G176).
Towards the end of the war, having moved into a French town that the Germans have just
been forced to abandon, Billy has a liaison with a French adolescent who first thinks that
Billy is German and speaks to him in that language. Billy writes, “I suppose it should
have disgusted me, but it didn’t. In fact it had the opposite effect” (G 247); he does not
shy away from examining truthfully his own inclinations and urges.
Halfway through The Ghost Road, Barker has Billy, like Sassoon, pick up a pen
and begin to write his testimony. Ever aware, one of Billy’s first entries is about how
many people in his tent are writing: “And not just letters either. Diaries. Poems. At
least two would-be poets in this hut alone” (G 115). He then analyzes it a bit in his
characteristically flippant manner “Why? You have to ask yourself. I think it’s a way of
claiming immunity. First-person narrators can’t die, so as long as we keep telling the
story of our own lives we’re safe. Ha bloody fucking Ha” (G 115). Billy’s entries,
although in the form of letters back from his time to ours, more often read like letters
from our time to his. Billy analyzes the war
I think what you’re saying is basically a conspiracy theory, and like all conspiracy theories it’s optimistic. What you’re saying is, OK the war isn’t being fought for the reasons we’re told, but itis being fought for a reason.... I think things are actually much worse than you think because there isn’t any kind of rational justification left. It’s become a self- perpetuating system. Nobody benefits. Nobody’s in control. Nobody knows how to stop. (G 143-4)
119
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. He ponders the relationship between language and power
Only the names meant anything. Mons, Loos, the Somme, Arras, Verdun, Ypres....But now...I realize there’s another group of words that still mean something. Little words that trip through sentences unregarded: us, them, we, they, here, there. These are the words of power, and long after we’re gone, they’ll lie about in the language, like the unexploded grenades in these fields, and any one of them’ll take your hand off. (G 257)
Billy realizes the power inherent in a binary. Later, he defends his own sympathy for the
“other”: “The man I bayoneted. What worries me is that he was middle aged. Odd
really—it’s supposed to be golden youth you mourn for. But he was so obviously
somebody who should have been at home.... And yes, you could see all this in his
face—with some people you can. Some people do look exactly what they are. Fuck i f ’
(G 218). Billy’s awareness does not just begin with his journal writing, for in
Regeneration and The Eye his comments are always wryly astute. He seems to be the
only patient of Rivers who knows of Rivers’s ethnological past and works. In The Eye he
wonders “whether there aren’t periods when people do become aware of what’s
happening, and they look back on their previous unconscious selves and it seems like
decades ago. Another life” (100). Billy is a World War I soldier with the benefit of post-
World War II expertise.
Barker rewrites the Great War and the beginnings of the dissolution of empire
with a postmodern character who can cope with the occurring historical crises. She
makes him aware of what is going on in a way that is soothing to the reader; for Billy, the
traumais known as it happens, so it is never a trauma quite. Barker sends Billy back in
time to analyze the event from all sides as it happens, thus thwarting the surprise of the
trauma of the war and negating the “compulsion to repeat” (Freud 21). But she leaves it
to Rivers to hear Billy’s testimony and synthesize it with all the other testimonies he has
120
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. heard throughout the war. Billy writes that ‘It’s interesting, well, at least it interests me,
that we’re still afraid in this irrational way when at the same time we’re surrounded by the
worst the twentieth century can do: shells, revolvers, rifles, guns, gas” (G 242), and he
will die before being able to see that there is worse yet to come. In a final attack, Prior is
wounded so that he can’t reach his gas mask and then is poisoned by the gas. He is lying
in a water-filled ditch, and as he dies he “gazed at his reflection in the water, which broke
and reformed and broke again as bullets hit the surface” (G 273). Always at home on
both sides of a binary, and seemingly of two times, Billy loses consciousness and then
dies only when he can no longer see his reflection in the water. As a modem and a
postmodern character, Billy cannot be one thing: when he loses sight of his double in his
reflection, he—as one—must die.
Although heroic, Billy is not a super-hero: he needs help recovering from and
synthesizing what he learns and observes. Once again, it is W. H. R. Rivers to the rescue.
In Testimony, Felman and Laub write of the importance of testimony to Holocaust
survivors. They use Freud and his theory of traumatic neurosis to show how such
survivors need to speak and to testify to their horrific experiences, and that it is only with
a witness to this testimony that the experience can be processed, externalized and put in
the past Billy Prior and Rivers’s other patients are also trauma survivors, and it is Rivers
who acts as their witness and hears the testimony of their experiences. This is an essential
role, for as Felman suggests, the truth is not necessarily available to those who
experienced it Prior needs Rivers, as witness, to synthesize what he has undergone, for
“the speaking subject constantly bears witness to a truth that nonetheless continues to
escape him, a troth that is, essentially, not available to its own speaker” (Felman 15).
121
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Rivers himself points out to Prior in a therapy session that remembering is not enough,
that “there has to be a moment of., .recognition. Acceptance” (E 249). Or as Laub
describes,
Bearing witness to a trauma is, in fact, a process that includes the listener. For the testimonial process to take place, there needs to be a bonding, the intimate and total presence of an other—in the position of one who hears. Testimonies are not monologues; they cannot take place in solitude. The witnesses are talking to somebody, to somebody they have been waiting for for a long time. (70-1)
Prior, like his name, has to have the experiences prior to Rivers becoming a witness to
them. But Rivers as the hearer of testimony is the one who can synthesize, analyze, and
cure. It is Rivers who must come to terms with the war and with what the war signals
about empire’s demise. Rivers also functions as Barker’s—and the reader’s—proxy; as
Rivers draws the parallels between war and empire in The Ghost Road, and thus
retroactively reveals the war to be, amongst other things, a harbinger of the dissolution of
empire, he prepares the reader for what is to come by negating the surprise.
In many ways, Barker’s choice of using Rivers as a character who will bear
witness to the testimony of others is a perfect one, for the real Rivers was very much a
Freudian at a time when most doctors did not accept Freud’s theories, if they were aware
of them at all. Dr. W. H. R. Rivers was an “-oiogy” renaissance man. Bora in 1864,
Rivers became ill with typhoid and missed his final year of public school, thus preventing
him from following in his family’s footsteps and attending Cambridge. Since he could
not go to Cambridge, he decided to study medicine instead, and at the age of 22 became
the youngest medical graduate of the University of London (Slobodin 9). He spent
several years as a ship’s surgeon, before getting a position at the National Hospital, where
he remained until 1892, when he went to Germany to study neurophysiology and
122
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. psychology. In 1893, he became a Fellow at St John’s College, Cambridge, and presided
over a successful psychiatry laboratory there. At Cambridge, he met the zoologist
biologist and anthropologist A. L. Haddon, who convinced Rivers to go on the
“Cambridge Anthropological Expedition to the Torres Straits,” which he was organizing
(Slobodin 21). At first resistant to the idea, Rivers finally capitulated and joined the
expedition; it was on this trip that Rivers became “seduced” by the field of ethnology.
Right from the beginning, Rivers would intersperse psychiatry with ethnology.
He spent 1901-2 “among the Todas of the Nilgiri Hills in southwestern India,” and his
“resulting ethnography, The Todas, has long been regarded as a classic” (Slobodin 28).
While studying the Todas, Rivers “carried out psychological tests at the same time”
(Slobodin 30). After 1902, he divided his time between the study of ethnology and the
study of psychology, while also performing the well-known neurophysiological
experiments with Henry Head that Barker refers to in Regeneration (and uses for her
choice of its title). In the years leading up to the war, Rivers “had gotten psychology
started as a distinct academic discipline” at Cambridge” (Slobodin 37), and also spent
considerable time in Melanesia, working on his two-volume study of Melanesian society.
This was an extraordinarily productive time in Rivers’s life, yet interestingly, “Many of
his friends felt that ‘it was not really until the war that Rivers ‘found himself; that
through his work in treating psychoneuroses he achieved an emotional fulfillment that
had been missing in his laboratory research at Cambridge, and even in his teaching and
anthropological field work” (Showalter 183). As Rivers himself wrote in his 1919 essay,
“Mind and Medicine,” “Perhaps the most striking feature of the war from the medical
point of view has been the enormous scale upon which its conditions have produced
123
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. functional nervous disorders, a scale far surpassing any previous war..(1 2 8 ). But it
seemed that for Rivers, all of his fields of study both expanded during the war and came
together. Rivers seemed particularly able to apply the insights he gained observing the
war’s wreckage to all facets of his work. His biographer, Richard Slobodin, observes that
“the bulk of Rivers’s writing in the postwar years was in the area where psychology,
psychiatry, sociology, and ethnology converge” (74). It is this convergence—and the
awareness that it implies—that makes Rivers an ideal character for Barker.
Foucault, as previously observed, writes that psychoanalysis and ethnology both
“form...a perpetual principle of dissatisfaction, of calling into question, of criticism and
contestation of what may seem, in other respects, to be established” (373). Barker uses
Rivers’s well-known abilities as a psychoanalyst and an ethnologist, then, to elucidate the
dissatisfaction of empire’s dissolution and the ensuing loss of identity. According to
Foucault, ethnology and psychoanalysis “are directed towards that which, outside man,
makes it possible to know, with a positive knowledge, that which is given to or eludes his
consciousness” (378). This is precisely what Barker has Rivers do in the novels, by both
hearing the testimony of the shell-shocked soldiers, and then drawing parallels between
their experience and the colonized Melanesians. Rivers’s friend, Elliot Smith, writes that
Rivers was eager to be a war-time psychiatrist because “he found that the measures taken
to discover the causes of the soldier’s mental disabilities were so similar to those he had
been using in Melanesia to probe into the social and magico-religious problems of
peoples of lowly culture.... For he now began to integrate the processes of psychology
and ethnology into one discipline” (Smith xvii-xviii). What Rivers learns from the war
enables him to decrease the distance inherent in the vantage-point of empire and war’s
124
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. primary binary: us/them. That Rivers did view psychology and ethnology as “one
discipline” is evident in his post-war writings, such as this essay in Psychology and
Politics, in which he suggests,
In the first place, we believe that if we succeed in discovering the historical processes by which human activity has produced the existing cultures of the earth, we shall then be provided with a mass of material by the study of which we can formulate the laws which direct and govern the activities and fate of those groups, whether we call them tribes, nations, or empires, into which the peoples of the earth are divided, as well as the laws which determine the growth of the social customs and institutions of mankind, (my italics) {Psychology and Politics 132-3)
Barker’s choice of W. H. R. Rivers is strategic. As ethnologist, anthropologist,
sociologist, psychiatrist, psychoanalyst, neurophysiologist, and Freudian, the fictional
Rivers will have the time to synthesize what the real-life Rivers—who died suddenly in
1922 at the age of fifty-eight—did not
That Rivers championed Freudian analysis—albeit critically—also makes him suit
Barker’s project Felman writes that “In contrast it is by stepping in his turn into the
position of the patient, and by acknowledging an interchangeability between doctor and
patient... that Freud creates the revolutionized clinical dimension of thepsychoanalytic
dialogue, an unprecedented kind of dialogue in which the doctor’s testimony does not
substitute itself for the patient’s testimony, butresonates with it, because, as Freud
discovers, it takes two to witness the unconscious” (15). When Regeneration begins, we
see Rivers reading over and discussing Sassoon’s medical file, preparing for such a
psychoanalytic dialogue. Throughout the rest of the trilogy, Rivers is shown talking with
his patients, asking and answering questions, his insight indeed “resonating” with their
testimony. And Barker makes sure to show that he is aware of his role in the dialogue,
that there is a method behind what many of his colleagues see as a coddling kind of
125
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. madness. We see Rivers maneuvering around the defenses put up by a shell-shocked
patient, who, as a doctor himself, “had some knowledge of Freud, though derived mainly
from secondary or prejudiced sources, and disliked, or perhaps feared, what he thought he
knew” (R 31). We see Rivers frequently analyzing his own dreams, revealing that he is
not afraid to practice what he preaches. In Eye, Rivers thinks: “he was in the state of
fatigue and illness that favours the development of an anxiety neurosis, and behaving in
the way most likely to bring it about. He was doing exactly what he told his patients not
to do: repressing the awareness of fear” (E 66). This is precisely how Rivers is “at the
same time a witness to the trauma witness and a witness to himself. It is only in this way,
through his simultaneous awareness of the continuous flow of those inner hazards both in
the trauma witness and in himself, that he can become the enabler of the testimony—the
one who triggers its initiation, as well as the guardian of its process and of its momentum”
(Laub 58). Rivers uses his own methods on himself. We also see Rivers using the
Freudian terminology that Felman and Laub use Testimony:in he talks of traumatic
neurosis, and he works on a paper entitled “The Repression of War Experience,” which
he will present to the British Medical Association (R 173). Rivers is pruned to be a
hearer of testimony.
It is certainly true for Rivers that, as Felman and Laub write, ‘The professionally
trained receivers of the testimonies which bear witness to the war atrocities...cannot
fulfill their task without, in turn, passing through the crisis of experiencing their
boundaries, their separateness, their functionality, and indeed their sanity, at risk” (xvii).
As Rivers works as therapist and hears the testimony of his shell-shocked patients, trying
to cure their various neuroses, he frequently finds his own mental and physical health
126
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. wavering. This is proof of the processing that Rivers is doing: he is not just hearing
about these experiences, but also serving as witness to them. Rivers becomes, for
example, “as changed by Sassoon as Sassoon was by Rivers” (Showalter 187).
Furthermore, after finally getting his patient, Bums, to speak of his particular trauma
which involved a very decomposed body, Rivers admits that “his own sense of the horror
of the event seemed actually to have increased” (R 184). Experiencing insomnia one
night, Rivers feels himself “getting all the familiar symptoms” (R 139). When he goes to
see his doctor friend, Biyce, the next morning, Bryce asks him “‘What do you think’s
wrong?” and Rivers replies, “’War neurosis...I already stammer and I’m starting to
twitch’” (R 140). When Rivers visits his brother and sister-in-law for a short vacation
away from Craiglockhart, his sister-in-law, appalled by his poor health, treats him like the
common Victorian female hysteric and makes him do nothing but eat: “Rivers still
staggered away from the table feeling that he’d been force-fed” (R 150). Rivers’s own
maladies ease the divide between doctor and patient, making him a more sympathetic
witness.
Rivers’s own experience, which comes closest to those that trigger traumatic
neurosis in his patients, occurs when he visits Dr. Yealland—also a historical figure—and
a London psychiatrist who treats his patients in a manner that is the direct opposite to
Rivers’s own methods. Dr. Yealland is very similar to the Doctors Holmes and Bradshaw
in Woolf s Mrs Dalloway. Yealland’s patients—like Septimus Warren Smith—do not
stand a chance at regaining true mental health. Right from the moment Rivers enters the
hospital, he becomes anxious and sees the place as being akin to his patients’ wartime
surroundings: “This deserted corridor in a hospital he knew to be overcrowded had
127
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. something eerie about it Uncanny. Almost the feeling his patients described, talking
about their experience of the front of No Man’s Land, that landscape apparently devoid
of life that actually contained millions of men” (R 223). Rivers meets up with Yealland
and begins to follow him as he performs his morning rounds. Whereas Rivers is always
portrayed as a listener, in contrast, Yealland is described as a watcher (and perhaps thus
aligned with those who are unduly monitoring their fellow citizens): “In conversation he
did not merely meet your eye, but stared so intently that you felt your skull had become
transparent” (R 224). As Rivers will soon realize, however, Yealland’s vision is dark: he
sees electroshock treatment and bullying as being the only sure way to cure his patients.
On this particular day, they finally reach the last patient in the ward, a soldier named
Call an who is suffering from mutism. Yealland tells Rivers that part of his past treatment
of Callan has been “lighted cigarettes to the tongue” (R 227); Rivers is understandably
shocked. Today, however, Yealland is going to use electroshock therapy on Callan. With
Rivers observing, Yealland brings Callan into a room, pulls down the blinds and locks the
door. The room was dark except for one small light, which was focused on Callan; the
scene, as Rivers realizes, is akin to a torture chamber. Yealland tells Callan that
“‘Rememberyou must talk before you leave’” me and begins administering a series of
severe shocks (R 230). The “treatment” takes hours, and Rivers, identifying with the
patient, is exhausted by the end. As Yealland slowly makes Callan speak, “Rivers had to
stop himself trying to make the sound for him. He was himself very tense; all the worst
memories of his stammer came crowding into his mind” (R 231). At the pinnacle of the
treatment, Yealland proclaims, utYou must speak, but I shall not listen to anything you
have to say'” (R 231). If there was any doubt before, this moment completely establishes
128
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Yealland as Rivers’s doppelganger; Rivers witnesses Yealland not listening. From that
point on Rivers will more than ever strive to hear and to witness the testimony of his own
patients; he knows and accepts that “it takes two to witness the unconscious” (Felman 15).
Regeneration, the first book of the trilogy, gets its name from an experiment that
Rivers performed with a fellow scientist and friend, Henry Head. As Barker writes,
“Head had volunteered himself as the subject of the proposed experiment, and Rivers had
assisted at the operation in which Head’s radial nerve had been severed and sutured.
Then, together, over a period of five years, they had carted the progress of regeneration”
(R 46). Rivers acts as a witness to this regeneration, just as he is witness to the
regeneration of his patients suffering from the war. He will hear a patient’s testimony
and gradually convince him “to abandon his hopeless attempt to forget, and advising him
instead to spend some part of every day remembering” (/? 26). Barker intends for Rivers
to instruct the reader to do the same. Felman queries, “Is the testimony, therefore, a
simple medium of historical transmission, or is it, in obscure ways, the unsuspected
medium of a healing? If history has clinical dimensions, how can testimony intervene,
pragmatically and efficaciously, at once historically (politically) and clinically?” (9). By
witnessing the testimony of the war, like Rivers does, and by connecting the problems of
the war to the problems of empire—also as Rivers does, the reader can understand the
war as the beginning of empire’s end. In The Ghost Road, Barker writes that “Rivers
wondered whether Sassoon and Harrington had been too much in the forefront of his
mind while he was listening to Wansbeck. At best, on such occasions, one became a
conduit whereby one man’s hard-won experience of self-healing was made available to
another” (G 229). This indeed seems to be Rivers’s central task in the trilogy: to act as a
129
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. “conduit” for the testimonies of the war, and then to process these testimonies in terms of
empire.
Fnwirr. AlrrMMl
In The Ghost Road, Rivers thinks to himself, “Before the war., .but one must
beware of attributing everything to the war. The change had started years before the war”
(225). This is a point that Barker frequently has her characters voice. In contrast to the
notion that the war was an about-face turning point, Barker instead emphasizes that the
tenets of war are the same as the tenets of empire; war exposes these tenets, but they have
been in play all along. Barker’s method is to first call attention to the binaries of war
-the us/them good/bad mentality that becomes such a central part of wartime language
and propaganda—and then to systematically mock and transgress it. The binaries
become one of her main targets, and this notion of the war being a sudden, unexpected
eruption is Barker’s starting point
Regeneration, The Eye in the Door, and The Ghost Road are all set in the last two
years of World War I, a time when it was even more imperative than ever to adhere to the
dichotomies of the war. War demanded this kind of mind-set to question was to falter,
and to falter was to harm the empire—the “good” and “us” which was exactly what the
British army was both trying to safeguard and perpetuate. As Barker writes, ‘The
casualty lists were too terrible to admit of any public debate on the continuation of the
war” (R 211). Debate was not encouraged: the supposed uniqueness of the Great War
called for simple adherence to the decisions of the nation state. Especially in its last
130
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. years when the horrible facts of trench warfare were coming to light, the Great War was
presented as an anomaly and thus separate from anything that had come before; to make
it through such devastation demanded allegiance. Although she will ultimately
deconstruct this notion of the war as “an event which could be said to mark the beginning
of the modem world” (Fussell 11), Barker begins by establishing how prominent it was in
the discourse of the times. People insisted upon seeing the war as the beginning of
something new. The Great War was a time when “the mode of gross dichotomy came to
dominate perception and expression” (Fussell 79). Besides demanding and feeding on
binaries, it was an interval which emphasized this separation between times. For years
afterwards, time was divided into pre-war or post-war categories. The Great War
“reversed the Idea of Progress”; it pared down abstractions into basic right and wrongs
(Fussell 8). No matter what complex order of things the soldiers may have thought they
knew, in battle it was made clear to them that in the “reality” of war, everything was
simply this or that. As Fussell writes, ‘The innocent army fully attained the knowledge
of good and evil at the Somme on July 1,1916” (29). They learned that “one thing [was]
opposed to another, not with some Hegelian hope of synthesis involving a dissolution of
both extremes...but with a sense that one of the poles embodies so wicked a deficiency or
flaw of perversion that its total submission is called for” (Fussell 79). The Germans were
evil—they were “them”; everything about them was “other”. British soldiers in their
trenches even had a binary view: they could either see the earth walls of the trench, or
blue sky (Fussell 51). As one soldier said, “On this side of our wire everything is
familiar and every man is a friend, over there, beyond the wire, is the unknown, the
uncanny” (Gilbert & Gubar 267). Barker emphasizes this binary mentality inThe Eye in
131
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the Door, when she prints a copy of “Haig’s April 13th Order of the Day”: ‘There is no
other course open to us but to fight it out Every position must be held to the last man:
there must be no retirement” (£ 6). In Haig's view there was no middle ground, no room
for negotiation—only losing or winning, no matter what the consequences. Part of Pat
Barker’s project is to show the dangers of such simplicities.
In his section on the binaries of war, Fussell points out that “One of the legacies
of the war is just this habit of simple distinction, simplification, and opposition. If truth
is the main casualty in war, ambiguity is another”(79). It is exactly this lack of
ambiguity which often leaves Barker’s characters exposed in a no-man’s-land with
nowhere to take cover. As Barker develops how the binaries of war extend naturally
from, and are interchangeable with, the binaries of empire, she makes it clear just how
difficult it is for her characters to reconcile themselves with such a lack of ambiguity. In
an either/or world, one is forced to contort Barker reveals the impossibilities of
acquiescing to these binaries by having so many of her characters live a variety of
“double lives.” In doing so she shows that a thinking person cannot fit into the small
space that war propaganda allows; although her characters will often try to toe the line, so
to speak, they simply cannot comfortably remain in the one allotted binary side; they
begin to experiment with both sides: they double or split. Such double lives range from
the mundane to the extreme. For example, Rivers experiences a split between his
emotions and his intellect, and realizes how he has been so split for most of his life:
“Still, he had been, throughout most of his life, a deeply divided man, and though he
would once have said that this division exercised little, if any influence on his thinking,
he had come to believe it had determined the direction of his research” (£ 141). Rivers
132
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. has made it his career to bridge the two sides: in the trilogy he will attempt to do this
with all binaries.
The character Charles Manning lives a double life with regards to his sexuality.
Manning is an officer who, after being wounded at the front, now works in the home
office in London. His family has gone to live in the countiy, so he has the space to
devote time to both sides of his desires. When in the countiy, he is a traditional family
man, husband, and father; when in London, he frequently has trysts with other men. In
fact, Eye begins with Billy Prior picking up Manning in the park and returning to
Manning’s London house for a rendezvous. As is usually the case Eye,in however,
someone is watching Manning go from side to side, and Barker writes that “For
somebody like Manning, profoundly committed to living a double life, the revelation that
both sides of his life were visible to unknown eyes must be like having the door to the
innermost part of one’s identity smashed open” (E 155). The binaries of sexuality
become even more enforced during the war, as I will discuss in greater detail in the
second section, and thus Manning feels it is even more imperative that his double life not
be exposed: following the mindset of the war, he is supposed to give up any ambiguity
and only inhabit one side of any given binary.
Siegfried Sassoon is another character who has to split himself and inhabit both
sides of the binary in order to survive. The very first words of Regeneration are
Sassoon’s declaration against war which lead to his being sent to Craiglockhart hospital.
In his typical desire to be on both sides, he titles it “A Soldier’s Declaration,” thus
claiming both viewpoints—-soldier and pacifist—as his own. Sassoon, as we come to see,
is both against the war, and wants to return to fight in it; it is Rivers’ s job at
133
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Craiglockhart to try to reconcile these two positions. Everyone seems aware of this
duality in Sassoon, including Sassoon himself. He tells Rivers in analysis that he was
fragmented even before the war, and that he was three people:
‘I mean, there was the riding, hunting, cricketing me, and then there was the.. .the other side.. .that was interested in poetry and music, and things like that And I didn’t seem able to....’ He laced his fingers. ‘Knot them together.” (R 35)
Here he defines only two of his “selves”; the third one is the self hovering between the
two. Sassoon is used to his own kind of separate versatility; he cannot be one thing only
for the sake of the war. He thrives on visiting all sides of a binary, and will not commit to
just one.
Sassoon is homosexual, but in the trilogy he will never come out and come out
He and Rivers are constantly having conversations where both men circle around
Sassoon’s sexuality, alluding to it indirectly, and then moving on quickly to another topic.
This is important in part because it illustrates Rivers’s own sexual ambiguity and
attraction to Sassoon; however, it also reveals Barker’s emphasis on the hesitating quality
of Sassoon’s personality. With the Wilde affair not too long in the past, in one sense it is
wise of Sassoon not to reveal openly that he is gay; but the hedging happens so often that
it seems to imply something more. Sassoon peppers his conversations with Rivers with
such statements as: “‘My intimate details disqualify me from military service”’ (/? 70).
In a longer conversation he tells Rivers that he really identifies with Edward Carpenter’s
idea of an “intermediate sex” (R 54). He is attracted to notions of in-between.
This fragmentation becomes even more extreme once the war begins, and once
there is even more pressure to be on one side only. Sassoon continually hops from one
side of the binary to the other. He becomes renowned for being a “Happy warrior one
134
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. minute. Bitter pacifist the next” (R 74). Sassoon eventually returns back to active
service, comforting himself with the paradox that “I’m not going back to kill people. I’m
only going back to look after some men’” (E 229). At the front where binaries are the
only law of the land, Sassoon finds it hard to keep up his intermediate stance. In a
manner that Billy Prior will later take to an extreme, Sassoon develops a kind of warrior
double, a self so separate that everyone notices and comments upon it Yet after
becoming one side for a time, he immediately writes a poem which incorporates both
sides; he returns to the middle ground. InThe Eye in the Door, Charles Manning says
regarding Sassoon: “You know he’s a tremendously successful andbloodthirsty platoon
commander, and yet at the same time, back in billets, out comes the notebook. Another
anti-war poem” (158). Later on in the novel, Rivers thinks that “Siegfried had always
coped with the war by being two people: the anti-war poet and pacifist; the bloodthirsty,
efficient company commander” (233). Sassoon’s final war wound is a result of trying to
surmount the basic binary of wan not content with believing simply that the other side is
evil and should be considered simply that, Sassoon walks into a trench occupied by the
Germans. He does this not to kill, but to see. He tells Rivers, ‘7just wanted to see. I
wanted to see the other side” {E 231). Fussell points out that for the real Sassoon,
“workmanship means...the application of binary vision eveiywhere, even in the smallest
details” (104). Barker has Charles Manning tell Rivers that a poem of Sassoon’s “uses
the experience of the platoon commander, but it never uses any of his attitudes. And yet
for once, in that one poem, he gets both versions of himself in’” (£ 158). Barker’s
Sassoon explains the Sassoon of the poems; he can’t shake the binaries of war and is not
content being wholly one way or wholly the other. By making Sassoon’s place be in-
135
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. between, Barker is able to subvert the accuracy of the wartime binaries. It is, of course,
not as easy as us/them good/bad pre-war/post-war, for the war is not an aberration but a
culmination of the policies and mindsets of empire, which have themselves thrived on
such binaries and what they mask. Sassoon’s splitting and hovering expose the false
borders of binary thinking; Billy Prior’s doubling will take such subversiveness a step
further.
Billy Prior is another of Barker’s characters who experiences a doubling of self.
In contrast to Sassoon, who can’t seem to inhabit either side of a binary fully, Billy Prior
has the ability to inhabit all sides comfortably. However, he often uses hate to get himself
to be fully one thing or fully the other; by making hate what fuels Billy, Barker calls into
question the motives behind binary thinking. When Prior has sex with the prostitute
Nelly in The Ghost Road, he remembers what it was like when he was young and was
paid for sex by Father Mackenzie. This memory comes at an inopportune moment, and
Prior thinks, ‘The only way not to be her was to hate her. Narrowing his eyes, he blurred
her features, ran them together into the face they pinned to the revolver targets. A
snarling, baby-eating boche” (G 41). In a moment when a separated binary is a necessity,
where he has to not be able to feel compassion for her side of the affair in order to
complete the act, Prior uses hate to become one thing, to know his side only—that of the
payer—and not hers, the payee. Significantly, he uses hate to become singular. As The
Eye in the Door progresses, we learn that this is also how Prior survived the horrors at the
front In a kind of mockery to the binaries that war demanded—that he had to only know
and empathize with “us” and not “them,” with good and not evil, Prior—who does not
follow those divisions, whose entire life has consisted of crossing all sides and playing all
136
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. roles—becomes a caricature of a prize warrior. This Prior is fully one way: singularly
rotten. He is a “warrior double, a creature formed out of Flanders clay” (£ 245). This
double tells Rivers, “‘I was bom two years ago. In a shell-hole in France. I have no
father’” (E 240). He is a better fighter than Prior, because he feels no pain or remorse; he
is demanding—he leaves Prior a message saying, “Why don’t you leave my Jucking cigars
alone?” (E 191); he makes deals with Spragge, a former Ministry of Munitions spy who
is responsible for putting the innocent Beattie Roper in jail; and he betrays Mac, his best
friend from childhood. This double follows the wartime ideal to the letter, yet he is
frightening, not admirable. The odiousness of Prior’s double mocks the ideal of adhering
to one side of a binary.
Since the us/them binary is central to both war and empire, it is crucial to Barker’s
project However, as she demonstrates, the problem with the us/them construct is that it
tends to multiply from within, resulting in a bevy of us/thems within the original “us”.
The “us” splinters and antagonisms abound. In her trilogy, Barker spotlights two major
divisions in particular the division between civilians and soldiers, and the class division
that exists between soldiers themselves. The division between civilians and soldiers was
understandable, since the civilians often just did not know about the horrors that the
soldiers were experiencing. There was no place for the realities of trench warfare in the
glories of war that the propaganda was still espousing: civilians were being fed their dose
of binaries as well. Thus, to a woman civilianhanding out white feathers, if a man was of
age and not in uniform, he was a coward, point blank. There was no place for in-
betweens, such as Barker’s character, Bums, discovers, while recuperating from shell
shock and haplessly wearing civilian clothes while in London. The gap between the
137
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. perceptions of soldiers and civilians ultimately become a “divide which yawned between,
on the one side, the civilian.. .aware of and almost inured to, colossal slaughter, but
oblivious to the real tortures, physical and mental, of trench warfare, and on the other the
soldier who was enduring them” (Marwick 28). Barker’s Sassoon reveals his resentment
towards civilians by describing the two middle-aged men who are sharing his train
compartment as “both looking as if they’d done rather well out of the war” (R 5). Billy
Prior “was made physically sick by the sight and sound and smell of civilians” (E 7) and
begrudges their misuse of military vocabulary: “Like going over the top, he thought No,
it wasn’t Nothing was like that Civilians seemed to use that expression all the time
now. I went a bit over the top last night they said, meaning they’d had a second glass of
port” ( G 13). With such resentments, it is hard to feel unified.
Billy Prior, always the one to be on both sides of a binary, has a mixed class
background: his father is working class, whereas his mother is slipped middle class with
upper class pretensions. He was thus raised with an awareness of the customs of both,
and can switch back and forth, first passing as one and then the other, “equally not at
home in either” (£ 116). This is augmented by the fact that he becomes an officer, while
his roots are from northern England. It is thus Billy, attuned to class differences, who
often makes observations about these differences and tensions. InEye, Barker writes
about Billy:
One of the ways in which he felt different from his brother officers, one of the many, was that their England was a pastoral place: fields, streams, wooded valleys, medieval churches surrounded by ancient elms. They couldn’t grasp that for him, and for the vast majority of the men, the Front, with its mechanization, its reduction of the individual to a cog in a machine, its blasted landscape, was not a contrast with the life they’d known at home, in Birmingham or Manchester or Glasgow or the Welsh pit villages, but a nightmarish culmination. (E 115-6)
138
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. These different viewpoints matter a great deal at the Front Billy tells Rivers that “It’s
made perfectly clear when you arrive that some people are more welcome than others. It
helps if you’ve been to the right school. It helps if you hunt it helps if your shirts are the
right colour” (R 66). Later in The Ghost Road, Billy complains about a particularly
snobbish officer who remarked about the lower classes that “Of course one can’t rely on
them. Their values are totally different from ours. They’re a different species, really.
The WCs” (G 100). Such sentiments coming from that particular officer are easy to
dismiss, but Sassoon, who is portrayed sympathetically, makes similar observations in
Regeneration about the platoon he leads: “He recalled his horror at their physique....
None of the three had been more than five feet tall. You put them alongside an
officer—almost any officer—and they seemed to be almost a different order of being” (R
143). And the sentiment goes both ways. Billy Prior’s working class father thinks Billy
was crazy not to use his asthma as a way out of the war: ‘The weedy little runt would at
least have been behaving like a sensible weedy little runt, refusing to fight in ‘the bosses’
war’” (G 6). Such class antagonism is one of the many ways that Barker dismantles one
of the war’s main binaries; all the conflicting “us’s” complicate the intended simplicity of
the wartime us/them binary.
Barker has still another method for ridiculing the wartime binary, and that is to
foreground an equal—if not greater—number of the paradoxes produced by the war.
Such paradoxes, she thus implies, are the war’s true legacy. Rivers often feels
constricted by the need for everything to remain streamlined and simple during the war.
He “found himself plagued by questions that in Cambridge, in peacetime, he might have
wanted to pursue, but which in wartime, in an overcrowded hospital, were no use to him
139
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. at all” (R 19). He knows that in wartime he has to stick to his own particular assigned
binary of sick/healthy; he has to make soldiers fit to return to the front—which is a
twisted reason for fitness at best As Billy Prior will later point out in The Ghost Road, as
he looks around at his fellow rehabilitated soldiers: “We are Craiglockhart’s success
stories. Look at us. We don’t remember, we don’t feel, we don’t think—at least not
beyond the confines of what’s needed to do the job. By any proper civilized standard
(but what doesthat mean now?) we are objects of horror. But our nerves are completely
steady. And we are still alive” (G 200). Rivers has done his job so that the soldiers can
return to do theirs: but all are aware of the ironies of the situation. Rivers, however,
remains quite conflicted about his job. He wants to make sure that the contradictions of
his position are known by the soldiers he is treating as well—he wants the paradox to be
above-board. After meeting with Sassoon for the first time in Regeneration, Rivers tells
him that he does not think Sassoon is particularly sick, and that he does not even seem to
have a “war neurosis,” the ailment most of Craiglockhart’s patients are suffering from.
Barker writes:
Sassoon digested this. ‘What have I got, then?’ ‘You seem to have a very powerfulanti -war neurosis.’ They looked at each other and laughed. Rivers said, ‘You realize, don’t you, that it’s my duty to...to try to change that? I can’t pretend to be neutral.(R 15)
Sassoon will often be the impetus that causes Rivers’s thinking to switch from the
comfortable binary to the more prickly paradox. Intellectually, Rivers agrees with
Sassoon’s declaration against the war; but this agreement makes his task of “curing”
Sassoon, so that he can go back to the front to be killed, even more difficult Rivers
knows that “as soon as you accepted that the man’s breakdown was a consequence of his
140
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. war experience rather than of his own innate weakness, then inevitably the war became
the issue”(R 115), yet as an army doctor Rivers cannot let the war be "the issue”: he has
to ignore this quandary and just keep in mind the binary of healthy/sick. Rivers has to
keep such dilemmas to himself, and in the meantime say to his patients: "Go on...cry.
It’s all right to grieve. Breakdown’s nothing to be ashamed of—the pressures were
intolerable. But, also, stop crying. Get up on your feet. Walk” (G 96). Elaine Showalter
claims that the real Sassoon’s therapy with Rivers was “a seduction and a negotiation; his
return to France, an acknowledgment of defeat” (187). She sees Sassoon’s anti-war
stance—which Rivers has to convince Sassoon to renounce—as being the sane and
intelligent response to the experience of trench warfare. Barker thus uses Sassoon to
reveal aspects of Rivers’s complicity with empire and those in control of it. Rivers can
see the paradoxes in his work, yet in the time-span of the trilogy, he remains officially
aligned with empire’s stances.
There are other paradoxes connected to the war besides those surrounding illness
and breakdown. Barker writes that “One of the paradoxes of the war—one of the
many—was that the most brutal of conflicts should set up a relationship between officers
and men that was.. .domestic. Caring” (/? 107). The trench aspect of the war was also
paradoxical; the men were said to be mobilized, yet “they’d been mobilized into holes in
the ground so constricted they could hardly move” (R 107). Barker uses the complexities
of these paradoxes to highlight the false simplicities of the war binaries. Wartime
propaganda insisted that people see all conflicts in terms of black and white with no
questions asked, when in reality the war created situations which required even more
penetrable deciphering than usual. Billy Prior, aware as ever, points out another such
141
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. paradox when he ponders over how much he should tell his fiancde about the real
conditions at the Front. He thinks, “Men said they didn’t tell their women about France
because they didn’t want to worry them. But it was more than that. He needed her
ignorance to hide in. Yet, at the same time, he wanted to know and be known as deeply
as possible. And the two desires were irreconcilable” (/? 216). While both Billy and
Rivers are struggling to untangle the paradoxes that have come their way, Barker shows
how some eagerly use the paradoxes to augment the powers that have been given them.
As we have seen, Dr. Yealland is a psychiatrist who is Rivers’s London counterpart.
While Rivers treats his shell-shock patients with analysis of the new, Freudian, variety,
Yealland’s methods are the extreme opposite. He uses a kind of electroshock therapy
treatment that Barker portrays as being torture, pure and simple. In contrast, then, to the
methods that Rivers uses to get mute soldiers to talk, Yealland is shown locking a mute
patient in a room and shocking him for hours until he is forced to speak. As the shocks
continue, Yealland triumphantly proclaims his newly created paradox: “You must speak,
but I shall not listen to anything you have to 231).say."(R To Yealland the situation is
simple: the soldier he is treating is pretending to be mute so that he, a coward, will not
have to return to the front; the coward, then, must be made to cross over to the other side
of the binary and be brave. War begets paradoxes while flying the banner of the binary.
Many of the binaries of war—such as the us/them binary—are also the binaries of
empire, so when Barker has characters question or deviate from the war binary, they
often will apply their disgruntlement to issues of empire as well. Several characters
express an awareness of the inequities of empire: as we have seen, Billy’s father remarks
that there is “time enough to do summat for the Empire when the Empire’s done summat
142
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. for you” (R 56). And when people speak to Billy’s old friend, Hettie Roper, of saving
“gallant little Belgium,” she reminds them what “gallant little Belgium got up to in the
Congo” (£ 85). When her listeners protest, she facetiously says that “I was only doing it
to compare a bad colonial regime with the splendid record of our glorious Empire” (E
85). Barker will frequently have her characters make this connection between war and
empire. It is W. H .R. Rivers, however, who Barker uses most prominently to first make
clear the connections between war and empire, and then to dismantle the tenets on which
they both stand. Throughout the trilogy, Rivers recalls his experiences as an ethnologist
doing the work of empire in colonized Melanesia; he constantly makes comparisons and
draws parallels between this work in Melanesia observing the societies of the people
there, and the work he is doing observing his shell-shocked soldier patients. In
Melanesia, he was an instrument of the imperial panopticon: like a good orientalist, he
observed, he documented, he wrote a book. In the war, as explained previously, his job is
to “heal” the soldiers so that they can return to the front—where they will probably be
killed. In both situations, he is the instrument of empire; thus, when he begins to
deconstruct the idea of the before the war/after the war divide, among others, Rivers can
see that this war is not an aberration, but an extension of the hegemonic order of empire.
In the trilogy, we see Rivers as a physician treating patients with psychological
disorders caused by the war. Rivers very much sees himself, however, as primarily an
ethnologist, claiming that “it was his Melanesia self he preferred” (E 235). His
recollections of his life and work in Melanesia are indeed touched with nostalgia;
however, as John Kirk writes: “Nostalgic memory, however, can be a response to a range
of complex needs and desires, and its articulation can construct a variety of values and
143
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. ideals to contest dominant ideological positions” (606). This is precisely how Barker has
Rivers use his nostalgic memories of Melanesia; he views them in the context of empire
in general, and empire’s Great War in particular. Rivers uses the knowledge he gained
from his privileged experience in Melanesia to break down the theoretical foundations on
which empire rests. Rivers puts his “nostalgic memory” to use by making comparisons
between then and now, making connections such as the following: “The condensation
and displacement one encountered in the dreams of patients here—might not these
mechanisms also be at work in the myth and ritual of primitive people?” (R 186).
Rivers’s habit of continually making comparisons between the customs of the English
and the customs of the Melanesians has the pointed effect of unraveling the us/them
binary. If colonization is the left hand of empire, than the Great War is the right: he is
willing to look on both enterprises as empire’s work. For example, in The Ghost Road,
Rivers has left Craiglockhart Hospital and is working at the aptly named Empire Hospital
in London. His landlady’s son has died in the war, and whenever he passes through her
part of the house he sees, “the portrait of her dead son that hung above the mantelpiece,
with flowers beneath it and candlesticks on either side” (G 116). After noticing this
tribute,
Rivers thought about what he’d just seen: the portrait, the flowers. A shrine. Not fundamentally different from the skull houses of Pa Na Gundu where he’d gone with Njiru. The same hum animpulse at work. Difficult to know what to make of these flashes of cross-cultural recognition. (G 116-7)
This is not a difficulty for the reader, however, for Rivers will persistently recognize the
parallel.
144
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. One of Rivers’s recollections is of a Melanesian ceremony in which he
participated, where the ghost of the recent dead was conjured back and given an
opportunity to “speak” through the conjurer. This particular ghost had asked questions,
and Rivers, looking back in hindsight “reflected that the questions the ghosts had asked
had all been questions the living people wanted answered” (G 211). At this point, Rivers
is once again treating a wounded Sassoon, who is seeing ghosts of his own. Of course,
Rivers makes the connection: “The ghosts were not an attempt at evasion, Rivers
thought, either by Siegfried or by the islanders. Rather, the questions became more
insistent, more powerful, for being projected into the mouths of the dead” (G 212). When
Sassoon bad been troubled by ghosts inRegeneration, Rivers had comforted him by
admitting to his own experience of hearing ghosts in a ceremony on the Solomon Islands
(R 188). When Rivers spends the night in the hospital so that he can be closer to the
ailing Sassoon, “for some reason the situation reminded him of sleeping on board the
deck of a tramp steamer traveling between the islands of Melanesia” (E 234). While
Rivers is visiting an ex-patient who is now living at the English seaside, he goes to a pub
and treats his evening there as ethnology field work. He gets an old man named Clegg to
speak with him about the local folklore, and concludes that “By closing time, he was
convinced Gegg was possibly the most unreliable informant he’d ever had. For sheer
imaginative flights of fancy none of the Melanesians came anywhere near him” (R 174).
In the midst of the war, Rivers begins doing ethnology studies of the imperial “us”.
One of the techniques Barker uses to emphasize this war/empire connection in the
Ghost Road is to alternate passages where Rivers is recollecting his stay in Melanesia
with Billy Prior’s first-person journal account of his return to the front. She does this
145
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. both with form and content For example, often Rivers and Prior will use the same
language to describe their experiences. Rivers looks at a young boy kidnapped by the
headhunters he is living with and studying, and notes that the boy “stood alone at the
center of the throng, his eyes like black bubbles that at any moment might burst” (G 191).
On the next page, Prior echoes Rivers’s language: “Two bubbles break here” (G 192).
Barker will shift from Billy Prior on board a ship on the way to France, writing, “People
playing cards below deck, but there’s quite a heave on the sea, and I’d rather be out here
watching it” (G 112), to Rivers’s recollecting that “On the Southern Cross, on the voyage
to Eddystone, he’d stood on deck, watching the pale green wake furrow the dark sea,
reluctant to exchange the slight breeze for the stuffy heat below deck” (G 118). Likewise,
she will also shift from Rivers’s being in a tent on the beach in Melanesia to Billy’s
similar tent accommodations in France.
The setting is not the only similarity emphasized. Describing how the British
treated the lands and peoples they colonized, Rivers can make it seem more horrible than
the propaganda stories of what the Germans did when they invaded Belgium. Barker also
highlights the irony that surfaces when making a comparison of the colonization of
Melanesia with the Great War. For example, the British have forbidden the headhunters
to hunt heads, so to speak. If they do so anyway, the colonizers react with “a gunboat off
the coast, villages on fire, trees cut down, crops destroyed, pigs killed. Screaming women
and children driven into the bush” (G 185). Rivers’s observation clearly makes this
appear like a great savagery in response to a small savagery. Rivers notes with irony that
the headhunters he lived with were “a people perishing from the absence of war” (G 207).
Then comes another journal entry from Prior, in which we see people perishing from the
146
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. presence of war. The paradox of empire was that it was forcing men not to fight, while
simultaneously forcing other men to do just that
Rivers is critical of empire in its role both at home and abroad. In England he
thinks to himself that,
The sheer extent of the mess seemed to be forcing him into conflict with the authorities over a very wide range of issues.. .medical, military. Whatever. A society that devours its own young deserves no automatic or unquestioning allegiance.(R 249)
And while in Melanesia he notes that “the impact of western culture had been
particularly devastating” (G 118). Rivers’s critique expands to include both genders.
He visits his ailing sister, Kath, and notes how since she was female, “the whole course
of Kath’s life had been constriction into a smaller and smaller space” while his own life
expanded (G 91). In Melanesia, Rivers had witnessed the near-death of a woman,
Emele. Emele’s husband had died, and the custom was that she had to sit wedged in a
stone “tomb” until a head was collected from another island. Only when that head was
obtained as a trophy could she move from her tomb. Since the British colonizers did
not allow heads to be hunted, Rivers worried that Emele would die. Later he dreams of
visiting Emele’s “tomb” and finding Kath there. The observations Rivers has made of
Melanesian society and the restrictions it places on women enable him to view English
society and its restrictions in the same critical manner.
Although Rivers is constantly evaluating and questioning the empire he
participates in, he does experience one realization in particular which seems to be an
epiphany of sorts and is mentioned in each book of the trilogy. This is a recollection of
a moment when he was conversing on the boat to Melanesia with some of the Islanders
by asking them standard ethnological questions, such as “what would you do with it if
147
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. you earned or found a guinea? Would you share it, and if so who would you share it
withV (R 242). After a while, the people he is questioning ask him the questions right
back. They find his own responses so strange that they begin to laugh, and Rivers
experiences this laughter as being extremely freeing. He says that “I felt as if a ton
weight had been lifted.... It was...the Great White God de-throned” and “suddenly I
saw not only that we weren’t the measure of all things, but thatthere was no measure”
(R 242). It is this realization, perhaps, that enables Rivers to be the character who
consistently sees the greater picture, for in The Ghost Road, Barker has Rivers again
reflect upon this incident. He thinks,
No bearded elderly white man looked down on them, endorsing one set of values and condemning the other. And with this realization, the whole frame of social and moral rules that keeps individuals imprisoned—and sane—collapsed, and for a moment he was in the same position as these drifting, dispossessed people. A condition of absolute freefall. (G 119-20)
The British Empire is in many ways built on its having been given moral authority to
colonize et al by such a “bearded elderly white man.” Rivers at this moment realizes that
the emperor is not wearing any clothes, that the emperor indeed could just as easily not be
wearing any clothes as be a “bearded elderly white man,” that Melanesian constructs were
as valid as English, that in both societies—English and Melanesian—“the same human
impulse [was] at work” (G 117). Rivers comments that he and his fellow ethnologist,
Hocart, did not bring weapons to Melanesia, not even a knife or a machete (G 232). Their
weapons, however, were the discourse of empire they were perhaps unwittingly carrying
with them. Hocart and Rivers were collecting knowledge which would be used by the
empire to continually classify the Melanesians as “other,” to strengthen “the idea of
European identity as a superior one in comparison with all the non-European peoples and
148
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. cultures” (Said 7). The stupidities and horrors of World War I enable Rivers to continue
this line of questioning started years ago in Melanesia. War reminds Rivers of all that he
dislikes about empire.
In contrast to Dr. Yealland’s electroshock “therapy” treatment given to his mute
patient, Rivers often practices a form of therapy that has more in common with the
methods of Njiru, a “witch doctor” he followed and observed in Melanesia. Rivers uses
the treatment of empire’s “them” to cure the mental wounds inflicted on empire and war’s
“us”. In fact, Rivers learns a lot from Njiru—who both respects Rivers and rightfully
resents his invasive presence as an observer of his home and customs—and has a bonding
experience with him that is not unlike the bonding that the soldiers are experiencing (in
parallel fashion in The Ghost Road) at the front Njiru takes Rivers to the highest cave on
the island, a place where—according to tradition—spirits reside. Njiru and Rivers walk
farther into the caves than the rest of their party, and in the innermost recesses they end
up unwittingly disturbing a multitude of bats who rise up and fly past them in cloud after
cloud of black whirr. Rivers and Njiru grip hands during the exodus, and once silence
and stillness have returned, Rivers feels “not dazed, dazed was the wrong word. The
opposite of dazed. Almost as if a rind had been pared off naked, unshelled, lying in
contact with the earth” (G 167). He can see clearly in a way that he feels he has not done
before; after this moment he, more than before, can communicate with Njiru as an equal
and not only as colonizer to colonized, us to them. He and Njiru each experience in the
cave “a compression of identity into a single hard unassailable point: the point at which
no further compromise is possible, where nothing remains except pure naked self-
assertion. The right to be and to be as one is” (G 170). This point is Rivers’s war “front”,
149
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. and it confirms his epiphany regarding the absence of the “bearded elderly white man.” It
is the healing moment that will enable him to later heal others. Rivers’s experience as an
ethnologist will facilitate his skill as a psychoanalyst; both abilities make Rivers the right
character for Barker to use to “heal” the traumas of war and empire.
Empire at Home
In The Eye in the Door, the second novel of the trilogy, Billy Prior, on his way
back to active military duty, laughingly proclaims that “‘There’ll always be an England’”
(£ 276). But after reaching the end of this novel, one cannot help remaining unreassured
by Billy’s comment. For in The Eye in the Door, Barker portrays an England which is on
the verge of self-imploding. Barker continues to address the paradoxes of war and how
war is an extension of the tenets of empire, but she also makes sure to devote time to
exploring how the beginnings of the dissolution of the British Empire unfold in England
itself. In The Eye we see how everything is being tuned askew: the citizens become
“them” to the “us” of the state, and are constantly under watch in a panopticon manner,
sexuality is monitored almost as a political act, gender roles fluctuate, the patriarchal line
shows signs of great strain, and all of the state institutions reflect the particular, tense
characteristics of the Great War. So by the time Billy Prior remarks that ‘There’ll always
be an England,” Barker has made this seemingly simple statement complex by hinting at
the differences that a postimperial, post-war England will actually have to process and
incorporate.
150
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. The lower classes in England were often depicted as being as “other” as the
colonized. In Imperial Leather, Anne McClintock notes that “urban explorers” would
write “travel books” about venturing into urban slums. She avers that “Drawing on
popular images of imperial travel, these urban explorers returned from their urban jaunts
with a primitive accumulation of ‘facts’ and ‘statistics’ about the ‘races’ living in their
midst,” and that “the analogy between slum and colony was tirelessly evoked, as was the
presiding figure of imperial discovery” (120). It is not surprising, then, that when the
empire is under siege, it increases its surveillance of the lower classes. Barker’s
character, Billy Prior, is from the working classes, and in The Eye in the Door, he sees
the effect that such increased surveillance has on, for example, Beattie Roper, a woman
who helped raise him. McClintock also explains in her book how the cult of domesticity
is a central component of imperialism. By focusing on domestic upheaval, then, Barker
is thus able to simultaneously suggest the beginnings of empire’s upheaval as well.
As mentioned previously, the minor character, Ruth Head, experiences a feeling
during the air raids that “the...crust of everything is starting to crack” (R 164). The war
is creating chasms that reveal the underbelly of the institutions of empire. It is not so
much that things are changing, as that there is a growing awareness of how things
functioned in the first place, and how this old status quo led naturally to the many
upheavals of the war. Barker demonstrates this by making frequent connections between
the war and the family unit For example, in The Eye, Billy Prior is put on home duty
because of his asthma. He begins to experience moments where he blanks out—only to
return to himself hours later with no knowledge of where he has been or what he has
done. He is still seeing Rivers as a therapist and together they work out that during these
151
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. blanked-out moments, Billy’s “warrior double” takes over—a kind of disassociated state.
While trying to discover the origins for such a Jekyll/Hyde maneuver, Rivers traces this
behavior back to when Prior was a young boy and his father would come home drunk and
abuse his mother. Prior would get out of bed and sit on the top of the stairs, listening
helplessly to the abuse occurring down below. Prior reveals that first he would “‘sit on
the landing, going PIG PIG PIG PIG.’ He made as if to pound his fist” (E 247). Then, he
would stare at the reflection of light on the glass of the barometer hanging on the wall.
He would be hypnotized by this light, and would “go into the shine on the glass” (£ 248),
and become someone else. Rivers connects this to Prior’s reaction in France: “I think
you found out how to put yourself into a kind of trance. A dissociated state. And then in
France, under thatintolerable pressure, you rediscovered it” (E 248). The war in France,
then, works as a kind of extension of the “intolerable” patriarchal tensions that Prior had
to deal with as a young boy. As the officer in charge of gas drills in France, Prior has to
make sure his officers perform the steps correctly. In his journal, he writes regarding
these drills, “You’re settling down for the night.. .and wham! Rattles whirl, masks are
pulled on, arms and fists pumped, and then the muffled hollow shout GAS! GAS! GAS!”
(G 180). From muttering PIG PIG alone to leading the cries of GAS GAS: the situation
is really not that different Billy has to withdraw from both—into this double of
himself—in order to survive.
Having grown up in a working class community in Northern England, Billy will
often see the war in terms of an extension of the experiences he witnessed as a child. He
recalls at one point the beatings that the teachers at his school administered to the often
undeserving kids. He remembers how he thought, “Bastard .. .as Horton’s [the teacher’s]
152
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. arm swung. JYears later, after witnessing the brutalities of trench warfare, he still
thought: Bastard ’ (E 253). Compared to home life then, the war does not necessarily
have the ability to shock. A similar connection occurs in The Ghost Road when Billy is
writing of bow so often soldiers at the front have a peculiar expression on their faces
which he characterizes as a “rabbit-locked-up-with-a-stoat look” (G 173). He continues,
I’ve only ever seen that expression in one other place, and that was the Royces’ house. Family of four boys in the next street to us. Their father used to make them line up every night after he’d had a few pints, and lift their shirt-tails. Then he’d thrash them with a ruler on their bare bums. Every night without fail. One of them asked once, ’What’s it for, Dad?’ And he said, Tt’s for whatever you’ve done that you think you’ve got away with.’ But my God they could fight. (G 173-4)
Once again Barker is having Billy undermine the before/after divide of the war; the war’s
atrocities, although certainly horrible, are not new to the war the disenfranchised or
disempowered have already experienced horrors in everyday ordinary patriarchal life with
the naturalized violence of the family. Billy watched the Royce boys fight at home as he
would later watch soldiers fight at the front: a seamless transition.
While living in London and working at the Ministry of Munitions, Prior does note
that “All winter, it seemed to Prior, an increasingly frenetic quality had been creeping into
London life” (E 6). And after Haig releases his order stating that England will fight to the
death, Billy comments that “Whatever the effect the Order had on the morale of the army,
it had produced panic among civilians” (E 6). What Billy experienced as a poor child in
Northern England is now being felt by all Londoners, rich or poor. The war is evening
the distribution of empire’s more traumatic affects. Empire’s other side is bleeding into
home life, and now all of the institutions of the state seem to have an overt war
connection. When Billy visits a friend in prison he “was puzzled by a sense of familiarity
153
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. that he couldn't place. Then he remembered. It was like the trenches. No Man’s Land
seen through a periscope, an apparently empty landscape which in fact held thousands of
men” (£ 30). As Rivers walks down the corridor of the hospital he thinks how “he never
failed to be depressed by the long narrow passage with its double row of brown doors and
the absence of natural light. ‘Like a trench without the sky’ had been one patient’s
description, and he was afraid it was only too accurate” (1? 17). War comes to London
and likewise, London also comes to the war. Billy sees this as he
walked along the pavements, looking at place-names: Marble Arch, Piccadilly, Charing Cross, Tottenham Court Road. All these places had trenches named after them. And, gradually, as he walked through the streets of the night city, that other city, the unimaginable labyrinth, grew around him, its sandbag walls bleached pale in the light of a flare, until some chance happening, a piece of paper blown across the pavement, a girl’s laugh, brought him back to a knowledge of where he was. (E 192-3)
He could be in either place; the border between home and the front has cracked and the
traffic of imagery now goes both ways: the “home-front” takes on a new meaning. On
another one of Billy’s night walks he has a similar experience. He is walking and then
falls into a deep hole, which he gradually realizes is a play trench: “Boys played here.
Street gangs. They must have been digging for months to get as deep as this. But then
probably the trench was years old, as old as the real trenches, perhaps. He clambered out,
over what he suspected was No Man’s Land, and there, sure enough, were the enemy
lines” (E 117). It has been easy to incorporate the war into childhood, for its framework
is familiar and homey.
To a certain extent the disarray of the war seems to fall along class lines. Having
experienced depravities in his childhood, Billy is often able to take some of the hom>rs of
the war in stride. Another character in the trilogy, the poet Wilfred Owen, is also from
154
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the working classes. Billy and Owen were at Craiglockhart hospital at the same time,
both suffering from shell shock, and are also back at the front together in The Ghost
Road. Billy observes Owen one night and writes, “I always felt, watching Owen at
Craiglockhart, that there was some kind of fantasy going on, that he was having the
public-school education he’d missed”(G 215). For someone with such a background,
there are elements to a wartime hospital that are a relief not only from the war but from
pre-war life as well. In contrast, the patrician Siegfried Sassoon has the opposite
experience at Craiglockhart. Rivers sees this and has the “fear that Craiglockhart had
done to Sassoon what the Somme and Arras had failed to do” (R 221). Approaching the
war with different experiences of the benefits of empire, Owen and Sassoon react in
opposite ways to empire’s upheaval.
With the war signaling the beginning of the dissolution of empire, those in power
begin to get paranoid. As a result of the war “cracking the surface,” suspicion and
surveillance increase: the citizens become “them” to the “us” of the state, and are
constantly under watch. Barker makes this panopticon aspect of empire under duress a
central theme of The Eye in the Door by constantly having her characters watch each
other and be observed by those that work for the state; everyone is a potential spy,
everyone a potential traitor. Nothing goes unseen. This watching begins with the prison
that Billy Prior visits to see Beattie Roper, a woman who acted as his mother many times
in his childhood when his own mother was sick. Beattie Roper is in jail as a protestor of
the war, and Billy visits her both as a friend and as a worker for the Ministry of
Munitions. When he walks into the prison, he sees everything in terms of eyes seeing
himself and others. The windows are “like little piggy eyes” (£ 28), the small-talk he
155
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. makes with the prison warden all concerns who can see whom and when. The prison
itself is a very model for Foucault’s panopticon: “The high walls were ringed with three
tiers of iron landings, studded by iron doors, linked by iron staircases. In the center of the
pit sat a wardress who, simply by looking up, could observe every door” (E 29). When
Billy is ushered into Beattie’s cell, she reveals to him that the worst part of prison is
feeling like she is being watched all the time. She gestures to the door closed behind him
and Billy sees an eye painted on it, with the pupil of the eye the peephole in the door (E
36). Billy cannot ignore the eye:
Facing it was intolerable, because you could never be sure if there were a human eye at the center of the painted eye. Sitting with his back to it was worse, since there’s nothing more alarming than being watched from behind. And when he sat sideways, he had the irritating impression of somebody perpetually trying to attract his attention. (£ 40)
This eye torments Billy for the rest of the book—long after he has left Beattie’s prison
cell. He begins to have nightmares about it which are far worse than the debilitating
nightmares about the front from which he suffered while being treated for shell shock
(E 58-9). Barker uses this notion of surveillance and the panopticon to convey that the
dissolution of empire has as stressful an effect on England’s home shores as it does at
the front in France.
The surveillance of and by the state has increased in general, but inThe Eye in
the Door one thing in particular that Barker portrays as being especially monitored is
the sexuality of its citizens. In a discussion on pacifism, Billy’s childhood friend, Mac,
makes the comment that “In the end moral and political truths have to be proved on the
body, because this mass of nerve and muscle and blood is what we are”{E 112). In The
Eye, Barker is proving “on the body” empire’s increasing paranoia and need for control.
156
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. As empire begins to lose its grip abroad, it tries to gain more control over its own
citizens at home. The us becomes riddled with smaller divisions of us and them. The
shift to focusing on issues of sexuality is foreshadowed inRegeneration at a moment
when Rivers is having a tiresome dinner conversation at his club in London. He is
listening to the elderly Major Huntley rant on and on about the empire and what is
going wrong with it; Huntley is very concerned with matters of class and he says to
Rivers that “it was often the better type of woman who chose to limit the size of her
family, while her feckless sisters bred the Empire to destruction” (211). The elderly
Majors and Captains in The Eye seem to have taken this crazy concern one step further,
they become preoccupied with homosexual citizens who are not “breeding” at all.
Homosexuality, then, is portrayed not only as a “crime,” but as an unpatriotic act. As
Greg Harris comments: “The most public home-front battles were waged against
pacifists and homosexuals, whose actions were correlated by direct charge or innuendo
or both. Homosexuality and pacifism were punishable as crimes against country and
crimes against nature” (302). Sexual preference becomes conflated into an anti-war
stance and “country” becomes identified with nature.
Whereas Regeneration begins with Sassoon’s anti-war declaration, The Eye in
the Door begins with a tryst: Prior does not get lucky with Myra, a new acquaintance,
so he then propositions Charles Manning on a park bench. They return to Manning’s
large, boarded-up townhouse for the first of what will be many such rendezvous
throughout the book. InEye there are more of these moments, and discussion of the
issues surrounding them, than there is of the war. Barker even shows how Sassoon’s
attentions have switched. In Regeneration the conversations between Rivers and
157
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Sassoon were always laden with not-so-subtle allusions to Sassoon’s sexuality. The
allusions remain indirect, because it seems as if Rivers is attracted to Sassoon, yet has
kept his own homosexual tendencies repressed. So Sassoon will say “‘My intimate
details disqualify me from military service’” and Rivers will smile and reply, “’I
know’” (R 70-71) and then later catch himself thinking of Sassoon’s physique
admiringly. Rivers’s main task, however, is to reconcile Sassoon with the necessary
disavowal of his anti-war declaration. In The Eye, Rivers once again becomes
Sassoon’s doctor when Sassoon gets a head wound. Now in this novel Sassoon’s
preoccupation is not so much the pros or cons of the war, but with his own desire to
stop living a double life. He tells Rivers that he wants to go to Sheffield to work in a
factory, “Because it’s close to Edward Carpenter” (£ 259), the author ofThe
Intermediate Sex. Sassoon protests UiWhy not? I did everything anybody wanted me to
do. Everything you wanted me to do. I gave in, I went back. Now why can’t I do
something that’s right for me?”’ (E 259); but Rivers sees this as “yet another hare
brained scheme, because this was another protest, smaller, more private, less hopeful,
than his public declaration had been, but still a protest”(E 260). Yet in the context of
The Eye, such a protest seems necessary; to the reader, if not to Rivers, it is obvious that
Sassoon’s “small protest” is a protest against the constrictions and surveillances with
which the book has been primarily concerned. Sassoon, here, is right on target.
There is another moment in Regeneration where Barker can be seen preparing
for what will be the main theme in The Eye. Rivers and Sassoon are once again having
a therapy discussion, and Rivers explains,
After all, in war, you’ve got this enormous emphasis on love between men—comradeship—and everybody approves. But at the same time
158
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. there’s always this little niggle of anxiety. Is it the right kind of love? Well, one of the ways you make sure it’s the right kind is to make it crystal clear what the penalties for the other are. (R 204)
Rivers then goes on to mention the Pemberton Billing affair—a matter of great
importance in The Eye. For in The Eye, Charles Manning is being stalked by someone
who is aware of the double life that he leads with his wife and kids in the country and his
trysts with men in London. This stalker keeps sending Manning specially printed news
reports of the Pemberton Billing affair, a debacle in which it was said that an MP, Mr.
Billing himself, claimed “to know of the existence of a German Black Book containing
the names of47,000 eminent people whose private lives make their loyalty to their
country suspect”(R 204). Several articles purportedly written by Pemberton Billing
claimed that because of this list, the Germans would be able to control those on it who
were afraid of being exposed. A second article soon followed that, as Pat Barker explains
in an endnote, “suggested that the list of subscribers to a private performance of Oscar
Wilde’s Salome might contain many names of the 47,000. Maud Allan, who was to
dance the part of Salome, sued Pemberton Billing for libel, since the paragraph clearly
implied she was a lesbian” (E 279). At the trial, Pemberton Billing defended himself and
claimed that he did not write the articles nor make the accusations. It was discovered that
the actual writer was the star witness, a Captain Harold Spencer. Spencer, who ranted on
at the trial about “women who had hypertrophied and diseased clitorises and therefore
could be satisfied only by bull elephants”(E 279) was eventually declared insane.
The trial, however, had repercussions for many; Lord Alfred Douglas, of Oscar
Wilde fame, used the trial as an “opportunity of pursuing his personal dispute with Robert
Ross, Oscar Wilde’s devoted friend and literary executor, identifying him as ’the leader of
159
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. all the sodomites in London’” (£ 279-80). Ross died a few months later of a heart attack.
The whole affair was prominently publicized and followed; Barker taps into this event by
having Manning rumored to be one of the 47,000. Manning even attends the showing of
Salome and has an encounter with the crazed Harold Spencer in the men’s room. Spencer
is mumbling about diseased clitorises and bull elephants and says suggestively to
Manning, “‘Didn’t I see you in the box with Robert Ross?”’ (E 81). “Looking him
straight in the eye and loading every word with significance” Manning replies U‘I am
from the Ministry of Munitions’” and walks out trembling (81). But being a part of the
empire power-structure will not necessarily save Manning, since the empire seems to be
crumbling within as well as without. Later in the novel, Manning will frequently see
Spencer across the street or leaning against lamp-posts, always watching. Spencer seems
symbolic of the old empire: he is losing his grip, and so he becomes preoccupied with
what he sees as the “deviations” of his fellow citizens. If war can “be understood as a
gendering activity, one that ritually marks the gender of all members of a society, whether
or not they are combatants” (Higonnet et al 4), then we can see Barker’s use of the
Pemberton Billing affair as a way of showing how homosexuality seemed, to the paranoid
powers that be, to represent a loss of control, since homosexuals could not be so simply
“marked”. The struggle all takes place “on the body” (E112).
Barker also signals that there is discord between those in power in empire’s
hierarchy and those who will eventually inherit this power. There is a breaking down
between fathers and sons and the passing of the baton between the two. W.H.R. Rivers is
the father figure to most characters in the trilogy, and it is a role that troubles him. For it
is Rivers who thinks that “A society that devours its own young deserves no automatic or
160
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. unquestioning allegiance”(R 249), and he believes that that is precisely what the war has
caught English society in the act of doing. At least twice in the trilogy Rivers thinks of
the story of Abraham and Isaac and how it is “The bargain...on which all patriarchal
societies are founded”(R 149). The problem, as Rivers sees it, is that “we’re breaking the
bargain, Rivers thought. All over northern France, at this very moment, in trenches and
dugouts and flooded shell-holes, the inheritors were dying, not one by one, while old
men, and women of all ages, gathered together and sang hymns” (R 149). After here
connecting the Abraham and Isaac story to the war, in The Ghost Road Rivers puts the
Abraham and Isaac story into more of an empire context. He compares it to a custom on
the island of Vao, where an illegitimate child would be raised by an adoptive family and
treated as a son, until one day, unwittingly, he would be sacrificed (G 103). Rivers
reflects that the Abraham story and the Vao story “represented the difference between
savagery and civilization, for in the [Abraham] scenario the voice of God is about to
forbid the sacrifice, and will be heeded” (G 104). But being in the midst of the Great
War, Rivers becomes uncertain about the reality of this difference. In his role as military
doctor, he feels too close to the Abraham whose hand is not staid and who thus carries out
the bloody sacrifice.
In the trilogy many of the men have issues with their fathers. The majority of
soldiers seem to have fathers who, like Burns’s father, are “a great believer in the war” (R
171) and thus cannot understand their sons’ reluctance, shell shock, etc. Rivers himself
often recollects the disagreements he had with his own father, a speech therapist who tried
to help Rivers with his stutter (R 155). Billy Prior—always the exception to every
rule—has a father who thought it was stupid of Billy to go and enlist; again different,
161
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. where all the other patients tend to view Rivers as a father figure or “father confessor” (£
228), Prior sees Rivers as being more like his mother (R 210). But it is also Billy, ever
attuned to the behind the scenes truths, whose subconscious creates a warrior double who,
because of being the Isaac sacrifice in his war experience, claims that “‘I was bora two
years ago. In a shell-hole in France. I have no father’” (£ 240). Just as Rivers feels guilt
over his Abraham role, Billy feels anger over his Isaac role. As Harris writes, “Barker
examines how patriarchal constructions of masculinity colonize men’s subjectivity in
ways that, especially in wartime, prove oppressive, repressive, and wholly brutal in their
effects on the male psyche” (303). Billy resists this colonization.
In contrast to the frequent splitting that occurred between fathers and sons, women
found the war experience to be generally unifying. In fact, Barker often emphasizes how
the genders were affected differently by the war, with frequent reversals in role. She has
Rivers think about how so much of the shell shock his patients suffered from could be
traced back to their immobility in the trenches; he comments that “the Great
Adventure—the real life equivalent of all the adventure stories they’d devoured as
boys—consisted of crouching in a dugout, waiting to be killed. The war that had
promised so much in the way of ‘manly’ activity had actually delivered ‘feminine’
passivity, and on a scale that their mothers and sisters had scarcely known” (R 107-8). It
makes sense, then, that the soldiers’ shell shock was often so similar to female hysteria,
and Rivers makes the point that the two have to be linked: “Any explanation of war
neurosis must account for the fact that this apparently intensely masculine life of war and
danger and hardship produced in men the same disorders that women suffered from in
peace” (R 222).
162
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Whereas, as Claire Tylee writes, “What men and women did share were the
cultural myths and the behavioral inhibitions of their society. They suffered equally from
the repression of their memories of traumatic experiences, and from a common
vulnerability to the myths of imperialism” (187), it is also true that men and women
experienced the war differently. Lizzie, a munitions worker in Regeneration, comments
that when war was declared, as far as she was concerned, “Peace broke out” because her
abusive husband went off to France (110). The division the war created between men and
women is summarized in a conversation Prior has with his friend, Hettie Roper. Hettie
says that her friend pointed out during the excitement of an air-raid that ‘Tor women, this
is the first day in the history of the world,” and Prior replies, “And the last for a lot of
men” (£ 101). Barker, of course, is not the first to make this observation. Many critics
have written about how war was often empowering for women. Sandra Gilbert and Susan
Gubar claim that this is why there was often tension between the men at war and the
women at home: “Ultimately, this barely veiled hostility between the front and the home
front, along with the exuberance of the women workers who had succeeded to (and in)
men’s places, suggested that the most crucial rule the war had overturned was the rule of
patrilineal succession, the founding law of patriarchal society itself’ (279-80). Whereas
not going so far as to say that these rules were “overturned” by the war, Gail Braybon and
Penny Summerfield aver that “Both wars put conventional views about sex roles under
strain. Women were after all working long hours next to men, learning new jobs, and
earning better wages than they had before (1). They also assert that “For many women,
the war offered the chance to escape—from home, or from hated jobs” (58). And, “As
David Mitchell observes, ‘when the time came for demobilization,’ many women ‘wept at
163
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the ending of what they now saw as the happiest and most purposeful days of their lives’”
(Gilbert 204). Anne McClintock contends that “The metaphoric depiction of social
hierarchy as natural and familial—the ‘national family,’ the global ‘family of nations,’ the
colony as a ‘family of black children ruled over by a white father’—depended in this way
on the prior naturalizing of the social subordination of women and children within the
domestic sphere” (358). By showing the women with newfound power, Barker indicates
that the power of the old order is collapsing.
Barker has Billy Prior recognize that things have changed between men and
women. When Prior first meets Sarah Lumb, who will eventually become his fiancde, he
is momentarily confused by her confidence: “He didn’t know what to make of her, but
then he was out of touch with women. They seemed to have changed so much during the
war, to have expanded in all kinds of ways, whereas men over the same period had shrunk
into a smaller and smaller space” (R 90). Rivers will later echo these words when he
thinks of how his sister’s life before the war had been a “constriction into a smaller and
smaller space” while his own life expanded” (G 91). The war has overturned this
discrepancy. When Prior goes on leave back home to the North of England, he notices
how the women have changed there as well. Whereas before the women would spend
their evenings on the front stoops, now “Prior saw deserted doorsteps. Women were out
and about, but walking purposefully, as if they had somewhere to go” (£ 95). Not only
are these women going out, but they are going to what formally had been a man’s bastion:
the pub. Prior sees “two married women going out for a drink together. Unheard of.
And in his father’s pub too”(E 96). The new role women have achieved gains the status
164
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. of myth, too, when a rumor begins circulating that zeppelins were piloted by women (R
222); during wartime, at least, there are no limits to what women can do.
Of course, this fact had many people worried. Billy’s dad is convinced that where
women are concerned “This war’s the Trojan horse, only they’re all too so-and-soing daft
to see it” (E 93); he is convinced that when the war ends, the women will not be returning
to their domestic lives. Billy, too, has moments where he seems to agree with his father,
noting that “nothing puts a woman in her place more effectively than a chivalrous gesture
performed in a certain manner” (£ 27). Sarah Lumb’s mother also resists the new
changes; she thinks that “in her world, men loved women as the fox loves the hare. And
women loved men as the tapeworm loves the gut” (R 195). Barker also makes it clear
that despite some upheaval, the old-boy network was in many ways still going strong.
For example, Billy’s friend Beattie Roper is in jail for being pro-peace. As she says, “T
told the truth in court. The truth, the whole truth and nothing but the truth.’ She laughed.
‘Bloody fatal, that was’” (E 33). For doing so, Beattie is now languishing and sick in a
prison cell; this stands in marked comparison to Regeneration's Sassoon, who had friends
and colleagues in high places bending over backwards to make sure that he did not go to
jail for expressing the same beliefs as Beattie. In Regeneration, too, we witness Sarah’s
friend Lizzie being berated by a doctor for wanting an abortion; it is left up to Beattie in
The Eye in the Door to point out that “You know, killing a baby when its mother’s two
months gone, that’s a terrible crime. But wait twenty years and blow the same kid’s head
off, that’s all right” ( E 102). Changes are occurring—albeit slowly—amongst the genders
in the British Empire’s home base; signs are evident of the dissolution of the old order.
165
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. At the end of The Ghost Road, Barker has Rivers muse, “There was a teal danger,
he thought, that in the end the stories would become one story, the voices blend into a
single cry of pain” (G 229). Rivers, however, will not let this danger come to pass.
When Hallet, the soldier who Billy Prior rescued, dies in Rivers’s hospital ward, he dies
moaning “shotvarfet” which Rivers is able to translate as “It’s not worth it” (G 274). The
other patients join in with the chant, creating a horrible tension and noise: “Rivers was
aware of a pressure building in his own throat as that single cry from the patients went on
and on. He could not afterwards be sure that he had succeeded in keeping silent, or
whether he too had joined in” (G 274-5). Rivers, however does not let this voice remain
the single voice of war. As he slumps exhausted into a chair, he sees a vision of Njiru, his
Melanesian counterpart. Through Njiru, “advancing down the ward of the Empire
Hospital,” Rivers is once again able to indict empire along with war. With Rivers’s help,
Barker will lay the ghosts of empire and war to rest. Njiru chants, “ There is an end o f
men, an end of chiefs, an end o f chieftains' wives, an end o f chiefs children” (G 276):
and so there is also an end of empire.
166
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. CHAPTER IV
“THE GREAT ADVENTURE INTO NOWHERE”: POSTIMPERIAL TRAUMA AND THE NEW PASSAGE EAST IN MARGARET DRABBLE’S THE GATES OF IVORY
“The nation dies, says Mme Akrun. It is sad, but what can one do? One must
learn to begin again” (335). So proclaims a character in The Gases o f Ivory, the third
volume of Margaret Drabble’s trilogy. Mme Akrun makes this statement from a refugee
camp across the border of Kampuchea: almost everyone she knew in her pre-Khmer
Rouge life has been murdered, including her husband; her eldest son disappeared years
ago; a daughter was traumatized into imbecility by her refugee experience; and she has
had to raise her three remaining children in the no-man’s-land of the camps.
Understandably, Mme Akrun wants to move on. For years Mme Akrun tried to find
Mitra, her missing son. She told the story of the night he disappeared to anyone who
would listen, moving one English photo-journalist who heard her appeal to take an
award-winning picture of her that would become the front page of a Kampuchean
Refugee Aid brochure. When the above statement is made, however, Mme Akrun has
accepted the disintegration of her country and the rearrangement of her life. She does not
want to analyze it or even moum it: again, she wants to move on.
Liz Headleand, an Englishwoman in her fifties who has come to the camps on a
search of her own, cannot understand this change in Mme Akrun. Drabble muses:
“Something has snapped in Mme Akrun, or time has healed her. How can Liz know
167
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. which? Is it the same thing? She cannot read this woman” (336). Liz is the main
character of the trilogy, and Mme Akrun’s seeming nonchalance regarding the “death” of
her country is juxtaposed directly against the feelings of Liz—and her two long-time
college friends, Alix and Esther—about England’s twentieth-century diminishmenL In
all three novels, Liz, Alix, and Esther are constantly confronted with the consequences of
England’s imperial decline; in fact, the rise and fall of empire seems something that
cannot be escaped or passed by. Alix melodramatically thinks, “Why must it go on for
ever and ever, death and destruction, tragic empire after tragic empire, Tamburlaine,
Hitler, Stalin, Pol Pot, and the Stars and Stripes planted upon Mars as the imperial
contamination spreads like a cancer through interstellar space?” (438). In Drabble’s
London, the remains of empire are coliseum-sized: Liz, Alix, and Esther have to
incorporate this nostalgia and shame for empire into their eveiyday lives, as well as
figure out how to make some kind of a habitable reconciliation with it.
Margaret Drabblehas figured this out. InThe Radiant Way and A Natural
Curiosity she portrays 1980’s England with all its postimperial pitfalls and quandaries:
her characters question how to come to terms with their—and England’s—new place in
the world order. And in The Gates o f Ivory, her characters begin to answer these
questions, which lead to the questions of this dissertation: If it is generally accepted that
in the age of imperialism novels produced empire, what do they now, in this historical
moment, produce in its stead? What new form of the power/knowledge connection does
“Orientalism,” for instance, serve in the aftermath of empire? How do shame and
nostalgia for empire and the trauma of empire’s dissolution coexist in the postimperial,
postwar novel?
168
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Curiously, Drabble’s critics have tended to miss these issues in her texts. When
any sort of acknowledgment is made that empire is a subject Drabble explores, it is done
so in a rather anachronistic manner. For example, even the blurb on the back ofThe
Gates o f Ivory describes the novel as if it were written sixty or so years ago as a
companion to the novels of Conrad and Forster. Drabble, it claims, is “juxtaposing the
acutely observed London society of her earlier novels with the alien and terror-ridden
landscapes of the East....” This, I claim, is precisely what Drabble does not do: her
trilogy portrays a world where the old East/West dichotomy is no longer the order of
things; she examines the effect that the dissolution of empire has had on everyday life in
England, and establishes how literature plays a central role in both bandaging and
assuaging this trauma.
The connection between empire and the novel has been firmly established. For
instance, the significance of empire to the eighteenth and nineteenth-century novel has
been thoroughly researched and analyzed, with studies such as Edward Said’s
Orientalism and Culture and Imperialism leading the way; Said’s reading of Jane
Austen’sMansfield Park, for example, in which he establishes how Austen
“synchronizes domestic with international authority,” shows how the pervasive, if
understated imperialist references in a nineteenth-century novel are crucial to the creation
and depiction of a seemingly provincial England (87). Similarly, critics such as Simon
Gikandi have shown how the “moment of English modernism, in spite of a certain
canonical insistence on its ahistorical and bermetical character, was generated by a crisis
of belief in the efficacy of colonialism, its culture, and its dominant terms” (161).
Gikandi writes that “modernist narratives are about failure.. .but they also derive their
169
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. authority from the staging of this failure in the colonial space,” thus showing the
codependency that exists between empire and the modernist text The postmodern
narrative was not supposed to share these same concerns. More recently, however, the
“divide” between modernist and postmodern texts has been questioned. In his
introduction toNationalism, Colonialism, and Literature, Seamus Deane writes that to
accept without question “the postmodernist simulacrum of pluralism” is “surely to pass
from one kind of colonizing experience into another” and is itself a kind of “concealed
imperialism” (19); and in her study of the primitive in modernist texts, Marianna
Torgovnick cautions that “We have become accustomed to seeing modernism and
postmodernism as opposed terms marking differences in tone, attitude, and forms of
economic and social life between the first and second halves of the twentieth century.
Yet with regard to views of the primitive, more similarities exist than we are used to
acknowledging” (9). I will argue that the same holds true “with regard to views” of
empire.
The pos/colonial status of such texts as Margaret Drabble’sThe Gates o f Ivory
tends to be given the benefit of the doubt; with such extensive studies written on the
integral role empire has played in literature of previous eras, however, it seems incredible
and improbable that empire—so intertwined with the novel form—could just dissolve
after World War II and immediately be disassociated from literature. Again I will turn to
Simon Gikandi who, in his Maps ofEnglishness, I think best describes how the
contemporary cultural identity crises experienced by the English in the past two decades
can be traced back to thedismantling of the culture of colonialism. InMaps o f
Englishness: Writing Identity in the Culture of Colonialism, Gikandi writes of how in the
170
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 1980’s he began to notice that “the cultural identity crisis” kept surfacing as a theme of
forums and books analyzing the state of the nation; after researching this theme and its
origins, he came to the conclusion that “the crisis of Englishness in the present period is
symptomatic of the incomplete project of colonialism, for it calls attention to the fate of
powerful cultural categories forced—by decolonization and the demise of empire—to
exist outside the historical conditions that made them possible” (9). To prove his point,
he studied and wrote about identity issues in texts from those by Carlyle and Mill to
nineteenth-century travel writing to the specific problems facing modernist writers such
as Greene and Conrad. Using such texts to answer a question about the present day is
logical, claims Gikandi, because “it is still within the incomplete colonial project that the
postcolonial moment must be located and interrogated” (49).
Gikandi continues on to make the point that whereas the crisis of colonialism was
anxiety-producing for modernist writers, this same crisis “presented postcolonial writers
with a productive cultural space” which he terms the “postimperial aporia”—a moment
between the end of colonization and the beginning of an (often equally stifling)
nationalism (194). He uses the writings of Salman Rushdie, Hanif Kureishi, and Joan
Riley to show how this postimperial aporia can be used positively: the migrant’s
potential empowerment by being of several worlds, and being able to draw upon varying
myths of origin, are two such creative moments. It is crucial to note here, however, that
at this point Gikandi is looking to narratives from the “decolonized polis” and by migrant
writers in the “English metropolis” for these productive “new stories of Englishness”
(xiii). He asks and answers the central question, “How do postcolonial writers represent
identity when the empire is dead but the long shadow cast by the culture of colonialism
171
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. continues to haunt them in the name of modernity and the new nation?” (191). I agree
with and admire Gikandi’s thesis and argument; however, I think that by focusing
exclusively on writers like Rushdie, Kureishi and Riley—writers from the former
colonies or diasporic writers—Gikandi perpetuates the notion that England and white
English writers can be disassociated from the postcolonial situation. This leads me to
ask: why is it that postcolonial readings are immediately done of a Rushdie book situated
in London—his London must contain imperial referents—and not of a Drabble book
situated in the same London? What does it mean that Drabble is “allowed” to be past
empire?
Postcolonial readings have of course been done of many twentieth-century British
novels: the amount written about the works of some authors, even, has escalated into a
comfortable industry. Such attention is usually given, however, to authors who write
overtly about empire—like Paul Scott—or authors who have overt connections to
empire—like, as mentioned above, Salman Rushdie. In his book on marxism and the
colonial and postcolonial novel, Colonial Power, Colonial Texts, Keith Booker aptly
writes that the
view of 20th-century history as the story of the decline and fall of the empire often shows up in British literature as a desire to awaken from the nightmare of history. This ambivalence (even horror) toward history can best be seen in a postcolonial work like Paul Scott’sRaj Quartet, which centers on great historical events like World War II and the end of the Raj but ultimately seems to challenge the very notion of historical change (129).
No doubt: but as Said has shown with his reading of Austen’sMansfield Park, and as
critics like Jenny Sharpe have explained with readings of Bronte’s Jane Eyre, the
seemingly insular, “hometurf ’ novels are often revealed to have an empire underbelly.
172
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. As I have discussed in chapter two, the issues and worries of empire are everywhere in an
English text such as Virginia Woolf’s Mrs Dalloway, the same can be said of the novels
of Margaret Drabble.
There seems to be a history of critics classifying Drabble’s writing as having
different aims from those of her postcolonial and postmodern peers. For example, in a
book that aims to define and study the postmodern novel, Patricia Waugh argues that
Drabble eschewed most stereotypical postmodern novel characteristics and instead
returned “to the traditional preoccupations of the psychological and domestic novel, but
self-consciously from the perspective of writing as a woman” (24). Perhaps Drabble
would agree with this, but in a speech she gave to the American Academy of Arts and
Letters in May of 1997, she interestingly classified her writing and its goals as being
similar to that of Salman Rushdie. Complaining first about the new abundance of
nostalgic, historical novels, she queried, “But who, one begins to wonder, is tackling the
present? Have we abandoned it, despaired of it?” (Threepenny 23). She went on to
champion Rushdie, claiming that “Rushdie grapples both with the historical and the
contemporary.... He confronts the contemporary world and the urban world with a
courage and an invention that outrun those who pursue him. So it can be done” (23).
Drabble then briefly outlined the novel she was working on(The Peppered Moth), with
its plot overtly Rushdiesque in scope. I believe that Drabble’s most recent novels—the
trilogy in particular—already share many components of a Rushdie novel: they too are
“historical and contemporary” and deal with the empire as it is now—defunct—and not
as it was in its “glory days”. So when Drabble concluded that “The past can move us into
the future, in a way that has nothing to do with nostalgic retreat into the pastoral” (23), I
173
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. claim that in her novels Drabble has already used the past in such a way. Let me explain
how.
Such an explanation must begin with a certain trope that appears continually in
English cultural commentary from the 1980’s on: a trope of malaise, ennui, and general
illness. I have already catalogued these references in the introduction, but they bear
repeating. Writing about the return of the British Raj in the Thatcherite 1980’s, Salman
Rushdie, in his essay “Outside the Whale,” declares that “the refurbishment of the
Empire’s tarnished image is under way,” that many British “turn their eyes nostalgically
to the lost hour of their precedence” and that “Britain is in danger of entering a condition
of cultural psychosis, in which it begins once again to strut and to posture like a great
power while, in fact, its power diminishes every year” (my italics) (91-2). In a similar
fashion, this chapter’s favorite critic, Simon Gikandi, asks in his Maps of Englishness:
“And how are we to make use of a past whose practical and theoretical consequences
were often negative and destructive—a past that casts such a long shadow over our
present moment that many of us still reel from its trauma?” (21). Christopher Lane
debates whether or not “Britain’s situation would appear closer to melancholia than
mourning” (232); Benedict Anderson points out that a nation’s narratives are affected by
“all profound changes in consciousness, [which] by their very nature, bring with them
characteristic amnesias” (204); Edward Said asserts that “We must take stock of the
nostalgia for empire” (Culture and Imperialism 12); and Fredric Jameson has claimed
that imperialism appears in Western literature as “formal symptoms” (64). While for
some, the dissolution of the British Empire enabled a creative “postimperial aporia,” for
others empire’s dissolution had the opposite effect. Again, this is not a call to pity for the
174
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. “poor” colonizers; nor is it an attempt to posit the English as victims: however, analyzing
empire’s demise as a trauma, because of the ensuing and parallel demise of the traditional
English cultural identity, goes a long way towards explaining such recurrent references of
malaise and dis-ease.
In her book, Unclaimed Experience, Cathy Caruth examines Freud’s theory of
“traumatic neurosis,” writing that it is “the unwitting reenactment of an event that one
cannot simply leave behind” (2). If, as Gikandi claims, English identity or “Englishness”
“had been produced by a continuous conflict between the center and its Celtic and
colonial peripheries” (xvii) then it can be assumed that the loss of the use of these
peripheries as mirrors which reflected back a certain perception of England and the
English must have profoundly affected the construction of cultural identity. By including
so many references to empire and how England has changed because of empire’s
dissolution in her trilogy, Drabble addresses what these constant illness references are
indicative of: the cultural need to re-live the trauma of the end of empire as a working
out of the question central to a traumatic neurosis—namely, “what does it mean to
survive?” (Caruth 60). InThe Radiant Way, A Natural Curiosity, and especially in The
Gates of Ivory, Drabble addresses just what it means to “survive” empire and its
dissolution, and portrays a new, postimperial, world order.
If the dissolution of the British Empire can be said to be experienced by the
(colonizing) culture at large as a trauma, then to explain why it is logical to search for the
reverberations of this dissolution in novels written fifty to sixty years after the event, I
will turn again to Cathy Caruth and her Unclaimed Experiences. Caruth, referencing
Freud, claims that ‘Traumatic experience, beyond the psychological dimension of
175
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. suffering it involves, suggests a certain paradox: that the most direct seeing of a violent
event may occur as an absolute inability to know it; that immediacy, paradoxically, may
take the form of belatedness” (91-2). In chapter three, I have shown how this concept
intersects with the sudden popularity of World War I novels, films, and histories in
general, and Pat Barker’s World War I trilogy in particular. The same claims can be
made regarding cultural trauma and the “Raj Revival” of the Thatcherite 80’s, as well as
how empire is reflected and used by seemingly “domestic” contemporary novelists like
Margaret Drabble. In her essay, “Narrative Witnessing as Memory Work,” Irene
Kacandes reminds us that “literary texts can be about trauma.... But texts can also
‘perform’ trauma, in the sense that they can ‘fail’ to tell the story, by eliding, repeating,
and fragmenting components of the story” (56). And, I would continue, literary critics
can “perform trauma” by then insisting on interpreting a text in a certain way. It is only
recently that critics have begun to read Drabble’s novels as other than “psychological”
and “domestic”. Roberta Rubenstein has written of how “Margaret Drabble has
noticeably shifted her emphasis from an earlier concentration on the moral and domestic
dilemmas of her female characters to narratives that reflect—and reflect upon—a
problematic, violent, and arbitrary universe” (136); and Pamela Bromberg has pointed
out that “By decentering and fragmenting her characters’ life stories Drabble resists the
ideologies inscribed in what could have been constructed as stories of falling in or out of
love, of marrying and divorcing, or stories of education, growth, and success or failure”
(17). Still, most critics have ignored how much of Drabble’s portrayal of the new
“arbitrary universe” is a specifically postimperial portrayal. Drabble tries not to “fail” to
tell the story of empire’s demise and its effect on English social culture. In the Author’s
176
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Note to the second book of the trilogy, A Natural Curiosity, Drabble explains that it is the
sequel toThe Radiant Way, and at the end of the note states that “At the moment of
writing this, I intend to write a third but very different volume which will follow the
adventures of Stephen Cox in Kampuchea.” I do not think The Gates o f Ivory is as
different from the first two books as Drabble might claim: it just continues overtly about
matters of empire’s demise, with much of its action taking place in the East, whereas the
first two novels are more covertly about empire in that they concentrate on the impact the
end of empire has had and does have on England’s social culture. Ernst Van Alphen
writes that “Memory is not something we have, but something we produce as individuals
sharing a culture. Memory is, then, the mutually constitutive interaction between the
past and present, shared as culture but acted out by each of us as an individual” (37).
Drabble has the individual characters ofThe Gates o f Ivory—together with her narrative
voice of the text itself—react to and confront empire’s decline in ways that serve as a
specific response to how empire has been represented in and produced by novels written
throughout the long history of British imperialism. She confronts the topic on three of
the most firmly entrenched literature/empire fronts: trauma and war, the symbolic and
metaphorical use of women, and the complicit role of literature, itself.
Tranma
“‘Britain is poor country,’she informs him. ‘Post-industrial country. You import from Japan, from Korea, from Thailand. You no more manufacturing. You cooling, we heating. You protectionist now. You senile now. ’” — Miss Pomtip
In The Gates o f Ivory, the characters on occasion will go to have a pint in a pub
called the Spoils of War (30). Even in moments of leisure, it seems, there is to be no
177
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. escape from the hauntings of empire’s ghosts. Drabble continuously returns to what in
the eighties and nineties seems to be always waiting around the comer the realization of
the demise of Britain’s imperial identity and the necessity of forming a new, postimperial
English identity. In Beyond The Pleasure Principle, Freud writes of how a person
suffering from a traumatic neurosis experiences a “compulsion to repeat” and will
continually re-experience the trauma, often in dreams and hallucinations. The traumatic
neurosis forms, in part, as a result of not being prepared for the trauma, and thus not
having built up the requisite anxiety which “protects its subject against fright and so
against fright neuroses” (11). Such explanations can be applied to why in the last two
decades of the twentieth century, empire’s demise has become a troubling substitute for
the use of the 1857 Mutiny at the beginning of the century: where the Mutiny was an
imperialist rallying myth, the demise of empire has become a tolling bell. It is a
culturally traumatic moment that is compulsively returned to in order to build up the
anxiety that will eventually serve as a passage to a state of acceptance and acclimation to
postimperial life. Margaret Drabble addresses this trauma in intricate ways inThe Gates
o f Ivory by having the trauma within the text interact with the trauma o f the text I will
begin with an explication of the trauma within.
The new world order that Drabble portrays in her novel can best be explained
using the terms and framework Aijun Appadurai sets forth in his essay, “Disjuncture and
Difference in the Global Cultural Economy”. Appadurai argues that the “new global
cultural economy has to be seen as a complex, overlapping, disjunctive order, which
cannot any longer be understood in terms of existing center-periphery models...” (6).
Instead of the old model of nation states with their distinct national cultures, and instead
178
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. of the self/other, us/them dichotomies, he describes a new order made up of a series of
porous and inter-related “-scapes”; then, global interactions “occur in and through the
growing disjunctures between ethnoscapes, technoscapes, finanscapes, mediascapes and
ideoscapes” (11). Appadurai emphasizes that “the global relationship between
ethnoscapes, technoscapes and finanscapes is deeply disjunctive and profoundly
unpredictable” (8); citizens of the twentieth century are going to have to discover new
ways to cope with such disjunctures, and inThe Gates o f Ivory, Drabble frequently has
her characters do just that
Adjusting to and coping with the new disjunctures of the global cultural economy
is something Drabble’s characters are shown doing on both a small and a large scale. For
instance, she often has them notice how their cultural landscape has changed; her
characters are consciously registering such changes. While eating at a restaurant, Liz
Headleand looks out the window and rather drowsily sees “the enshrined Campden Hill
dignitaries to the west, the Bayswater backwaters to the east: the brutal and grand
dwellings of Czech and Soviet and Indian diplomats: the Peking Ducks and Pizza
Parlours of Queensway...” (14). London now does more than allow the other within it;
Drabble portrays it as a place transformed. A new character, Hattie Osborne, who
directly addresses the reader and speaks in the first person, mentions how in the
correspondences of the Cambodia-traveling Stephen Cox, she is referred to by her initials
as “HO”, which is sometimes confusing, since this is also how Stephen refers to Ho Chi
Minh City. The packet from Stephen Cox around which the novel centers is mailed to
Liz with Kampuchean stamps that commemorate the wedding of Charles and Diana—“A
179
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. slightly oriental Prince Charles and Princess Di” (116). Liz and her friends are becoming
inured to such an amalgam of cultures.
However, England’s postimperial status and the new global cultural economy are
topics that Drabble’s characters always return to: the scab will itch. For example, Liz’s
friend, Alix Bowen, who in this book is preoccupied with her husband’s cancer, often
includes issues of empire in her everyday musings. Rubenstein claims that “Through
Alix Bowen, Drabble raises complex questions about competing social and political
forces in contemporary British life and about the inner forces of the individual
personality” (101), yet in The Gates o f Ivory the questions Drabble raises through Alix
often concern empire. In a melancholy moment of reflection on London Bridge, Alix’s
train of thought begins with her husband’s illness and gradually travels to the figurative
“Gates of Empire at Heathrow” (294). She then thinks of the chain of peoples who have
reflectively looked at the Thames, “the No-people, the Celts, the Belgae, the Romans, the
Angles, the Saxons, the Normans, the Huguenots, the Dutch potters, the refugees from
the pogroms of Russia and Poland, the survivors of the Final Solution, the Hungarians,
the Turks, the Indians, the Pakistanis, the West Indians, the Africans, the Cypriots, the
Vietnamese, the Cambodians” (293-4). That there has been a history of a multitude of
peoples in London reassures Alix about the inhabitants of London today; perhaps the
present is not so completely divorced from the past When Drabble changes the scene,
she leaves Alix on this bridge thinking of Rushdie and the Ayatollah’s fatwa—a moment
where postimperial England rightly came to the defense of “the other within.” Alix’s
feelings about contemporary England vacillate, but that a character’s thoughts can elide
smoothly from personal trauma to aspects of England’s postimperial condition reveals an
180
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. uneasiness about the repercussions of this new condition. Drabble uses the personal
trauma—which is easily recognizable as trauma—to register the larger trauma of the
postimperial condition.
Drabble makes it clear that the global cultural economy is, indeed, global.
Traveling in the east, Stephen Cox frequently comments on the international aspect of his
surroundings. Wherever he goes, his fellow travelers are quite a mix; he is often noting
“the motley of hotel guests. Japanese, German, Thai, American, Korean, French,
Swedish” (52). In addition, he experiences many moments of cultural amalgam, such as
when he is traveling in Aran, Thailand, and is invited to join a small village family who
are gathered around their TV watching an old movie about Mary Magdalene (171).
Stephen is not, however, completely at ease with this: with a friend he discusses “the
notion of progress and the cycles of history and its tragic empires rising and falling”
(119); he often muses fondly about the state of buildings and monuments during the
colonial era (226). Stephen is slightly ambivalent as to how postmodern his passage to
the east should actually be: he almost seems to regret that his passage to the East does
not land him in a completely alien and “other” world. Appadurai writes that “It is in this
fertile ground of deterritorialization, in which money, commodities and persons are
involved in ceaselessly chasing each other around the world, that the mediascapes and
ideoscapes of the modem world find their fractured and fragmented counterpart” (12).
Stephen, not that modem, is definitely unsettled by the fluidity of this world. Whereas in
a previous era he would have been able to comfortably ignore and not question what his
English money allows him to be and buy in the East, he now is confronted with the fact
that everything is for sale, and the buying and selling go in both directions: from west to
181
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. east and from east to west In the first hotel Stephen stays at in Bangkok, he reads a
notice stuck in the mirror of his room which “inform[s] him that if he wishes to purchase
any of the room’s fittings, the prices are as indicated.... Each item is priced, even the
grimy and slightly tom shower curtain in the bathroom. Door knob, 150 baht” (44).
Stephen’s surroundings are changing at such a rate that they can even be bought out from
under him.
Although the main characters in the trilogy think of themselves as being
progressive and open-minded, their children, as is often the case, are less bothered by
how things are now. In long conversations with his stepmother, Liz’s stepson Alan will
often try to get Liz to update her views a bit. This is an age-old situation, but what is
perhaps peculiar to these conversations is that so often Alan is trying to help Liz
accommodate England’s postimperial role. During one conversation, Liz asks Alan, a
sociologist and political theorist, “what is the population of the world? JAlan laughs and
tells her she is mad, he is not a calculating machine, why on earth does she think he might
know? And anyway, would she want it in European billions, or American billions?”
(147). Such statistics—such Kipling ways of knowing the world—are passd in Alan’s
opinion, and the answer itself would have a kind of fluidity, depending on which
measurements were used. Alan ends that same conversation with “I sometimes think we
should revise our concepts of national identity, don’t you? Bye bye, ma, thanks for
ringing” (148). Hattie Osborne, who eventually has a relationship with another of Liz’s
stepsons, is also portrayed as flourishing in this new global cultural economy. Whereas
Hattie’s father fought and died in Malaya and “was as racist as they come,” Hattie is
convinced that she has not inherited her father’s opinions and that “the worst I got from
182
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. him was a mild dose of ladylike masochism, a taste for a bit of harmless fladge and
bondage" (308). Hattie’s days are a mishmash of cultural commodities: when she goes
out on dates, she sees foreign movies (259); on the way home from work she gets
Chinese take-out and spills it on her Indian skirt (27); when Liz first asks her if she has
heard from the missing Stephen, Hattie “had a feeling that somebody I knew had bumped
into him within living memory in either Singapore or Bangkok, but I couldn’t for the life
of me remember which or who, or when, or what they’d said” (29). Hattie, a
representative of the next generation, is quite at home in the new world, only six degrees
separated from everyone and everything else.
Despite the nonchalance of the next generation, the main characters of Drabble’s
trilogy are often insecure and feel displaced by the boundary-less contemporary world.
In his discussion of the new global cultural economy, Appadurai often characterizes it as
being “deeply disjunctive and profoundly unpredictable” (8); Liz Headleand and her
friends are confronted with this uncertainty while navigating the unknown contours of a
new national and cultural identity, one that does not have the colonial other as a looking
glass. Drabble beginsThe Gates of Ivory by questioning the old boundaries—both of the
novel itself and of nation. She writes, “This is a novel—if novel it be—about Good Time
and Bad Time” (3). Instead of the “good” countries and “bad” countries of imperial
times, Drabble proposes a more porous dichotomy. She instructs:
Imagine yourself standing by a bridge over a river on the border between Thailand and Cambodia. Behind you, the little town of Aranyaprathet, bristling with aerials and stuffed with Good Time merchandise, connected by road and rail and telephone and post office and gossip and newspapers and banking systems with all the Good Times of the West. Before you, the Bad Time of Cambodia. You can peer into the sunlit darkness if you wish. (3)
183
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. There is an air of sarcasm about this opening paragraph—one half expects to see Glinda
the Good appear to battle it out with Pol Pot Drabble, here, pointedly ridicules the
us/them binary so crucial to empire, by demarcating them so distinctly.
However, she is not willing—or perhaps not able—to relinquish the binary
completely; instead, the old East/West binary appears in The Gates o f Ivory in a more
malleable, less identifiable, and thus a more threatening form. Her conclusion of the first
section of the book introduces the complications of this new binary-Iite, which I will also
quote at length:
The dead and dying travel fast these days. We can devour thousands at breakfast with our toast and coffee, and thousands more on the evening news. It would be easy to say that we grow fat and greedy, that we thrive on atrocities, that we eagerly consume suffering. It is not as simple as that. We need them as they need us. There is a relationship between Good Time and Bad Time. There are interpenetrations. Some cross the bridge into the Bad Time, into the Underworld, and return to tell the tale. Some go deliberately. Some step into Bad Time suddenly. It may be waiting, there, in the next room. (4)
Drabble signals that the way in which England used to be able to be culturally insular and
cordoned off has now been replaced with an almost “wrinkle in time” quality: blink once
and you will end up a them. Whereas the old binaries, in the service of imperialism,
worked for consumerism, but for consumerism dressed up in the clothes of empire and its
supposed moral and civilization benefits, the new binary-lite is stripped clean of all of
that and is thus left with just the bald materialism of the consumer showing. There also
exists in this passage the sinister insinuation that there is a visceral need for those in
Good Time to vicariously consume the suffering of those in Bad Time. Interestingly,
Appadurai uses a similar “cannibalism” metaphor to describe the erasure of binaries in
the new world order he writes that “the central feature of global culture today is the
184
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. politics of the mutual effort of sameness and difference to cannibalize one another and
thus to proclaim their successful hijacking of the twin Enlightenment ideas of the
triumphantly universal and the resiliently particular” (17). Drabble revises her image of
the binaries—by first stating that Good Time consumes Bad Time and then changing that
to a more “mutual” interpenetration—in such a way that coincides exactly with
Appadurai’s elaboration of the global cultural economy. Her revision itself performs the
hesitation over adapting to a new national and cultural identity which many of her
characters will share.
In marked contrast to Clarissa Dalloway’s London of Sirs and Ladies, Liz
Headleand’s upper middle-class London is a whole new world. This can be seen in
particular in a section towards the beginning of the novel. At this point, Liz has already
received the mysterious packet from Stephen Cox that will soon cause her to set out on
her own passage to the east to discover Stephen’s fate. In the meantime, she agrees to go
to a dinner with her ex-husband—a man who is very much a contemporary version of
Richard Dalloway—and this dinner serves as a microcosm of the novel in that it
spotlights characters whose varying viewpoints are representative of the dynamics of
postimperial England. To begin with, no one quite understands just exactly what or
whom the dinner is for—they are just “sure” that the cause is a good one. The speaker at
the dinner is the King of Bandipura, and his speech an amalgam of chic, international
issues: “He speaks eloquently and in excellent English of his country’s great
architectural heritage. He speaks about international tourism and the protection of the
environment and the forests. He alludes to the Olympic Games which will shortly take
place in Korea and delicately regrets the closed frontiers of North Korea, Burma,
185
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Kampuchea and Vietnam” (67), etc. After the speech, Liz finds her seat at a table with
her old friend, Esther. Her dinner companions are all representatives of different
stereotypical specimens. There is Sir Robert Oxenholme, Esther’s beau, who is an old-
fashioned Orientalist. He collects eastern art, has several degrees, and has had a
privileged Orientalist past He thinks of his revelry at Angkor Wat with Prince Sihanouk
when they both were young men (70), and he wonders if he should tempt Esther to accept
his marriage proposal with “a honeymoon in Egypt, with pyramids and with Petra and
Palmyra and the pleasures of ruins?” (68). He cultivates bonsai trees and is smart—and
contemporary—enough to realize all that he does not know and to be self-deprecating
about this: “I am a small person in a small country, thinks Robert Oxenholme” and
Drabble ironically defends him in a parenthetical aside with statistics—like those used by
Orientalists of yore— that miss the point: “(He is in fact over a foot taller than Sihanouk,
and a not unprominent figure in a country with a population more than ten times that of
Cambodia, give or take a million or two dead)” (73).
Sitting next to Robert is an old-school colonialist, who exclaims, “What a
wonderful country! What a tragedy! Such a peaceful country Cambodia had been then,
such a quiet, sweet, gentle, good-natured people! Nothing was too much trouble for
them! Such simple people, but so kind!” (69). There is a French woman at the table who
is forced by this man’s reminiscences to deplore the “legacy of colonialism and the
brutalization of native populations” (69). There is an Indonesian Cultural attachd and an
Indian shipping magnate who, a world traveler, gives travel tips to the others at the table,
letting them know of small paradises “not yet upon the tourist itinerary of the world”
(70). Despite the celebratory nature of the occasion, however, the overarching mood of
186
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. most of the participants at this dinner is one of troubled annoyance. Everyone’s views
seem to be at odds with their neighbor’s:
The Brazilian-bom wife of an American conglomerate thinks she will die of boredom if her neighbour does not stop talking about the ecosystem. A Scottish laird informs a pretty Dutch archaeologist that his son is dying of drug abuse in a hospice. A New Zealand animal rights activist harangues a Korean airline operator about the eating of cats and dogs. (75)
In addition, immediately after this passage, Drabble breaks down the text into one of her
lists of world facts and possibilities—an example, as I will explore later, of how the text
itself enacts the effects of traumatic neuroses. The “global cultural processes,” as termed
by Appadurai, may be fashionable, but they are definitely anxiety-producing.
The significance of such anxiety is made more explicit by the conclusion of this
party scene, when everyone returns home to fall asleep satiated, yet dreaming
international dreams of trauma. Drabble makes a direct link from the new global cultural
economy as portrayed in the party interactions to these anxiety dreams by having the
dreams of the party-goers contain fragments of the topics discussed at the party. Karen
Knutsen claims that “Dreams are also illusive, and in keeping with Freudian discourse,
Drabble uses series of dream descriptions to show us how the characters’ daytime
preoccupations invade their nightly dreams” (586). What is revealing here, however, is
that the preoccupations that make it into the characters’ dreams usually have something
to do with empire and trauma. The dreams are thus not only “in keeping with Freudian
discourse” but in keeping with Freudian notions of traumatic neurosis. The dreams
reveal a cultural anxiety caused by the disjunctures and fractures of postimperial English
life. Freud writes that “dreams occurring in traumatic neuroses have the characteristic of
repeatedly bringing the patient back into the situation of his accident, a situation from
187
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. which he wakes up in another fright” (11). The dreams of the party-goers fit this bill.
For example, Liz Headleand
dreams of temples and monkeys and tigers, of chattering and screeching, of jungles and ruins and an ambush on an ill-made road. Esther dreams she is drowning in the Seine in a large limousine. Robert dreams that he is traveling through India in an old fashioned wagon-lit with his first wife Lydia and her second husband Dick Wittering, eating chicken sandwiches. Charles Headleand dreams that a large blue life-size Chinese ceramic horse is standing in his office.... (77-8)
There is something amiss in all of these dreams, and in each case the problem is
connected to another country. Freud continues on to explain the odd phenomenon of
dreams repeating the trauma or aspects of the trauma: ‘These dreams are endeavouring
to master the stimulus retrospectively, by developing the anxiety whose omission was the
cause of the traumatic neurosis” (36-7). To have anxiety about a trauma before it
happens, is a way of preventing traumatic neurosis from forming. After the onset of
traumatic neurosis—or in this case a kind of cultural traumatic neurosis—anxiety dreams
work as a post facto “preparation,” that not so much soothe or assuage but act as
symptoms which reveal the troubled state.
Such dreams inThe Gates o f Ivory function as evidence of a cultural traumatic
neurosis in an additional way as well. The dreams are often linked to—or lead to—war,
which is the other main way that trauma appears within this text To build up the anxiety
to get over the cultural traumatic neuroses brought on by empire’s demise, Drabble
focuses on war in Cambodia. Immediately after relating the dreams of the party-goers, as
quoted above, Drabble writes that “The dreams of the world suffuse and intermingle
through a thin membrane” (78). She goes on to write of the dreams of Khieu Ponnary
and her husband, Pol Pot She then continues: “all over Kampuchea the bereaved and
188
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the survivors (and all who survive are bereaved, all) dream of the thud and the skull, the
blood and the brains, the corpses by the wayside, the vultures and the crows” (78).
Whereas in this scene Drabble connects the dreamers in England to the dreamers in
Kampuchea, most of the dreams that we the readers are privy to are the dreams of Liz
Headleand, Stephen Cox, and Pol Pot These dreams, too, are not just random
productions of the subconscious; instead, they are connected to history and to the traumas
of twentieth-century history, in particular. They both extend this history and are
themselves extensions of it For example, while the Kampuchean survivors are dreaming
of “spade on skull,” Drabble has Pol Pot, perhaps not surprisingly, dream of his Swiss
bank account (78). But when Liz reads about Kampuchean refugees, she thinks of how
they were all escaping “the dreams of Pol Pot” (24), and because dreams are used so
frequently and strategically in the text dreams, here, become more than just a synonym
for Pol Pot’s ambitions. When Stephen dreams in Cambodia, his “[djreams of the tourist
mausoleums of Auschwitz and Jerusalem, of fllm-footage from the liberation of the death
camps, of the unfilmed atrocities of Tamburlaine, mingle with Cambodian images...”
(226). And, “in the morning, he is purged. He has made a small recovery. He is well
enough to venture out to verify some of his dream images” (226). The dreams of night
play an active role in the adventures of day. When Liz is sick in Cambodia, upon falling
asleep she “enters the Bad Time of Dream Time” (408). Dreaming is directly connected
to the easy permeability that now exists between nations. She dreams of the “Belgian
Congo” and of “trenches and minefields and piles of skulls”; her dreams are “tableaux
vivants of death from the dark places of history” (408-9).
189
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. It is not insignificant that the English characters here who are dreaming so often
of the trauma of war have never experienced it Drabble makes it quite clear that when it
comes to war, both Stephen and Liz are natfs. She writes that “Stephen has never seen a
war, never heard a shell explode” (46), and that Liz “did not even know what a shell was.
She would not know one if she saw one. She would not know one if one hit her on the
head” (345). By focusing on the Cambodian war which they have not experienced, the
characters make it an extension of twentieth-century traumas in general, and use it to
build up the anxiety needed to assuage their own cultural traumatic neuroses regarding
the end of the British empire—and try to do so indirectly, without having to delve into
the particulars of their empire’s decline. In Unclaimed Experience, Cathy Caruth argues
that “trauma is not locatable in the simple violent or original event in an individual’s past,
but rather in the way that its very unassimilated nature— the way it was preciselynot
known in the first instance—returns to haunt the survivor later on” (4). It is thus logical
that the demise of the British Empire in the first half of the twentieth century is
appearing, only now, in the literature of the second half of the twentieth century.
Drabble’s characters travel to Cambodia because there the scars of war are overt, in
contrast to the disjunctures of postimperial England. However, Drabble’s characters also
travel to Cambodia because there they can work out their traumas relatively guilt-free:
that is, Cambodia, not being an ex-colony of the British Empire, is not England’s “fault”.
Indeed, choosing Cambodia might be a sign of Drabble’s own unease over the
dissolution of empire. For in the frequent moments when thetraum asof the twentieth
century are listed or referred to, England’s complicity is often strangely absent and
unnoticed. InThe Gates o f Ivory, Pol Pot is often seen as an extension of Hitler for
190
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. example, his psychological and biographical background is compared to Hitler’s (12),
and in a list of questions about twentieth-century catastrophes, questions about Pol Pot’s
deeds follow questions about Hitler’s (174). Yet when Pol Pot is compared to an English
figure, instead of being compared to, say, General Dyer, the British general who ordered
the Amritsar Massacre, he is compared to the fictional character Paul Whitmore—a
psychokiller who is featured in the first two books of the trilogy, and is just a small—and
apolitical—crazy. Furthermore, when the atrocities of empire are mentioned, it is usually
the Belgian Congo horrors that are elaborated upon—and often in great detail (140).
During the memorial service for Stephen, Liz’s friend Alix thinks: “Why must it go on
for ever and ever, death and destruction, tragic empire after tragic empire, Tamburlaine,
Hitler, Stalin, Pol Pot, and the Stars and Stripes planted upon Mars as the imperial
contamination spreads like a cancer through interstellar space?” (438). Incredibly, Alix
proceeds from Mongolia to Germany to Russia to Cambodia to America—without once
including the British Empire in this list! I believe it is a significant absence.
Drabble portrays the English as needing to vicariously experience trauma, of
“devour[ing] thousands at breakfast with our toast and coffee, and thousands more on the
evening news” (4). The way that trauma has become the main focus of the media and is
processed as a media event is related to the cultural traumatic neurosis caused by the
dissolution of empire: working through someone else’s pain and suffering is, perhaps, a
safer—albeit less successful—way of working through one’s own pain and suffering.
Caruth writes that “Through the notion of trauma...we can understand that a rethinking
of reference is aimed not at eliminating history but at resituating it in our understanding,
that is, at precisely permitting history to arise where immediate understanding may not”
191
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. (11). Drabble has her characters use Cambodia in precisely this way; they “resituate”
their own feelings of loss into the chaos of Cambodia.
A primary example of such a resituation can be seen in how all the characters
relate to Mme Akrun, a Cambodian refugee who has lost her husband and son and is
forced to live a wretched life in the camps on the border. First, Konstantin—a character
from an earlier novel of Drabble’s and in this novel quite a “Kim” figure—takes a picture
of Mme Akrun asking for help finding her missing son, Mitra, which becomes an award-
winning photo and the cover of an aid-requesting pamphlet. Mme Akrun does her best to
survive in the camps and to move on and away from her tragedies. Drabble writes, “She
is blessed in the freedom of her mind and the rich store of her memory. But she has to
take care. Some roads are dangerous. Some memories can kill. Some memories are
mined” (131). Stephen and Liz both meet Mme Akrun at different times, and both are
rather careless and callous when it comes to Mme Akrun’s landmine-like memories.
When Stephen meets her, Mme Akrun tells him about her son and how she lost him, and
asks him for help. But “Stephen is not interested in the story of her son. He wants her to
tell him about her own survival, her escape across the border. He wants her to flesh out
the dry bones” (152). When Liz meets Mme Akrun, she too is strangely disappointed,
and thinks that “she looks less sad. Liz had half expected her to recite her sad story, but
she does not Time has moved on, even here. She has other things on her mind” (334).
And later, ‘There is a resignation in Mme Akrun, a stoicism. Liz recognizes them. But
there is something missing, something she does not find. Where is the obsessive,
grieving mother, whose image she had constructed from the photograph...?” (335). Liz
and Stephen both want—and need—to be witnesses to the testimony of Mme Akrun. In
192
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Testimony, Shoshana Felman writes that “The testimony will thereby be understood, in
other words, not as a mode of statement of, but rather as a mode ofaccess to, that truth”
(16). Getting access to Mme Akrun’s “truth” will enable them to be prepared for the
truth of their own cultural trauma. “The testimony to the trauma thus includes its hearer,
who is, so to speak, the blank screen on which the event comes to be inscribed for the
first time” (Laub 57); thus, hearing Mme Akrun’s story will make Liz and Stephen
participants in it, in such a way that they can use.
Hearing and sharing stories of trauma is an exchange that occurs frequently in The
Gates of Ivory, right from the very beginning of the novel when Liz receives the package
from Stephen Cox, which contains, among other scraps and fragments, a finger bone. In
describing the bone to Alix, they begin to discuss other gruesome rumors (again,
tellingly, these rumors all involve other countries and nationalities): ‘They discussed
jokes about finger bones found in soup in Chinese restaurants, about greyhounds
discovered in the deep freezes of curry takeaways. And were there not stories, Alix
wondered, about American soldiers in the Vietnam War collecting bags full of Viet Cong
ears and sending samples back to their appalled girlfriends?” (10). Liz protests that these
are just “atrocity stories,” but as the novel progresses we see how many of the
characters—including Liz—keep returning to such atrocity stories. Felman writes that,
To seek reality through language ‘with one’s very being,’ to seek in language what the language had precisely to pass through, is thus to make of one’s own ‘shelteiiessness’...an unexpected and unprecedented means of accessing reality, the radical condition for a wrenching exploration of the testimonial function, and the testimonial power, of the language.... (23-9)
Liz and others “access” the reality of their own postimperial situation through the telling
and hearing of these atrocity stories.
193
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. In fact, one of Pol Pot’s main functions in the novel is always as a factor in a
story. Stephen Cox uses Pol Pot in perhaps the traditional Orientalist way: he travels to
the East for artistic inspiration, and he is going to use the story of Pol Pot as a take-off
point Stephen explains the intent of his trip to Cambodia as being “to see if he could
find out what had happened to the dreams of Pol Pot. Out of curiosity. To write a play,
about the Rise and Fall” (14). The “Rise and Fall” of Pol Pot is, perhaps, a safe substitute
for the rise and fall of the British Empire. When Liz had asked Stephen why Pol Pot,
Stephen explained that “He had a great project, you know.... He was going to take
Cambodia out of history, and make it self-sufficient. He was going to begin again” (13).
Stephen admires the supposed impetus of Pol Pot: the desire to have control over the
story of his country. Stephen first, and then Liz, view Pol Pot in terms of literature. Pol
Pot is referred to as “the principal protagonist.. .of the Cambodia tragedy” and is then
frequently compared to Western literary figures. He is Macbeth (50), he is Heathcliff
(365), and perhaps he could be played by Marlon Brando in a movie version of his life
(248). Pol Pot is, here, “a crisis of history, a crisis which in turn is translated into acrisis
o f literature insofar as literature becomes a witness, and perhaps the only witness, to the
crisis within history which precisely cannot be articulated...” (Felman and Laub xviii).
Stephen Cox sets out to learn and witness the traumas of post-Pol Pot Cambodia; in doing
so, he expects to resolve some of the disjunctures caused by thepost- of his own nation:
its late twentieth-century postimperial situation. Pol Pot and his Cambodian war—a war
stripped of heroics and creating just victims and refugees—is one of the central ways
through which Drabble addresses the cultural trauma of the dissolution of empire.
194
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. In conjunction with the trauma that appearsin the text—the disjunctures of the
new global cultural economy and the war in Cambodia—there also exists the traumao f
the text, trauma which is both internal and external. For just as Fredric Jameson claims
that “the structure of imperialism also makes its mark on the inner forms and structures of
that new mutation in literary and artistic language to which the term modernism is loosely
applied'’ (44), so too can the dissolution of imperialism be seen to make its marie on
postmodern texts. Appadurai warns that we need to “begin to think of the configuration
of cultural forms in today’s world as fundamentally fractal, that is, as possessing no
Euclidean boundaries, structures, or regularities” (20); such fractal forms are represented
in Drabble’s novel by various breaks in the narrative itself. “A fragmented, self-aware
society may require disrupted, self-reflexive narrative forms to represent it,” and Drabble
has devised such a form (Bromberg 6). All three novels of the trilogy contain metaleptic
moments, as well as moments where the narrative breaks down into lists of statistics and
facts. However, as anxiety over the results of empire’s demise builds, these breaks
evolve in such a way that corresponds with the arc of the trilogy itself.
In the first novel, The Radiant Way, Drabble makes it clear that Liz, Alix, and
Esther’s London is a postimperial place. When the novel begins, Liz is hosting a 1979/80
New Year’s Eve party. While looking around at her guests, she makes seemingly
insignificant observations such as the following: “None of us, thought Liz, is wearing a
dress made in England. Moroccan, Chinese, Indian. I wonder what that means...’’ (22).
Such musings prove to be only the tip of the iceberg. After several chapters of this rather
grand party with its wealthy and educated revelers, Drabble moves on to other parties in
other, less affluent, parts of the nation, with asides such as, “Meanwhile, up in Northam,
195
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. that figurative northern city, the New Year had also advanced, ignored by some,
welcomed by others, bringing surprises to some, and a deadly, continuing tedium to
others. The Other Nation, less than two hundred miles away, celebrated in its own style”
(44). England is a divided nation—and the political turmoil of the early eighties is
frequently interspersed (and less frequently intersects) with the lives of the main
characters.
This pattern is oft repeated. Drabble will write—
On a more public level 1980 continues. The steel strike continues, a bitter prelude to the miners’ strike that will follow. Class rhetoric flourishes. Long-cherished notions of progress are inspected, exposed, left out to die in the cold. Survival of the fittest seems to be the new-old doctrine (163)-
and then have a character, Liz’s former husband, Charles, be worried about this in bed at
night, while waking up the next morning oblivious and happily off to his powerful job.
Alix’s husband, Brian, who teaches at an Adult Education Center, is in danger of having
the funding for his class cut (176). Middle class English life is described as “the heart of
nothingness” (189). One long section begins, “These were the years of inner city riots, of
race riots in Brixton and Toxteth, of rising unemployment and riotless gloom: these were
the years of a small war in the Falklands (rather a lot of people dead), and of the
Falklands Factor in politics” and continues on to mention the AIDS crisis, the
proliferation of McDonald’s and the fast food ethos, and the numbing effect of television
(215). Although Drabble’s characters are not immune to these events (and Alix in
particular is often directly affected by them), towards the end of the novel she does not
always bother to connect one of these current events riffs to what has been happening to a
character or to what a character has been thinking. Instead, she interrupts a section with
196
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. crises in list form, such as: “fThe miners pawned their wedding rings and their silver
photo frames. JThe miners ate well in soup kitchens, on food parcels from rich Marxists
in the Home counties. JThe babies of miners suffered acute malnutrition” (325). The
troubling state of the nation overwhelms the narrative, thus interrupting with a barrage of
statistics. As Rubenstein writes, “By means of such catalogues or litanies that express
but refuse to mediate the tension between hope and sorrow, possibility and misfortune,
the knowable and the unknowable, Drabble expresses the shattering of human lives
through war and through individual or collective atrocity” (148-9). With these lists, her
text performs this cultural fragmentation.
A Natural Curiosity also has these list moments, although they appear less
frequently—and perhaps self-consciously so, for in an aside Drabble claims that Alix “is
not here provoked into much political thought about the nature of the north and How
Britain Votes, and you may be spared her occasional reflections on these themes, for this
is not a political novel” (193). The lists that do appear, however, foreshadow how
Drabble will use lists Thein Gates of Ivory. They are lists of atrocity stories all reported
on the evening news (207), as well as lists in which Drabble presents possible actions for
her characters to take, and facts about characters that Drabble could concentrate on but
will not. When Drabble presents lists of the possible actions of Pol Pot in The Gates of
Ivory, her apolitical claims become naught
The fractures inThe Gates o f Ivory appear in three different varieties: lists of
statistics, lists of possibilities, and fragments of Stephen’s writing that are sent
posthumously to Liz. The majority of the lists of statistics have to do with Cambodia; in
this way they are rather Orientalist in nature, and Stephen and Liz use them to try to know
197
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the country. The statistical lists, however, are overtaken in number by the possibility
lists. Caruth claims that “it is at the specific point at which knowing and not knowing
intersect that the language of literature and the psychoanalytic theory of traumatic
experience precisely meet” (3); it is in these moments, when the text breaks down into
possible outcomes that are not known and only proposed and speculated, that trauma is
performed via the format Drabble proposes possibilities for Pol Pot—“Pol Pot lurks in
his tent in the Cardamom mountains. JPol Pot lies ill of cancer in a Chinese hospital.
JfPol Pot waits like a fat tiger in a suite in the Erewan Hotel in Bangkok” (75);
possibilities for Pol Pot’s cohorts—‘Ta Mok has lost a leg. JSon Sen is in charge of the
armed resistance. JSihanouk plans the menu for the dinner in Jakarta” (130); possibilities
for Mme Akrun’s missing son, Mitra—“Mitra works as interpreter and resettlement
officer in a refugee hostel in the Yorkshire Dales. JMitra is dead and has been dead for
ten years” (160); and possibilities for Konstantin, yet it is only Konstantin’s situation that
is ever resolved—and this is perhaps because, as Drabble herself points out in a dear
reader moment, Konstantin and his mother “belong to a different world and a different
density. They have wandered into this story from the old-fashioned, Freudian,
psychological novel, and.... There is not time for them here” (461). In “old-fashioned”
novels, resolution is possible; in postimperial novels, anxiety does not allow for such
tidy, pithy, endings.
Still another internal “formal symptom” of the trauma of the changes wrought by
postimperialism can be seen in Drabble’s many dear reader moments. Such metalepses
are, perhaps, the scabs of empire, for as Rubenstein has claimed, “Drabble’s disruptions
of traditional narrative form to expose its fictionality parallel her narrative expression of
198
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. disruptions within the social world that traditional Action represents” (141). Dear reader
moments were a staple of the Victorian novel, disappeared, for the most part, in
modernist texts, and reappeared with a vengeance in postmodern novels. Drabble’s
tendency towards the dear reader moment is yet another characteristic she shares with
‘ Salman Rushdie. Both writers take the dear reader moment beyond its Victorian function
as a wink or an appeal to the reader, and instead use it to draw the reader in and make the
reader complicit, often by making a connection to issues in the reader’s world and to
issues in the author’s world. Sara Suleri is mistaken when she argues that in Rushdie’s
Shame “Its narrative self-consciousness suggests a deep embarrassment at the idea of
political discourse, a nostalgic will to create apolitical pockets in the garments of such
language” (174). On the contrary, I would argue that Rushdie’s dear reader asides are not
moments of evasion, but instead instances where he is making a connection between the
Actional world he is creating and the “real” world inhabited by both himself and the
reader. Also, by bringing autobiographical details into the dear reader moments, Rushdie
performs how the reader, too, should interact with the text. As Robyn Warhol claims
about certain female Victorian writers, in her bookGendered Interventions, “the
engaging narrator’s frequent appeals to the reader’s imagination, her earnest requests to
the reader to draw upon personal memories to All in gaps in the narrative, prompt the
actual reader to participate in creating the Actional world itself, just as he or she should
actively alter the real world after Anishing the reading” (36). This is quite obviously one
of the functions that Drabble’s dear reader moments fulAll. A In Natural Curiosity,
Drabble interrupts her list of the possible facts she could have told us about the character,
Cliff Harper, to say, “If we could grieve for every sorrow and every life, we would never
199
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. stop grieving. We would never be able to get up in the morning, we would never be able
to feed the cat or water the pot plants. The air would be loud with lamentation. It is
better not to know” (243); in doing so, she connects our everyday (and its underlying
traumas) with the small traumas of Cliff’s life that she is not going to relate to us.
Drabble continues on a few pages further by stating that Cliff’s story “could tell you all
these things. But you know them all. You may know more about them than this story is
able to tell” (245). The “speaking subject constantly bears witness to a truth that
nonetheless continues to escape him, a truth that is, essentially, not available to its own
speaker” (Felman 15). As the witnesses, we, perhaps, have access to more. When
Drabble later is writing of Cliff’s wife and Liz’s sister, Shirley, she comments that
“Shirley’s behaviour for the past month has been highly unlikely. It astonished me, it
astonished her, and maybe it astonished you. What do you think will happen to her? Do
you think our end is known in our beginning, that we are pre-determined, that we
endlessly repeat?” (251-2). By reminding us that this text intersects with a small part of
our own experiences, and by inviting us to respond, Drabble is able to emphasize how, as
Shoshana Felman proposes, “literature is the alignment between witnesses” (2). We are
witnesses to the repetitive compulsion of her characters.
So many of the dear reader moments in The Gates o f Ivory have to do with issues
of memory—a working component of traumatic neuroses. Drabble corrects her
characters’ memory—“Memory is treacherous. How could they have discussed Alix’s
murderer and his mother? At that stage he had not been Alix’s murderer at all” (15); she
fills us in on Cambodian facts that Liz does not know (20); and she faults her own
memory along with her characters’—“Her memory of this conversation is vague and
200
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. defective, and so is his, and so is mine, but it had nevertheless taken place, and it lingers
on in both their recollections and in the limbo of my old Amstrad word processor like a
formative shadow" (84). In one significant dear reader moment which lasts for two
pages, Drabble writes of what her novel is and what it is not—and her explanations
remind us thatThe Gates o f Ivory is a story of a cultural trauma. She first explains that
she could have chosen to focus in on characters who could have enabled her to end the
novel happily, with “perhaps, even, a wedding?” (138). She says that with a bit of
somewhat incredulous maneuvering and coincidence, this could be done. But then she
weighs in with, “But such a narrative will not do. The mismatch between narrative and
subject is too great. Why impose the story line of individual fate upon a story which is at
least in part to do with numbers? (138). And, most tellingly, she concludes,
Perhaps, for this subject matter, one should seek the most disjunctive, the most disruptive, the most uneasy and incompetent of forms, a form that offers not a grain of comfort or repose. Too easily we take refuge with the known. Particular anguish, particular pain, is, in its way, comfortable. Unless, of course, it happens to be our own. (138)
Therefore, she shifts to the pain of Cambodia, which, as we have seen, her characters use
to try to assuage their own nation’s unease. Dear reader moments allow for her to remind
us of the trauma within the text, and of it: “The breakage of the verse enacts the breakage
of the world” (Felman 25).
As previously discussed, in praise of Rushdie, Margaret Drabble proclaims that he
“has made a virtue of mutation. His characters and his narratives free themselves from
gravity, they spin in space and time, in a tumbling turbulence, together with the debris of
twentieth-century travel” (23). Drabble’s trilogy, while encompassing worlds, travels in
a more orderly fashion. There is a progression in the three novels that gradually works
201
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. towards an acceptance of the global cultural economy of which England has had to
become a member instead of a ruler. InThe Radiant Way Drabble portrays an England
that is looking inward and forced to deal with its various national problems. She
introduces her three main characters, the former college friends Liz Headleand, Alix
Bowen, and Esther Breuer. Although Alix is on the left politically, Liz has become
financially part of the upper middle class and is shown to be somewhat removed from the
turmoil outlined in Drabble’s lists: “Liz loved the house, she loved the neighbourhood.
It gave her great delight to see her children and Charles’s, here, thus, in the centre. Her
own childhood had been lived on the margins; she had wanted theirs to be calm, to be
spared the indignities of fighting unnecessary territorial and social wars” (17). When
Drabble’s characters think about national social and political issues, they keep their focus
□arrow and avoid consciously acknowledging the greater reasons and concepts involved.
In The Radiant Way, the East is not the direct and/or acknowledged “other”. When they
compare England to another country, they do so to Italy; their literary point of reference,
here, is to A Room With a View rather than A Passage to India. On one of her many
research trips to Italy, Esther thinks, “Ladbroke Grove, the wrong end, is really
remarkably ugly, by any normal urban standards. Somerset is remarkably beautiful.
Bologna also. Beautiful, ugly. Dangerous, safe” (183). And later, when her Italian
companion “asks how things are in England. Esther says, which England?” (184). The
characters in this first novel of the trilogy are troubled by present-day England, but do not
necessarily take the logical next step and examine the greater picture.
Although when any traveling is done in A Natural Curiosity, it is to Italy and
France that the characters escape, national troubles are linked more directly in this novel
202
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. to the fact of England’s decline as an empire. The characters begin to tenuously raise the
issue of empire. When Liz wonders why none of her five children have started a family
or made a permanent home for themselves, she worries, “Something had put them off
family life and babies—her own behaviour, their father’s behaviour, the overcrowding of
Britain, the violence of city life, the nuclear threat, the decline of Empire?” (21). Drabble
as narrator later comments that “It all seems a little unreal, but then, the country at large
seems a little unreal too. It is hard to tell if it is ticking over or not Are we bankrupt or
are we prosperous?” (53). Where London is complained to be “a replica of itself, a
spitting image of itself’ (239), Liz’s sister, Shirley, watches the stream of people on the
streets coming and going and finds horror in their stark reality: “Is this the human race,
or are these shadows, ghosts, lingering afterthoughts? This cannot be what is meant”
(129). Liz’s ex-husband, Charles, marries an aristocrat, Lady Henrietta, who in a
previous novel would have been a heroine; here, her behaviour on a safari in an ex
colony is aptly ridiculed and caricatured. The old way of thinking about empire will
clearly not do. The stage is set for The Gates of Ivory, which as we have seen, has
England’s postimperial condition as its main theme.
All three novels end with Liz, Alix, and Esther traveling together, or making plans
to do so. The progression of the three trips mirrors the progression of the novels
themselves. At the end of The Radiant Way, the three friends travel in England in June
1985 to Esther’s country retreat in Somerset The scene set is stereotypically pastoral:
“The green hill slopes up behind them to the brilliant azure. Large pink lambs, surreal,
tinted from the red earth, stand outlined on the hill against the blue. An extraordinary
primal timeless brightness shimmers in the hot afternoon air” (375). The women chat
203
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. snooze, and picnic. As they walk home at the end of their picturesque day, Drabble
writes that “The sun is dull with a red radiance. It sinks” (376). Perhaps the women are
going to be forced to acknowledge that the sun does now set on the British Empire. But
no! -for Drabble continues, ending the book with: “Esther, Liz, and Alix are silent with
attention. The sun hangs in the sky, burning. The earth deepens to a more profound ted.
The sun bleeds, the earth bleeds. The sun stands still” (376). Empire’s dissolution, in
this novel, is still a fact submerged.
A Natural Curiosity ends with a May 1987 trip to visit Esther, who is now living
in Italy. The women are branching out, although still to known territory. They speak of
England and tell stories about what has happened to them in the past year. Liz protests
that “England’s not a bad country”, and Alix responds: “‘No, England’s not a bad
country. It’s just a mean, cold, ugly, divided, tired, clapped-out post-imperial post
industrial slag-heap covered in polystyrene hamburger cartons. It’s not a bad country at
all. I love it’” (308). All are amazed at how their lives have begun to move outward, and
Esther voices it, saying “Odd, isn’t it, the way new prospects continue to offer
themselves? One turns the corner, one climbs a little hill, and there is a whole new vista.
Or a vista that seems to be new. How can this be?” (306). And Anally, in The Gates o f
Ivory, after Liz has had her passage to the east and returned to tell the tale, the women
decide to go on a walking tour in England—an England which they can now, perhaps,
accept and understand. Drabble writes that “the summer of ‘89 will bring them blue skies
and unclouded sunshine, an unimagined and unchanging radiance. They will be
rewarded, as they walk along the green ceiling of the limestone and by the singing river,
with the glory of Paradise” (460). As they stop to drink at a fountain, they will be
204
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. “watched by a lonely young Oriental furnished with a rucksack and a pair of binoculars”
who is perhaps a “Japanese Bronte scholar or a Korean ornithologist” (460). Drabble
writes that “One might expect it to be Alix who will wish to take pity on his solitude, but
in fact it will be Liz, who, briefly, will meet his eye and smile: for she will still be
subconsciously searching, will indeed forever search, for the lost Mitra Akrun” (460).
Whereas once, regarding Mme Akrun, Liz had complained that “She cannot read this
woman” (336), she now has become aware enough to align herself with Mme Akrun’s
traumas instead of just “devouring” them.
Women
“Now is new story. Now is success story of the woman, the independence o f the woman. Is New Plot. ” — Miss Porntip
Stephen Cox, during his old-fashioned passage to the East, looks at his friend,
Konstantin—a character not unlike Kipling’s Kim—and observes that “beyond
Konstantin rose the green flanks of forest. The little clearing in the valley was deep,
small, lost* a fold, a cleft, a private place” (357). Following in the tradition of all the
many amateur orientalists, colonizers, and adventurers who came to the East before him,
Stephen feminizes the Eastern landscape. To do so coincides well with the original intent
of his passage: the hope that Cambodia will be a muse and inspire his next novel or play.
However, to do so also aligns Stephen with an aspect of imperialism which has been well
documented: how “global politics, the dance of colonizer and colonized, becomes sexual
politics, the dance of male and female” (Torgovnick 17). There have been many book-
length studies done of the literal, metaphorical, and symbolic role of women in/and
colonialism. As Gikandi points out, “More attuned to the slippages in the categories that
205
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. defined colonial culture, women and colonial subjects existed both inside and outside
Englishness, committed to ideas of the dominant culture but also aware of their tenuous
emplacement in it” (228). Women were “other” in ways similar to the colonized other
“As figures of difference, women are connected with sexual insatiability, class instability,
natives, the colonized, and the potentially threatening, unassimilable other” (Brown 19).
In Domestic Fictions, Nancy Armstrong shows how it can be seen in nineteenth-century
literature that “the female was the figure, above all else, on whom depended the outcome
of the struggle among competing ideologies” (5); and in Imperial Leather, Anne
McClintock focuses on the ideology of imperialism in particular and how “gender
dynamics were, from the outset, fundamental to the securing and maintenance of the
imperial enterprise” (7). Jenny Sharpe shows how English women were the “absent
center around which a colonial discourse of rape, race and gender turns” (8). Partha
Chatteijee concentrates on Indian women and how they were used as the battleground by
both English and Indian men. He explains that “By assuming a position of sympathy
with the unfree and oppressed womanhood of India, the colonial mind was able to
transform this figure of the Indian woman into a sign of the inherently oppressive and
unfree nature of the entire cultural tradition of a country” (118). Using Indian women,
the English often tried to disguise imperialism under the improbable cloak of chivalry.
“[WJomen become the proxies for men, object and agent of accumulation are reversed,
and thus the female figure is made to bear responsibility for empire” (Brown 16).
Imperialism’s use of the female figure is not one that Drabble ignores. She has two
formidable strategies for portraying this women/empire nexus in postimperial times:
Miss Porntip and menstruation.
206
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Margaret Drabble, too, creates a female figure that is a symbol of the East, but
this figure—Miss Pomtip—is nobody's proxy. Miss Pomtip is very much the new East,
the postimperial East—she is an East that leaves the West in the dust. Fittingly, Miss
Pomtip first appears in The Gates o f Ivory once Stephen Cox has boarded the plane that
will begin his passage to Cambodia. His plane is about to take off—indeed, it is ferrying
to the runway—when Miss Pomtip appears, “invading and claiming his space” (40). East
invades West: right away we know that Stephen’s passage will be an altogether different
beast from E. M. Forster’s. Stephen, always somewhat nostalgic when it comes to the
relations between East and West, immediately eroticizes Miss Pomtip in the traditional
way. In his mind, he calls her “Lust,” and “Lust” or “Petite Lust” is what she is called
until she finally introduces herself, at the end of the in-flight dinner (41). Giving her the
once-over, what Stephen sees in her is what he needs to see—what to him makes up her
otherness: her many jewels, her lizard-skin shoes, her tininess, her musk. When they
begin to converse, however, Miss Pomtip does not hesitate to whip the mg out from
underneath Stephen’s imperial cliches. She points out that Stephen’s travels are a bit
displaced, since Indochina “Is not for the English. English did not fight there. No
English missing soldiers to collect” (42). Stephen reveals that he is a writer and is going
to stay in a hotel that was once great but has since become shabby. Miss Pomtip “treated
his remark with the contempt it deserved” (42); a representative of the new East, she will
not romanticize the past.
Miss Pomtip thrives in the new global cultural economy, and once she and
Stephen land in Bangkok, in a reversal of the imperial roles, she becomes his caretaker.
Stephen soon realizes that she is “ a woman of the world,” and it is a world where both
207
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. East and West intersect She is known and recognized in the Westem-style hotels in
Bangkok, as well as in small Thai restaurants that they reach only after traversing “dark
narrow streets” and “a backwater, a hidden way, a secret canal” (55). At this restaurant, a
place which Stephen cannot even discern whether it is inside or out, Miss Pomtip orders
the food, and Miss Pomtip has already arranged the bill. They share backgrounds, but
Miss Pomtip will not let herself be used as fodder for Stephen’s writing—she insists that
the exchange be equal: ‘“Is my life first, then yours,’ she says” (56). Whereas thus far in
Drabble’s trilogy, the story of her English characters has included some kind of resistance
or reluctance to acclimate to the new world order, Miss Poratip’s story is one of gradual
triumph and thrive. After she hears Stephen’s story, Miss Pomtip proclaims that
‘“Britain is poor country,’ she informs him. ‘Post-industrial country. You import from
Japan, from Korea, from Thailand. You no more manufacturing. You cooling, we
heating. You protectionist now. You senile now” (61). And later, “‘You conserve, you
in old country,’ she tells him. ‘We make money. Is our turn now ’” (79). As a “New
Woman of the East,” Miss Pomtip makes it clear that her story is of the present and
future, and not of the past:
‘We make new history,’ she tells him, grandly. ‘In old days, was only one story for woman in Thailand. Is called Village Maiden to Beauty Queen. Sometimes tragedy story, sad lover lost, massage parlour, ruin, return to village, sometimes ill, sometimes crippled, sometimes disgrace.... Other story, same story, but happy story. Beauty Queen, much riches, fame, glory, TV-star, Hollywood, bridal Western style with seven-tier cake and white icing. Now is new story. Now is success story of the woman, the independence of the woman. Is New Plot’ (79)
Although a champion of the new global cultural economy, Miss Pomtip is not
necessarily portrayed as a champion in general. As Karen Knutsen has pointed out, Miss
Pomtip is a cheerleader for and a major player of the capitalist game, in ways that one
208
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. cannot help but be wary of. Stephen becomes disenchanted with this side of Miss
Pomtip, for reasons that are politically complicated. He considers himself to be rather
leftist, and thus is often frustrated by Miss Pomtip’s business bent—her vast economic
empire, and her vast collection of and obsession with gems. Much of his frustration,
however, also seems to originate from the old-fashioned impetus of his passage East:
Stephen is very much in the East as Orientalist. He wants to look around and see a
Conrad landscape—and thus does not appreciate the scoffing he receives from Miss
Pomtip when he tries to view her world through such dated lenses. He becomes friends
with Konstantin—a young man originally from England who knows Indochina in the way
that Kipling’s Kim knew India. He “maps” the East by photographing it, often selling his
photos to National Geographic-type magazines. Konstantin “seems to be a holy
innocent, without side or guile. People gaze without fear into his lens and speak secrets
to his receiving ear. Unlike Miss Pomtip, he is a good listener” (97). Miss Pomtip does
not like that she is losing Stephen (the lover she has added to her list as the British
Novelist) to Konstantin. “She appeals to his better nature by demanding English
lessons,” but when Stephen teaches her English by having her read Conrad, Miss Pomtip
protests that “Conrad is racist sexist swine.. .aligning herself firmly and problematically
with Chinua Achebe and other literary intellectuals” (100).
Stephen finally decides to leave Bangkok and proceed to Cambodia with
Konstantin. In the final argument he has with Miss Pomtip, Stephen reveals how he has
been traumatized by the new world order. Tellingly, he agonizes:
T can’t stick it all together,’ he said. ‘Sex, politics, the past, myself. I am all in pieces...the gaps are so great. I am hardly made of the same human stuff. The same human matter. There is no consistency in me. No glue.
209
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. No paste. I have no cohesion. I make no sense. I am a vacuum. Iam fragments. I am morsels...I seek simplicity. (105)
Ever intelligent, Miss Pomtip is able to identify the subtext underneath his text she sees
he is traumatized about the past-ness of the past She tries to help him, by saying:
'Is no simplicity. Is only way onwards. Is no way back to village. No way back to childhood. Is finished, all finished. All over world, village is finished. English village, Thai village, African village. Is burned, is chopped, is washed away. Is no way backwards. Water find level. Is no way back.’ (105)
Stephen is not appeased: “‘But it is heart-rending, heart-rending... All this waste. All
this wasted possibility. All this suffering. All these dreams. All this cruelty. All these
dead’” (105-6). Miss Pomtip continues to argue the new world, but in the midst of an
old-world passage, Stephen cannot remain in Miss Pomtip’s “New Plot”.
Whereas Stephen could not believe in Miss Poratip’s ideology, Liz Headleand at
first does not even believe in Miss Pomtip. Liz first reads of her in some of the writing
fragments that arrive in the mysterious packet of Stephen’s miscellany. Hattie Osborne,
who finds the first reference to her in Stephen’s writings, thinks she must be “some kind
of erotic fantasy of poor old Stephen’s” (48). When Hattie and Liz have gathered friends
to try to help them figure out a plan of action for finding Stephen, Hattie mentions Miss
Pomtip, and all who are there “laugh merrily at the notion of Miss Pomtip, and decide
that with a name like that she cannot but be a figment of the imagination. A fiction, a bad
joke. Had Stephen not realized that foreigners were no longer funny, that racial
stereotypes were out?" (269-70). Yet when Liz makes her own passage East to find the
missing Stephen, she, too, is taken under the wing of Miss Pomtip, and proves to be an
easier convert. Unable to withstand the commands and entreaties of Miss Pomtip, Liz
finds herself agreeing to go shopping for gems and jewels —Miss Pomtip’s favorite
210
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. hobby. The shopping excursion reads like the stereotypical engagement ring-buying
scenario: Miss Pomtip is the fiancd to Liz's fiancee—“by the time she [Liz] tried on her
seventh jewel, she was hooked” (370). But Miss Pomtip is of course about more than
bejeweled decoration: her influence is also more worldly. It is only with Miss Pomtip’s
much-appreciated help that Liz is able to attain the visas necessary for her to travel to
Saigon and Cambodia to continue the search for Stephen. Liz and Miss Pomtip
collaborate, and “Miss Pomtip works wonders. Doors open for her, men in uniform leap
to attention, documents write themselves for her in magic ink” (375). With Miss Pomtip,
Drabble has created a female figure who is a symbol of posdmperial times; she is not the
old link between East and West, but a hybrid who at Concorde-speed easily
navigates—and finds nothing disjunctive about—the new global cultural flows.
With Miss Pomtip, Drabble creates a postimperial woman for the postimperial
world; however, she has an additional strategy for updating the woman/empire nexus, one
in which she embraces—yet reclaims—the old connection. Previously, as we have seen,
women were often just the battleground—the third point of a homosocial triangle—used
for the power struggle between colonizer and colonized men. As part of her reclamation
project, Drabble, too, uses women—but does so differently from how women were
represented during imperial times: instead of using the female body in terms of its
interest to men, Drabble uses the female body in terms of its everyday life concerns of
women, themselves. In The Gates of Ivory, the female body bleeds.
To begin with, Drabble’s inclusion inThe Gates of Ivory of many references to,
and discussions of, menstruation is itself unusual and thus a call for interpretation. These
references range from the casual aside—Miss Pomtip has “plans to launch a new Asian
211
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. mini-tampon” (79)—to the more direct and detailed account: Mme Akrun thinks of how
she had to deal with menstruation while on the run from Pol Pot She thinks of the irony
that “Here, ten years later, in the camps, sanitary protection of a sort is once more
available, but she had no longer any need of it She stopped menstruating prematurely, at
the age of thirty-nine. Her daughter SokSita has never started” (153-4). After all the
trauma experienced in Cambodia, many women, in an act presented rather like a
rebellion, “choose to cease to menstruate” (153). Hattie Osborne runs into an
acquaintance of hers in the tampax aisle of her local market; her loquacious acquaintance,
Polly Piper, informs Hattie that she’s left her old job “and had taken up a career in
sanitary protection” (155). The references continue: menstruation is mentioned in many
of the quoted passages that are copied in Stephen’s hand and sent in the mysterious
package to Liz. One is a quote from a Vietnamese author who mentions what his sisters
had to do while both menstruating and hiding during a bombing raid. Another is a quote
from a nurse working in Viet Nam which begins: “Every nurse’s fear was being taken
prisoner and not having any Tampax. You couldn’t count on being in the jungle and
using a leaf, because the jungle was defoliated.... We packed money, a camera, and we
packed Tampax. My flak jacket was so full of Tampax that nothing could have
penetrated it” (159). Here menstruation is both an anxiety and a protection; at any rate, it
is a real—and not merely symbolic —anxiety and issue that real women had to deal with
throughout the times when empires shifted and warred.
Drabble’s most interesting tactic regarding menstruation concerns her main
character, Liz Headleand. At the time that Liz makes her passage to the East to search
for Stephen Cox, she is in her early fifties and “has not menstruated for nearly five
212
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. months, and for three years before that only intermittently” (376). In England, she is
menopausal. In the East, however—the destination of so many English before her, who
made the passage hoping to find the Orient as stereotypically sensual and lush and
“other” as they had heard—Liz becomes fertile again. Liz is “appalled” and unprepared.
She thinks, “She had assumed all that was over and done with. Why now?” (376). Why
indeed? The answer can be found both in how Drabble is using the symbols of the
female figure specifically differently to coincide with the differences of the postimperial
times, and also, perhaps, as Liz’s physical response to the cultural traumatic neuroses
over the dissolution of empire and England’s changed, “over the hill,” state. U z’s
passage East temporarily rejuvenates her—the overt war scars of the East begin the
healing process of the more covert empire scars of the West. At any rate, this may all be
well and true, but Liz has a real problem on her hands. She is in Hanoi, does not speak
the language, and is temporarily without the resources and help of Miss Porntip. Liz
searches through her huge handbag, and after taking all the legions of clowns out of the
compact car, she finds “two Tampax and one little pink-packed plastic-backed Sanipad,”
squashed and rather the worse for their long sojourn in the handbag (379).
Liz continues on with her plans, which consist of meeting with various officials to
try to find out how to go about tracing Stephen’s steps. Liz, however is “worrying not
about death but about leakage”:
She cannot take in what is said to her, she cannot follow her interpreter. She is bleeding.... The entire male world of communism, Marxist- Leninism, inflation, American imperialism, rice production, exchange mechanisms, statistics, hostages, the CIA, the SAS and the KGB, the Chinese, the KPNLF, Sihanouk, and Hun Sen, war, death, and Ho’s marble mausoleum dissolve and fade before the bleeding root of her body, impaled on its grey-white stump. Woman-being, woman-life, possess her entirely. Shames and humiliations, triumphs and glories, birth and blood.
213
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Let armies fight and die, let peoples starve. She hopes that the seat of her sldrt will not be stained when she rises. (379)
The shift has been made from the symbolic woman to the personal. This personal
moment is also the impetus for a turmoil through which Liz will have to struggle to come
out alive; and the struggle itself becomes emblematic of the cultural trauma being
suffered over the loss of imperial identity. Liz begins to feel ill and suspects that she has
toxic shock from the old tampons she used. This “shock”—which is, when used in
another sense, the cause of a traumatic neurosis—causes Liz to be hospitalized and to go
through a period of delirium during which she dreams and hallucinates images of war and
empire. She dreams of “the Belgian Congo and a tally of severed arms. She dreams of
babies bom without arms or eyes, victims of Agent Orange. She dreams
atrocities.. .tableaux vivants of death from the dark places of history” (406-9).
In the midst of her nightmares, Liz thinks of how she is “afflicted with one of the
most new-fangled of feminist disorders, while Stephen Cox has died in a field hospital of
old-fashioned malaria or dengue” (400). This is fitting: Stephen’s passage East was in
the old style; Liz’s is something different. While in the hospital, Liz receives many
visitors whom she has met during her passage. These visitors seem compelled to tell Liz
their life stories. As a psychiatrist, Liz is used to this, but she does find the timing of it
strange. She wonders, “Is her professional identity so powerful that people will struggle
to tell her their secrets even as she lies dying? Do they wish to transmit their messages
through her to the other world?” (402). Liz is bearing witness to the woe caused by
empire; she is hearing the testimony and, as hearer and witness, “is the vehicle of an
occurrence, a reality, a stance or a dimension beyond [her]self' (Felman 3). This
testimony, along with Liz’s dreams, will bring her through her crisis of empire. Felman
214
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. inquires, “Is the testimony, therefore, a simple medium of historical transmission, or is it,
in obscure ways, the unsuspected medium of a healing?” (9); here, Drabble shows that it
is both.
After bearing witness to a testimony, Liz is “brought back into significance” by
her ex-husband Charles Headleand—who throughout the trilogy has functioned as a
representative of England. “Charles brings her news from England,” and it is this news
and gossip that heals Liz. Drabble writes that “Liz listens to this harmless gossip with
rapture. How good to know that the Old Country still ticks over as it always did! She is
particularly interested in the luncheon with the Queen” (411). Liz is not Miss Pomtip,
and is not a creature of the new: she finds solace in the old trappings of empire.
However, Drabble makes it clear that the next generation will adapt even further, and
then the next after that. For once Liz and Charles are safely on the plane home, they
begin to talk about their son Aaron, and his news that Hattie Osborne is pregnant with
their grandchild. Drabble moves on, then, to one of Hattie’s first-person narratives. Liz
might be returning to an older England, but the future resides with Hattie, her forthright
voice, and her new Headleand child. Hattie ends this monologue—her last of the
novel—with “Rum business, really. Women’s lives. Eggs, blood and the moon...”
(416). In postimperial literature, Drabble has a different use for “Women’s lives”.
Literature
“Look, I just sort o f assume that youknow all about Conrad, that you know a damn sight more about him /than do, because I can't bear to spell it all out, right? Short cuts, right? You with me ”so - far?Hattie Osborne
215
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. It becomes quite clear, inThe Gates o f Ivory, that Drabble is aware of—and
emphasizing— literature’s role in the production of empire. Regarding the abundance of
nostalgia for the imperial past in the literature of today, Drabble has queried, “But who,
one begins to wonder, is tackling the present? Have we abandoned it, despaired of it?”
(!Threepenny 23). I have shown above how depicting the “present” is a main goal of
Drabble’s trilogy; now I want to concentrate on how Drabble emphasizes the complicity
of literature and empire by first connecting The Gates o f Ivory to the English literature
that produced empire, and then by making her novel interact with empire’s remains. That
Drabble means to explore the role of literature is evident right from the start of the
trilogy, with her choice of the title of the first novel, The Radiant Way. The Radiant Way
is England’s version of Dick and Jane—the primer used by children to learn how to read.
It is also chosen ironically, by Liz’s (almost ex-) husband Charles Headleand, as the title
for his television series in the sixties, a series “that demonstrated, eloquently, movingly,
the evils that flow from a divisive class system, from early selection, from Britain’s
unfortunate heritage of public schools and philistinism” (165). Charles’s series showed
how the path leading out from literacy was more often than not the opposite of “radiant,”
and Drabble parallels this fictional series by showing in her novel how England as a
nation is not spectacularly backlit, so to speak, the sun having set on its imperial
“splendor”. No matter the ultimate destination of the way: Drabble places emphasis on
reading as the map.
As the significance of empire’s decline is brooded upon more openly in A Natural
Curiosity, so is literature’s involvement Alix, who divides most of her time in this novel
helping out an old modernist poet and visiting in jail the murderer, Paul Whitmore, thinks
216
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. that “Maybe the teaching of the classics teaches us monstrosities rather than balance,
wisdom, stoicism, reason” (167). Stephen Cox reveals that one of the facts that initiated
his interest in Pol Pot was that Pol Pot’s wife and another woman high up in the Khmer
Rouge leadership circles “studied English literature at the Sorbonne. Imagine, Stephen
had said. Imagine them, discussing The Mill on the Floss. Or Cranford' (172-3). And
Charles Headleand, traveling to Baldai to try to rescue a kidnapped journalist friend,
stays with an ex-diplomat there, who “used to be out here with the British Council, and
when they withdrew their presence he stayed on and privatized himself. He’s gone a bit
native” (234); yet we discover that, perhaps in contrast to Conrad’s Kurtz, “going native”
for this twentieth century diplomat means teaching English novels, and writing one
himself. With such moments, then, in these first two novels, Drabble prepares the reader
for the spotlight she will shine on literature in The Gates of Ivory.
Drabble connectsThe Gates o f Ivory to both the overtly imperial British literary
tradition, such as the novels of Conrad, as well as to novels like Woolf’s Mrs Dalloway,
where empire’s role in the English everyday is more subtly portrayed. As Roberta
Rubenstein and Pamela Bromberg have shown in their essays, Liz Headleand is clearly
drawn as the next generation’s Garissa Dalloway. When The Radiant Way begins, Liz is
preparing for her big New Year’s Eve party, in fine Clarissa tradition. As she dresses and
puts on makeup, she sets the scene of the novel by introducing us to the main characters
in her past and present, and at the end of the section, like Garissa, we see Uz as “down
the wide staircase she goes” to check on Deirdre in the kitchen (in the 1980’s a caterer,
not a maid), and her husband drinking gin with the men. Drabble ends the trilogy as it
began—with another of Liz’s parties. In contrast to her first party’s celebration of the
217
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. beginning of a new decade, this party is a memorial to the presumed death of Stephen
Cox. Liz experiences the ups and downs of hostessing, as did Clarissa. At the beginning
of the party we see Liz worrying whether the whole idea was not just a “godawful
mistake,” yet by the end she “looks around her with pride and satisfaction. It has all gone
off very well. She should give parties more often” (458), and “It had been, she considers,
a triumph, of its kind” (461). There are also details added which make Liz’s party very
much a party of the postimperial era. There has been an accident on one of the main
highways, which causes many of the guests to be late. Drabble writes: “For this is one of
those days, long awaited and by some gleefully predicted, when it seems that the whole
system will break down. (And if the traffic can, why not finance, why not money
markets, why not the machinery of the whole world?)” (446). Instead of just the personal
worries of Clarissa, we are presented with the anxieties of a culture—anxieties over the
new global cultural economy. In addition, Stephen Cox, who plays the Septimus Warren
Smith role here, is the acknowledged “point” or impetus of the party, and not just a
shadow double: where Septimus was suffering from shell shock as a result of the
clashing of empires, Stephen—as a representative of his generation and how it is brought
face to face with empire’s remains— sought out such chaos. Where Clarissa alone had to
come to terms with the effect that Septimus’s death had on her—“He made her feel the
beauty; made her feel the fun”(MD 186)—Stephen has an effect on all of the party-
goers: “Stephen has reinforced their identities. They hold out their glasses for more
wine” (446).
Drabble does not just reserve her Woolf parallels for Liz’s parties: throughout all
three novels she continually aligns her women characters to Woolf’s. In The Radiant
218
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Way, when Alix has just been to visit the creatively decorated squatter apartment in
which her son and his significant other live, Drabble writes, “Domestic art, easel art—she
thought of these contrasts, and of Virginia Woolf and Vanessa Bell, as she descended the
stairs” (228). Liz Headleand is a psychiatrist, which is reminiscent of Clarissa’s informal
interactions with people and how she thinks of “a woman confessing, as to her they often
did, some scrape, some folly” ( Mrs Dalloway 32). In one instance Drabble portrays
Esther Breuer, an art historian, as a kind of Lily Briscoe figure; when Esther tries to
paint, her “hand trembled. How dare she speak of the paintings of others, when her own
hand would not obey her? How timid her life had been, how unadventurous! She boldly
swept an arc of emerald across the acid-free paper” (299). In her essay, “Margaret
Drabble’sThe Radiant Way'. Feminist Metafiction,” Pamela Bromberg claims that the
postmodern thematic of The Radiant Way itself, with its portrayal of the
interconnectedness of three female characters, is “the story begun by Woolf in A Room o f
One's Own with the utterly new glimpse of Chloe and Olivia, working together in their
lab and liking each other” (9). Drabble’s characters are consciously Woolf's characters, a
couple of generations down the road.
Besides the Woolf parallels mentioned above, and the role that Conrad and
Forster play, which I will mention below, Drabble fills The Gates of Ivory with literary
references, writing of and quoting Mill, Proust, Shakespeare, Dickens, Dostoevsky,
Rimbaud, Coleridge, Malraux, Greene, Auden, Mann, Maugham, and many others.
Karen Knutsen writes that “ThroughoutThe Gates of Ivory Drabble scrutinizes and
questions metanarratives that, to a large extent, have become indelible parts of Western
culture, thus reinforcing the culture that has created them” (580). However, Drabble is
219
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. not so much “reinforcing” Western culture as she is drawing attention to how Western
literature has played a role in “reinforcing” Western culture. Although ultimately all
serving to remind the reader of the complicity between literature and empire, these
references function in a variety of ways. For example, Stephen carries a quotation from
John Stuart Mill in his wallet, which points out some of the inadequacies and inequalities
of England (83). Stephen is also a big fan of Rimbaud’s and during his travels often
makes comparisons to Rimbaud’s travels. He “thinks of Malraux and Rimbaud. Men of
letters playing at being men of action” (165), and worries that he will meet with some of
their same pitfalls. Fittingly, when Stephen speaks of Rimbaud to friends who are
younger than he—who are of the next generation—they confuse Rimbaud with Rambo.
Drabble writes that “They unravel the misunderstanding, and speak of fame and the
global village. Rimbaud, Rambo, myth-makers both. Which of them will live on beyond
the millennium?” (163). Stephen’s literary touchstones—like his passage—are old-
school, yet Drabble’s use of them signals a more contemporary awareness. As
Rubenstein writes, Drabble’s “literary references signal her revisionist argument with
previously canonized Western texts in the glare of postcolonial awareness of global
complexity—a world that can be neither understood nor represented through a single
moral code or vision” (145-6).
One of Margaret Drabble’s favorite ways to remind her readers that she is
working within a specific literature/empire nexus is to include brief sentences such as,
“They stand where Conrad stood” (55) and “This is the gorgeous East. Conrad was here”
(47). Her characters often tread the same route as Conrad and his characters—yet
Drabble herself does not. By making each of her characters have quite different reactions
220
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. to Conrad’s works, Drabble paints an arc of opinion that traverses the same route of
thought necessary to come to terms with England’s postimperial state. Stephen and Liz
have different responses to Conrad’s novels, and their responses to Conrad are indicative
of what they need from the East; furthermore, the critiques of Conrad voiced by Liz’s
stepson, Alan, and Hattie Osborne are evidence of how the next generation is a step
removed from the trauma of empire’s demise.
Stephen Cox loves Conrad. He travels to the East because Conrad did: he is in
search of the old-fashioned Eastern adventure; once he has experienced it, Stephen plans
to turn his trip into a Conradian yam. Drabble writes of how much Stephen admires
Conrad, and that “Stephen, like Conrad, had nourished his boyhood dreams with travel
books, with Mungo Park and Marco Polo and Captain Cook and Pierre Loti and Gide in
the Congo. Dreams of escape, dreams of distance. He had wanted to see, before he died,
the whole wide world” (45). Conrad is not “just” a fellow novelist; instead, he represents
a way of life—which Stephen envies and tries to emulate, even though Conrad’s world
has passed. It is Stephen who, as he travels, thinks of how “Conrad was here.” When he
helps Miss Porntip with her English, Stephen has her read Conrad novels for practice.
When Stephen is on his trek into Khmer Rouge country—a trek from which he will not
emerge alive—he thinks of his journey in terms of the Heart o f Darkness. Despite being
politically left, Stephen parallels his journey to Conrad’s without irony, and in a near
death epiphany he “feels an intense happiness. It is a vision, and he has seen it It is the
heart of darkness, it is the heart of light. It is beyond irony and beyond parody. It is
doomed, but he has seen it” (367). Although aware of its futility, Stephen insists on
searching for Conrad’s ghost.
221
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Liz, on the other hand, is not a member of the Conrad fanclub. Liz knows enough
about Conrad to recognize the allusions to him in Stephen’s writing, but she does not at
all share Stephen’s enthusiasm. When Drabble has Liz read a fragment of writing sent to
her in the packet of Stephen’s, she writes, “It continued in portentous but lyrical style for
a page or two, describing an oriental landscape, a broad river, and a young man on a boat
traveling upstream into the heart, she supposed, of darkness. Liz found it rather boring,
though she did not like to say so, even to herself’ (18). Liz is not compelled by such
Conradian parallels. As Liz becomes more and more involved with the mystery of
Stephen’s disappearance, she becomes more vocal about her Conrad aversion: “‘I hate
Conrad,’ says Liz, with some exaggeration.... Liz then asserts that she cannot face
rereading the whole of Conrad just to see what Stephen had on his mind while he was
writing his diary” (146-7). Yet as the novel progresses, this is exactly what Liz finds
herself doing. And as Drabble has Liz read, she makes her a more postimperial reader of
Conrad than Stephen is. Liz recognizes Conrad’s racism and finds that “the violence
both of the language and the action is extreme. How can the gentle Stephen have
admired this sort of stuff?” (238). Liz’s opinion of Conrad is the middle opinion, falling
in between the admiration of Stephen and the dismissal of Alan and Hattie. She will not
enjoy Conrad, but she will read him. Drabble explains:
She is forcing herself to read Conrad’s Victory. Jit would not be fair to say that she is hating every word of it, but she is not deriving much pleasure from it either. She has never liked Conrad. Twice she has made herself read Heart of Darkness, and she still has no idea, on the simplest level, of its plot. What actually happens in it? Who is going where, and why? She never discovered. (237)
When Liz meets up with Miss Pomtip during her search for Stephen, they think of the
passage East of the male authors: “They have all been out there—Conrad, Somerset
222
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Maugham, Paul Theroux, William Golding. They have ventured into the dark spaces of
the globe and the white tracts of the heart, and returned to this triumph. So it goes”
(349). With that “So it goes,” Drabble makes it quite clear that neither Liz nor Miss
Porntip are included. They might search out the details of such passages, but they will
not be compelled to enact the same.
When Hattie, an ex-actress, thinks of Conrad, she thinks of the movies made of
his works, or the movies that could be made and have not yet She knows that Victory
has not been made into a movie yet (though she thinks it would make a “bloody good
movie”), and is aware that Lord Jim was filmed in Angkor Wat (310). Drabble makes
Alan Headleand’s opinions of Conrad a product of the times in which Alan grew up. She
writes that
Alan, an enlightened child of his enlightened, post-modem, relativist times, does not believe that primitive man is full of unmitigated savagery. He does not hold with descriptions of things that are vague, uncontrollable and repulsive. He does not believe that the dark-skinned races are by nature more savage than any others. He suspects Conrad of racism. (174)
Alan is a scholar and is willing to study Conrad’s novels, as well as analyze and
deconstruct them. However, to Alan, Conrad’s novels are more of a historical curio than
a way of life. Reading Victory or Heart of Darkness is not going to compel Alan East.
In a speech she gave to the American Academy of Arts and Letters, Margaret
Drabble proclaimed, “I do myself see it as the artist’s duty to confront the way we live
now and to avoid the deceptions of the tourist brochure” (23), and in her trilogy she
succeeds on both counts. When she has first Stephen and then Liz travel to Cambodia,
their journeys are not for the purpose of spicy foods and relaxation in an exotic locale.
Instead, Drabble carefully connects the trips to the literary tradition of the imperial
223
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. “passage” East, yet because these are postimperial times and she wants to “confront the
way we live now,” the realizations and epiphanies of Stephen and Liz while in Cambodia
are such that enable them to better understand and come to terms with their role as
citizens of England, now a postimperial nation.
Although Conrad is mentioned throughoutThe Gates o f Ivory, Kurtz is not
Stephen’s only literary forebear: there is an underlying Forster element to Stephen’s
passage East, so that whereas he ends up, perhaps, a Kurtz, he begins an Adela Quested.
If Conrad works as the 1857 Mutiny in this text, then Forster is the Jallianwala Bagh,
with the end of the kind of passage East represented in his novels more what Stephen
seems to be unconsciously mourning. Stephen never mentions Forster—it is Conrad
whom he tries to emulate—yet his reactions in moments of crisis are voiced in Forster’s
terms. He hears the “bourn bourn” which was the sound of nothingness confronting
Adela in the Marabar Caves; and although lying sick in the jungle, his experiences are
aligned with Adela’s when he thinks, “Why try to describe the real thing? It was not
even very real. It was a shadow of a shadow on the wall of a cave” (356). Drabble has
Stephen describe himself as an “old-fashioned book person,” and his passage East
reflects this. In a postmodern way, however, Stephen is aware of his anachronisms.
While at a border camp waiting to begin his journey into Cambodia, Stephen looks
around at his various fellow-travelers and thinks, “Were they out of step with their age,
all of them, a ragged hangover from the past, emotional cripples, nostalgic dreamers of
dreams, bom out of their true time?... Have they been unable to adapt to the eighties?”
(124). Drabble writes that “Stephen Cox hangs between two worlds. He is a go-
224
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. between” (275); yet Stephen also seems to “hang” between two eras, the imperial and
postimperial.
In The Radiant Way, Stephen Cox appears several times as a minor character,
who is friends with Liz and Alix and is working on a play about Pol Pot Towards the
end of the novel, Drabble writes— seemingly in passing—that “Stephen Cox has gone to
Kampuchea. Alix hopes he is all right” (372). In A Natural Curiosity Liz mentions
Stephen every now and then to wonder what has happened to him, for his postcards have
trailed off. She tells a friend about him and tries to explain why he chose to travel to
Cambodia, fust mentioning inspiration for a play, yet then falling back on ‘The fatal
curiosity. That’s what he said it was.... I think he wanted to see if the atrocity stories
were true. To see for himself’ (172). In The Gates o f Ivory, Stephen often elaborates on
his reasons for his passage East. In Testimony, Shoshana Felman writes that what is
surprising is “the witness’s readiness, precisely, to pursue the accident, to actively pursue
its path and its direction, without quite grasping the full scope and meaning of its
implications, without entirely foreseeing where the journey leads and what is the precise
nature of its final destination” (24). This is what Stephen seems to be doing; for although
there are personal reasons—such as artistic inspiration—among his reasons for going, his
explanations always circle back to being a witness for the death of a nation. Witnessing
this occurrence in Cambodia will enable Stephen to understand the changes undergone in
his own country; it all comes back to nation. Stephen’s friends seem to realize that the
reasons for his passage lie underneath the stated reasons of artistic inspiration. Alix’s
husband, Brian, thinks that Stephen “had thought the Orient might jog his failing creative
powers, as Rome had jogged Goethe’s. And the Cambodian theme was a grand one. The
225
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. death of a nation, the death of communism, the death of hope. It had not yet been written
to death” (16), and thus has not yet been known. It still is a place where “knowing and
not knowing intersect” (Caruth 3). Stephen’s fellow traveler, Akira, “defines Stephen as
a man who has for ever lost his faith, who has come here to the graveyard of his own
past” (229). And Stephen himself thinks at one point that “it was not the Fighting Men,
nor the tanks and trucks of the Fighting Men, nor the Death of Communism, nor even the
colonnades of Angkor or Angkar that he had come to find, but the forest itself’ (276). He
is reverting back to a “heart of darkness” mode and the initial meeting between the East
and a powerful West.
When Stephen is on the plane about to take off on his journey East, he hears an
announcement that the pilot of the plane is a “Commandant Parodi”; Drabble writes that
“Stephen was pleased by this. Who better to fly one into the unknown? We live in the
age of parody, reflected Stephen” (40), and there is an element of parody which hovers
around Stephen’s journey throughout, for he is very much on a quest with no destination,
no consistently articulated point. As we have seen, Stephen spends some time in
Bangkok with Miss Pomtip, before moving on to Saigon and then across the border into
Cambodia with Konstantin and Akira. After a few days of journeying into Cambodia,
they meet up with some Khmer Rouge militia, who shoot Akira and then bring Stephen,
who is now quite ill, and Konstantin to a hill village. The soldiers leave, as, eventually,
does Konstantin, but Stephen is now in a life and death struggle with malaria. He is
delirious and hallucinates, and experiences these hallucinations as epiphanies regarding
his passage East. Although seemingly satisfactory to himself, Stephen’s epiphanies do
not make much sense to the reader, or even, perhaps, to Drabble. Stephen thinks that
226
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. “even as he lay there, he felt a small pride in having got to the other side. It was an end
in itself” (355). This “other side” is vaguely constructed: it is unclear whether it is the
other side of life, the other side of the world, or the other side of an obstacle in Stephen’s
thinking. Drabble questions, “So, is he any the wiser now than he had been then, in that
suburban drawing room? Has he learned anything about the lost years of this country?”
(365). Because his passage seemed to be an anachronism in the first place, any answers
he might discover do not match up with the questions asked.
However, it is important to note that the language Stephen uses in his epiphany is
literary; his realizations occur to him via how his experiences relate to the experiences he
has read about in novels. For instance, when he is lying sick and “breathing laboriously,”
he thinks of “those French writers of his youth” and how “They had brought him to this
pass. They had inspired him, and now they withdrew their breath” (365). The writers
were the impetus for Stephen’s journey, yet what he has discovered is not what they
portrayed. What is made clear to him is the commodity aspect of books and writing. He
thinks of how “Gide had sold the Congo. Malraux had sold the spoils of Angkor. This
was what writers did. They seemed to purvey messages, but in truth they sold
commodities. Art was nothing but a trading speculation” (357). Stephen, a Booker
prize-winning author, feels complicit in this relation between novels and the world. He
thinks, “Could it be that he had written all those books, had turned out those crude
pseudonymous action-packed thrillers, those fastidious teasing tableaux of historical
pastiche? He cannot do it any more. The gods have left him” (362). Stephen was an
“old school” writer, his passage East was an “old school” passage, and with this
realization he is left in a kind of limbo in a small hill village in Cambodia. He is pleased
227
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. to be out of the global cultural economy and is proud that “One thing at least he had
achieved: a world without money. It is a small triumph” (363). This is not Stephen’s
world, however, and the small hill village of the East regurgitates Stephen back into the
West, into a clinic run by Western-trained doctors. The reader last witnesses Stephen
alive as he is setting off on a forced passage back to the West. Liz later hears secondhand
of the account of the Doctor who cared for Stephen at the clinic, where he died of malaria
and infection. The Doctor relates in broken English: "Very nice man. Good discussions.
History, politics, democracy. Very sad” (393). The meaning of Stephen’s passage is
here reduced to three words.
The reaction of Stephen’s friends to his passage East is revealing. To begin with,
it takes a long time for his friends to realize how long it has been since they last heard
from him. When the novel begins and Liz has just received the mysterious package of
Stephen’s writings, “Neither Liz nor Alix found it easy to remember exactly when
Stephen had departed” (11). Despite the contemporary global cultural flows between the
East and the West, Stephen’s passage—with its old-fashioned intents—seems removed
from the current. Upon receiving the packet, Stephen’s journey threatens those at home
back in London. His passage East brings the East to them, but in a reverse kind of way;
they are not mapping the East, but being pulled into it Drabble writes,
But from now onwards their lives are and will be different. Stephen has altered them. He has posted Cambodia to them, and now its messages are everywhere. Like a cancer, like the Big C itself, it spreads. They may not yet have caught the disease, but their cells are predisposed to receive it. They seem to hear the mysteriously self-transforming name of Cambodia- Kampuchea-Kambuja-Cambodge wherever they go. (65)
Stephen’s passage is unsettling in ways that are indicative of the nature of the
postimperial times—the easy permeability between “Good Time and Bad Time”. In the
228
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. opening of the novel Drabble writes that “Some cross the bridge into the Bad Time, into
the Underworld, and return to tell the tale. Some go deliberately. Some step into Bad
Time suddenly. It may be waiting, there, in the next room” (4). Stephen’s passage and
disappearance creates an unwanted link between them and “Bad Time.” They are not
eagerly anticipating the story of Stephen’s escapades.
After not being able to discover anything about Stephen from London, Liz decides to go
look for him in Cambodia, and sets off on her own passage East. Her passage begins like
Stephen’s, in that she initially adopts an old-fashioned Orientalist approach. She “tried to do
some homework before she set off to the East...so Liz studied books on the history of Cambodia
and the Vietnam war and the rise of Pol Pot” (277). She models her itinerary closely after
Stephen’s, flying into Bangkok and staying at the same hotel. But at this point, Stephen and
Liz’s passages diverge. Where Stephen found himself feeling nostalgic about the colonial past,
Liz embraces how Bangkok is now. With the help of Miss Poratip, she is shown the same
Bangkok as Stephen was, yet it is enough for her. Liz does not feel the desire to follow the path
of Conrad. Where Stephen had left Miss Poratip and “set out into the wilderness” to the
“Promised Land, from which no traveler returns” (121), Liz acquiesces to Miss Pomtip’s
suggestions and goes jewel-shopping with her. When Liz prepares to make an excursion to the
Cambodian border, she plays the anti-Great Game and accepts her ignorance:
Liz gives up. She understands nothing. She understands nothing the next day as she does her round of various government offices, collecting pieces of paper covered in a script that means nothing. And, as she sits in the back of a hired car, traveling along the Red Road, she fears that when she finds what she is looking for, she will not understand that either. She may not even recognize it. (332)
It is in doing so that she is ultimately able to achieve the goal of her quest and discover
Stephen’s fate. When Liz talks to Mme Akrun at the Border Camp, she knows when to
229
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. listen and when to say nothing. And whereas Stephen was an “old-fashioned book
person,” Liz reaches her goal via new-fashioned “book” people—a movie crew who, in
attempting to film a search for the missing Akira, stumble upon information about
Stephen, and decided to film his life instead. Liz meets the film crew at her hotel in
Saigon, and by combining their information they are able to piece together the events of
Stephen’s final months. As already discussed, Liz suffers from toxic shock and
experiences a period of delirium and hallucination that parallels Stephen’s; with her
“new-fangled disease” and her modem approach to the East, however, Liz’s passage
takes her to a new state of mind from which she will have a clearer view of both the East
and, ultimately, England.
Stephen’s old-school Forster/Conrad passage has killed him; Liz’s passage
ultimately sends her happily back to England, gossiping with her ex-husband about the
Queen; and the representatives of the next generation, such as Hattie, Aaron, and Alan,
give no hint of future travels. How enticing, then, can novels about posdmperial
passages be? When everyone is accustomed to England’s status as a postimperial nation,
which direction will the English novel take? In The Gates of Ivory, Margaret Drabble
reveals some ambivalence about the role of the posdmperial novel. Indeed she begins it
by calling its novel status into question: ‘This is a novel—if novel it be—about Good
Time and Bad Time” (3). As the novel progresses, then, Drabble portrays the role of
literature in equal parts with its traditional role and status on the one hand, and being
overtaken by more popular forms of media on the other. Such ambivalence is really an
accurate portrayal of the state of the novel today.
230
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. When Stephen Cox was in the midst of his delirium in the hill village in
Cambodia, and thinking of how his journey originated because of his love for certain
novels, Drabble interrupts with a dear reader moment in which she writes, “Beware what
you read when young. Beware what you feed upon. It may bring you to this shore, this
brink, this bridge” (356). She is emphasizing, in a traditional twentieth-century way, the
power of the novel. The novels Stephen read shaped his psyche, and there is no hint at
this point that such power of the novel has in any way diminished. However, such
moments are usually connected to the characters inThe Gates of Ivory who are
representative of a more imperial mindset For example, when Stephen stays at the
Oriental Hotel in Bangkok, he discovers that there is an author’s lounge where the drinks
available are named after famous authors. The Oriental Hotel, however, complete with
its significant name, is a place that has remained a kind of monument to when the East
was—in Western eyes—the “Orient.” It is a place of nostalgia. When Stephen’s friend,
Konstantin, reappears at the end of the novel after having narrowly escaped Stephen’s
fate, he is said to be in “a nowhere place. This is the end of the world. This is Paradiso,
on the Island of Flores” (422-3). While reading a rarely attainable British newspaper,
Konstantin catches the attention of another young Englishman, a sailor named Matt.
Matt is working for a rich couple, and helping them to sail around the world on their
yacht. He and Konstantin start chatting, and Matt agrees to give Konstantin passage on
the yacht, so that Konstantin can make it to an airport in time to fly home for Stephen’s
memorial service, which he has just read about in the paper. As they sail, Konstantin
tells his guilty story to Matt, relieved to have a witness to his testimony. Once
Konstantin is finished, Matt ventures, “‘I say, my friend,’ he says, and falters,
231
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. diffidently” (427). Konstantin thinks that Matt is going to tell him his own sea-story, yet
when Matt finally gets up the nerve to speak, he says:
‘I say,’ he pursues, with some embarrassment, ‘you wouldn’t have any books with you, would you? I’m not much of a reading man, but you kind of get driven to it, don’t you? I’ve been right through Bob’s set of Swallows and Amazons. You haven’t got a spare paperback to see me on my way? I’d do you a swap. I’ve got a Graham Greene in the cabin. The Tenth Man. It’s a bit short, but it’s quite good.’ (427)
For the traveling English, at any rate, literature is still a lingua franca—a currency, of
sorts. However, Konstantin and Matt are both throwbacks to another era—they are
Kipling and Conrad, still able to be at “the end of the world.”
The other way that Drabble portrays literature in The Gates o f Ivory is of being
overtaken by movies and television. As an author, “Stephen is a member of a threatened
species. He is unnecessary” (108). Hattie, a representative of the next generation, is an
agent and thus is always looking to buy the movie rights of a book. We’ve seen above
that what she knows about Conrad, for instance, is all connected to the movies of his
works that have been made or that she thinks possibly could be made. She is nominally
Stephen Cox’s agent, and when she hears that he is missing in Cambodia and that he
might have been working on a novel while there, she sells herself the rights. She thinks:
“And now I began to see real possibilities. English writer disappears into jungle. English
writer captured by Pol Pot. English writer turns native in Killing Helds. English leftie
forced to eat his own ideology. It had potential, this idea” (247). Fantastic though it may
seem—Hattie selling the rights to Stephen’s possible story to herself—she is already too
late. For when Liz travels to the East to find Stephen, she meets up with a film crew who
are already in the process of filming Stephen’s story. While staying at a hotel in Saigon,
Liz, on her way up to her room, passes a woman who she notices is reading a novel of
232
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Stephen’s. Later, while having a drink in the hotel lounge, she runs into friend of hers,
who, as it turns out, is part of the afore-mentioned film crew. The woman who Liz saw
reading Stephen’s novel is a part of the film crew, and was reading the novel purely as a
means of researching the film project (390). These days, novels are passages into films.
Drabble often portrays media folk as the new colonizers of the East. Media employees
are the new clientele of the old “Oriental” Hotels. In the new global cultural economy,
East and West overlap, but so does fact and fiction. For example:
Stephen Cox meets a Kampuchean refugee who is playing the role of a Kampuchean refugee in an American semi-fictionalized documentary about Kampuchean refugees. He meets extras who have worked onThe Killing Fields, some of them survivors of the killing fields. He meets a cameraman who worked on Apocalypse Now. He meets a man in the Press Club who knows a man who knows Marlon Brando. (103)
Dori Laub, writing of how important it is for a trauma victim to tell her or his story,
claims that ‘Telling thus entails a reassertion of the hegemony of reality and a re-
extemalization of the evil that affected and contaminated the trauma victim” (69). But
what Drabble is portraying so frequently in the media moments of The Gates o f Ivory is a
compulsion to tell and “transmit” someone else’s trauma story. Such a vicarious
testimony seems to be an example of capitalism spun out of control, as well as a perhaps
revealing compulsion that is connected to the change from an imperial to a postimperial
world.
As all the scrambling goes on to search for the tenuous existence of Stephen’s
Cambodia novel, it gradually becomes clear that what Stephen wrote are the fragments
and quotations sent in the package to Liz. These are what Stephen has discovered on his
passage East: empire’s remains. However, Drabble uses these beginnings of stories and
moments of observation as a postmodern text around which the text of The Gates o f Ivory
233
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. coalesces. Empire—in its postimperial condition—is the framework upon which her
entire novel is based.
At the end of The Gates o f Ivory, Liz and her friends hold a memorial service for
Stephen Cox, which also seems to be, under the surface, a memorial for empire. The
readings chosen for the service are a mixture of old and new: Rimbaud—one of
Stephen’s favorite poets, a poem by a Cambodian poet called “Requiem for a
Generation,” as well as a few hymns carefully selected by Alix. When the hymn singing
begins, Drabble includes a few key verses:
Earth might be fair and all men glad and wise, Age after age their tragic empires rise, Built while they dream, and in that dreaming weep
and then interrupts the verse with: “Alix sobs” (438). However, Alix does not think of
Stephen and sob, she thinks of empire and sobs. This is the moment of her empire
passage which I have quoted earlier, that begins, “Why must it go on for ever and ever,
death and destruction, tragic empire after tragic empire” etc. Alix cries for several pages,
and she is unsure why, yet her thoughts keep returning to empire. The hymn ends on a
note of hope, which Drabble as narrator extends to the world:
‘Earth shall be fair, and all her folk be one!’ conclude the choir and congregation, with a faltering unpractised note of heartbreaking optimism, extended equally to the toiling billions of China, to the Indian subcontinent, to the Americas, to the fragmenting empire of the Soviet Union, to the Iranians and the Inuit.... (440)
The list goes on, and Alix appears to have worked through her trauma; she “feels a
sudden, terrible impatience. What are theydoing here, in a church, for God’s sake, at
this point in time? Why can’t we get on with the next thing?” (440). Significantly, Alix
234
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. worries, here, that she has been reading too much “popular scientific theory” and that
perhaps “Chaos and string have unhinged her mind”; chaos theory is what Appadurai
uses to explain the effect that the global cultural economy has on its participants,
claiming that the disjunctures he writes of “will have to move into something like a
human version of the theory that some scientists are calling ‘chaos’ theory. That is, we
will need to ask how these complex, overlapping, fractal shapes constitute not a simple,
stable (even if large-scale) system, but to ask what its dynamics are” (20). Drabble’s
characters have been performing this question throughoutThe Gates of Ivory, and in this
final memorial scene are bidding farewell to both Stephen and an imperial England. At
the end of the service, a “‘pale, Swinbumian young man, theatrically dressed in a suit of
the palest grey, with a silver waistcoat embroidered with scarlet dragons”—England
marked by the East—arises to sing the final song. Fittingly eunuch-like, this symbol of
England is a counter-tenor, and sings his song beautifully, albeit in a sophisticated
falsetto. Yet his is not the last word; for after the service comes Liz’s Clarissa Dalloway-
esque party, where East and West will continually intersperse. In working through the
cultural trauma of the dissolution of empire, Drabble has reached a place where she can
moum properly, and then move on by celebrating England’s new, truly postimperial,
passage forward.
235
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. CHAPTER V
“THE THEATRE OF WAR” VS. “MEMORIES OF RIOTS” IN TWO NOVELS BY AMITAV GHOSH
“...[NJothing really important ever happens where you are. Nothing really important? I said incredulously. Well o f course there are famines and riots and disasters, she said. But those are local things, after all — not like revolutions or anti-fascist wars, nothing that sets a political example to the world, nothing that’s really remembered” (102).
“All riots are terrible, Malik said. But it must have been a local thing. Terrible or not, it’s hardly comparable to a war. But don’t you remember? I said. Didn ’t you read about it or hear about it? After all, the war with China didn’t happen on your doorstep, but you remember that. Surely you remember — you mustremember? ” (216).
When the narrator of Amitav Ghosh’s The Shadow Lines is eight, his uncle and
idol, Tridib, explains to him that “Everyone lives in a story.. .my grandmother, my father,
his father, Lenin, Einstein, and lots of other names I hadn’t heard of; they all lived in
stories, because stories are all there are to live in, it was just a question of which one you
choose” (179). This statement—although in its immediate context meant merely to
mollify the narrator—becomes the key which unlocks an important aspect of Ghosh’s
text: that which shows that to create the story of one’s own life is to do so in the midst of
a melange of overlapping and contradictory stories of history, literature, nation, and
family. As the narrator gets older, however, he realizes that where some stories are
concerned, the element of choice is not an option. An avid collector of the life stories of
236
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. certain of his family members, the narrator discovers stories with missing parts, stories
with loudspeakers, stories that hover like a fog, stories that transcend borders and stories
that enforce them, stories he pursues and stories he cannot escape: it gradually becomes
clear to the narrator that to successfully navigate one’s way in the postcolonial world is to
also try to hear the stories that no one has been telling.
In The Shadow Lines, filtering stories is very much a postcolonial project Born
in the early fifties, and a member of a middle class, well-educated family, the
narrator—his name a part of the story the reader never hears—knows stories of England
as well as stories of India. A close friendship had developed between the narrator’s
family and a British colonial administrator, Lionel Tresawsen, and his family. This
friendship and connection to England has continued through to the next generation, and
its importance is emphasized with the very first sentence of the book: “In 1939, thirteen
years before I was bom, my father’s aunt, Mayadebi, went to England with her husband
and her son, Tridib’’ (3). The stories of England, which Tridib later tells to the narrator,
become practically indistinguishable in the narrator’s own mind from events that he has
actually experienced or witnessed: they are that real to him. It is no coincidence, either,
that Tridib finds himself in an England that is on the verge of a World War; for as I have
explained previously in my dissertation, the machinations of empire tend to become
uncloaked during war, and by telling wartime stories, Ghosh has ready access to the
fissures that lead to the present-day empire remains. Ghosh takes this one step further,
however, by using war to show that one of the more insidious remnants of empire is how
the events of western history are prioritized over the events of eastern history. In
“Postcoloniality and the Artifice of History: Who Speaks for ‘Indian’ Pasts?”, Dipesh
237
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Chakrabarty writes that “‘Europe’ remains the sovereign, theoretical subject of all
histories, including the ones we call ‘Indian,’ ‘Chinese,’ ‘Kenyan,’ and so on” (1), and it
is this theme that Ghosh develops in his novel by having his narrator slowly realize how
the wars of the west and stories of it have displaced his own experiences of riots.
The riots the narrator is concerned with were a result of the tensions that exploded
during Partition—tensions which it was indeed part of the British colonial policy in India
to escalate—yet the riots remain local news, mentioned in the back of the newspapers, if
at all, and rarely reaching the history books. The narrator realizes how significant it is
that “There are no reliable estimates of how many people were killed in the riots of 1964.
The number could stretch from several hundred to several thousand; at any rate, not very
many less than were killed in the war of 1962” (225). By making such a point, Ghosh
raises several important questions: What is remembered and whatgets to be remembered
as history? Why isn’t Partition part of the crisis of western and European consciousness?
In the oft-used dichotomy of global versus local, why does “global” so often equal the
western local? How can one keep these dominant narratives from overtaking the
narratives of one’s own life? Such questions will also play a role in Ghosh’s later novel,
The Glass Palace. Although more comprehensive and epic in scope than The Shadow
Lines, The Glass Palace features this same conflict between war and riots when Ghosh
has one of its main story-lines trace the trajectory of a young man proudly rising through
the ranks of the British army in India, to his gradual questioning of such an allegiance,
which leads to his eventual defection to the Indian National Army during World War II.
Having this character, Arjun, be directly involved in both war and the military allows
Ghosh to address in more detail and in a different setting the questions that the narrator of
238
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. The Shadow Lines experiences in libraries and from stories and hearsay: Aijun acts out
what The Shadow Lines's narrator theorizes.
The narrator of The Shadow Lines, as the protagonist of a postcolonial
bildungsroman, tries to find his place in the world by grappling with the stories that
create it. Ghosh specifically uses the art and issue of story-telling to bolster the questions
he sets out to ask and answer about the narratives of war versus the narratives of riots.
While his focus is on how the narratives of war are used to create the idea and concept of
a nation, he also demonstrates how these narratives inevitably rub shoulders with
narratives of different subjects. For example, it is not only stories of history that get
indicted in The Shadow Lines. Since the complicity of literature in producing empire has
often been elucidated, it thus follows that Ghosh will also use literary stories to make his
points. Ghosh borrows the title of his novel itself from Joseph Conrad’s novella, a
literary sea shanty about the shadow line one crosses over from childhood to adulthood.
In the postcolonial world, such shadow lines take on additional meanings; they are also
the lines between (and within) nations, and Ghosh shows how the formation of
contemporary identities can involve multiple crossings. More importantly, however,
Ghosh revisions the quintessential twentieth-century British colonial text, E. M. Forster’s
A Passage To India; The Shadow Lines begins, as we have seen, with an Indian family
making the “reverse” passage from India to England. Ghosh thus highlights the fact that
whereas Forster’s A Passage portrayed aspects of the colonial world, The Shadow Lines
will be dealing with the new, postcolonial, order. Ghosh’s May Price travels to India like
Adela Quested did before her, and, like Adela, unwittingly ends up in the center of a
conflict Whereas in Forster’s novel the conflict only served to solidify the opposing
239
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. mindsets of both the Indians and the English, and thus sent each side back to their comer
of the ring, so to speak, Ghosh’s narrator tries to de-code all the intricacies of the events
set off by May’s visit; it is one more postcolonial story that the narrator will use to read
his world.
Many of the narrator’s dilemmas concern his not knowing how to arrange his
English stories along side of, or behind, his Indian stories. He is so used to having
English stories of England and English stories of India occupying a central position in his
psyche, and thus dominating his view of the world. As a child, listening to and telling
stories is the narrator’s main hobby and talent. The narrator has grown up listening to
Tridib’s stories, as well as being coached by Tridib on justhow to listen to stories: what
to find interesting in a story, what to doubt, what to inquire about further, how to discern
the subtext, as well as how to make out the silent story lurking in the shadows of the main
story. The stories he hears and requests most frequently are Tridib’s accounts of living in
London during World War II. When the narrator begins to see cracks in the facade of
these stories, and when he travels to London as a young adult and finds that he
knows—and prefers—the London he has created in his mind from Tridib’s stories, he is
forced to re-order what he knows, and to try to fit together what he has been told with
what he sees and understands now. It is thus stories which eventually become the
catalyst for what the narrator realizes about East and West. This subtext of learning
through stories, and having the narrator’s reality be a jostling between eastern and
western stories that contradict and overlap each other, works to further support the point
Ghosh makes about western war and eastern riots: the emphasis he places on story
telling reveals the importance of what gets told, and the framework used to tell it. Ghosh
240
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. shows how India, using the western concept of the nation, is “forced” to use the building
blocks of that narrative of nation as well—whether or not these fit in with the reality of
India. The British Empire may have been dismantled, but the detritus left behind is still a
stumbling block; and once again, it is war that is used to reveal the remains. In this
chapter I will show how Ghosh uses the narrator’s focus on stories and story-telling to
uncover the prioritization of war over riots. Such a prioritization is inextricably
connected to the nation being a western concept constructed by western narratives. When
the narrator comes to the realization that he and his classmates know about minor wars
and nothing about major riots, Ghosh portrays this as an aspect of empire that has yet to
be defeated. The narratives of war position India similarly to how colonial
narratives—both historical and literary—positioned India; therefore, the connections
between war and nation have to be severed or revisioned to more accurately reflect a
truly postcolonial nation. This is a dilemma that Ghosh raises and develops to a great
length in The Shadow Lines and returns to inThe Glass Palace.
Pierre Nora, in “Between Memory and History,” establishes memory and history
as opposing forces4, claiming that one of history’s main functions is to decimate memory,
especially all memory that might try to contribute a different kind of story to history’s
narrative. He suggests that history has consumed memory, and that it “is perpetually
suspicious of memory, and its true mission is to suppress and destroy it” (9). The In
Shadow lines, this opposition falls along old empire fault-lines in a debilitating way.
Suvir Kaul writes of how the central question inThe Shadow Lines is “Do you
remember?” (125). The narrator has grown up hearing his family’s stories in great detail,
241
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. and thirsting to hear them over and over. Whenever he had a spare moment, he would
seek out his Uncle Tridib to hear his stories, and Tridib would occasionally oblige, and
“would begin to hold forth on all kinds of subjects—Mesopotamian stelae, East European
jazz, the habits of arboreal apes, the plays of Garcia Lorca...” (9). The narrator wants to
hear everything, although his favorite stories are the ones Tridib tells of living in England
during World War II. The narrator learns war-time London in such detail, that when he
finally travels there in his twenties, the map of London that he has in his head is more
detailed than most native-Londoners’— despite the fact that his map is peppered with the
bombings and rubble of war. Already at this point, then, the narrator is personifying a
postimperial conflict between East and West: events in western history are treated as
standard, universal knowledge, facts that one will know and be well versed in if one is
educated, whereas the same standard does not hold true in reverse. Events of history
have displaced remembered events in the narrator’s mind.
Dipesh Chakrabarty claims that ‘Third-world historians feel a need to refer to
works in European history; historians of Europe do not feel any need to reciprocate” (2).5
Other critics have written about this inequality in terms more specific to Partition in
particular. Gyanendra Pandey writes that “Partition was, for the majority of people living
in what are now the divided territories of northern India, Pakistan and Bangladesh, the
event of the 20th century—equivalent in terms of trauma and consequence to the Fust
World War for Britain or the Second World War for France and Japan” (31); and yet,
when it comes to studying or discussing Partition, there has been an “erasure of
memory”—and this is in the subcontinent itself; for the majority of the West, chances are,
the mentioning of “Partition” would not even conjure up any historical event (31). John
242
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Thieme makes the case that it is Ghosh’s intent to have “World War II function.. .in the
text as a European fracturing experience that parallels the South Asian experience of
Partition” (64). The narrator gradually begins to realize that there is, perhaps, a sinister
side to the multicultural collection of stories that he has grown up hearing, imagining and
learning. It is through stories of war—and their displacement of stories of riots—that the
narrator becomes truly aware of the implications of the dominance of the western
historical narrative.
The narrator’s Grandmother, whom he calls Tha’mma, is a character whose life
showcases the struggle for primacy between the western narratives of war and the eastern
narratives of riots, as well as how inextricably fused nation is with war and its stories.
Tha’mma’s evolving views reveal how she uses war to understand her changing nation,
yet in doing so she is forced to interpose a western—in particular, an
English—framework on India. To make such a framework fit, she has to alter which of
her own memories she champions; as her priorities shift from ridding India of the British
colonial presence to helping India come into its own as a nation, she also shifts from
admiring the clandestine tactics of the resistance to acquiring a fervent, and rather
delirious, belief in the all-out tactics of western war. For Tha’mma, India cannot exist
successfully as a nation until India has had the war experiences of the west War is the
nation’s action story; without it a nation is not a nation, quite.
Tha’mma is, to begin with, one who greatly admires strength; in the first few
pages of the novel we see her connecting personal strength to national strength: “You
can’t build a strong country, she would say, pushing me out of the house, without
building a strong body” (8). She also admires her nephew, Robi (who is the same age as
243
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the narrator) because he is strong. When Tha’mma’s sister complains about Robi getting
into a fight, Tha’imna replies, “Of course Robi had to fight him, she said with a
dismissive flick of her fingers. What else could he have done? Maya ought to be proud
of him. I ’m proud of him; but then, he’s like me, not like Maya” (36). Perhaps it is that
the narrator associates this kind of strength and “heroics” with western ways (and thus
more indicative of his own West/East opinions), but when this incident with Robi
prompts his grandmother to reminisce about her student days and resisting the British, the
narrator is astonished. Tha’mma thinks back to her college days when a lecture was
interrupted by British colonial officials. When the narrator asks if she was frightened,
Tha’mma replies, “not very much; we were quite used to police raids in those days.
There were raids all the time in the colleges and the university. We’d grown up with it.
JFor a brief moment I thought she was joking” (37). Although quite familiar with most
of his grandmother’s stories, the narrator has never heard about resistance to the British,
or even, it seems, the many negative aspects of the British presence —such as these
“interruptions”. These moments have not become part of the history that the narrator
hears. The narrator asks for more information, and since his grandmother hesitates, it is
Tridib who at this point jumps in and describes “the terrorist movement amongst
nationalists in Bengal...the home-made bombs with which they tried to assassinate
British officials and policemen; and a little about the arrests, deportations and executions
with which the British had retaliated” (37). Tha’mma smiles “at the growing
astonishment on my face as 1 tried to fit her into that extraordinary history” (37).
The narrator’s surprise here seems twofold: first, he is surprised that his school
teacher granny was involved in such activities; but second, he is surprised to hear that
244
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. such activities existed. Already an avid scholar, himself, he seems to be unfamiliar with
such resistance; this aspect of Indian history has been “erased”. Pandey writes that “the
history of India since the early nineteenth century has tended to become the biography of
the emerging nation state. It has also become a history in which the story of Partition,
and the accompanying Hindu-Muslim and Muslim-Sikh riots of 1946-47, is given short
shrift” (29). I would argue, however, that Pandey’s “also” is misplaced: it is precisely
because the history of India “has tended to become the biography of the emerging nation
state” that Partition and its riots are glossed over; a nation state is traditionally comprised
of narratives of war and not narratives of riots. Conceiving of India as a nation in the
traditional, western, model automatically utilizes India’s (minor) war experiences while
shelving India’s (major) riot experiences. Additionally, since western narratives have a
more established framework and tend to have a louder voice in the world, it is no
coincidence that the narratives of this time of resistance that have been privileged as
history are the peaceful resistance narratives of Gandhi, the Congress, Nehru, etc. To a
certain extent it seems that these narratives would be most palatable for the British to
swallow: after all, a narrative in which the British Empire was pushed out of India by a
few resistance fighters is not a narrative the English would want to perpetuate. As the
narrator’s grandmother continues on to describe the student the British officials
arrested—a small, skinny, bespectacled youth who Tha’mma had never suspected was a
terrorist—the narrator is hearing such details for the first time. Interestingly, Ghosh
writes that Tha’mma “was fascinated, long before that incident, by the stories she had
heard about the terrorists.... Ever since she heard those stories she had wanted to do
something for the terrorists” (my italics) (38). The grandmother was apparently told
245
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. resistance stories that inspired her and shaped her consciousness; but she has not chosen
to pass these stories on to her grandson. This section ends with Tha’mma telling the
narrator that if she had known who the terrorist was, she would have helped him kill the
British magistrate: “I would have been frightened, she said. But I would have prayed for
strength, and God willing, yes, 1 would have killed him. It was for our freedom: I would
have done anything to be free” (39). This part of his grandmother’s life has not before
made the round of the narrator’s requested stories.
Tha’mma remains hawkish throughout The Shadow Lines, but it is significant that
her sensibilities move away from this kind of resistance and towards the “heroics’ of war.
When the narrator is older, and his beloved cousin, Ila, is living in London, his
grandmother claims that Ila has not earned the right to be there. She states,
It took those people a long time to build that country, hundreds of years, years and years of war and bloodshed.... They know they’re a nation because they’ve drawn their borders with blood. Hasn’t Maya told you how regimental flags hang in all their cathedrals and how all their churches are lined with memorials to men who died in wars, all around the world? War is their religion. That’s what it takes to make a country. Once that happens people forget they were bom this or that, Muslim or Hindu, Bengali or Punjabi: they become a family bom of the same pool of blood. That is what you have to achieve for India, don’t you see? (76)
Tha’mma, here, believes that westem-style war is the only thing that can make a nation
out of India. Her ranting in this speech, however, is not as off-the-cuff or even delusional
as it might at first glance seem. The sentiments voiced in this speech can be connected
directly to trauma Tha’mma witnesses in riots she experiences in a visit across the border.
Tha’mma’s outspoken war sensibilities arise, in part, from her experience
returning to her childhood home of Dhaka—which is, at the time of this journey, part of
East Pakistan. Her sister Maya’s husband has been given a diplomatic post there, and
246
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Tha’mma is convinced to make the visit by the idea of “rescuing” her long-lost (and
estranged) uncle, Jethamoshai, who she has lately learned is living in their old, large,
family home, along with the Muslims who have occupied it post-Partition. The narrator
claims that “her eyes grew misty at the thought of rescuing her uncle from his enemies
and bringing him back where he belonged, to her invented country” (134). Tha’mma is
going to accompany Tridib and May Price (Lionel Tresawsen’s granddaughter) by
airplane, and the narrator and his father become amused when they discover Tha’mma’s
beliefs about the border between India and East Pakistan. She asks if she will be able to
see the border from the plane, saying: “But surely there’s something —trenches perhaps,
or soldiers, or guns pointing at each other, or even just barren strips of land. Don’t they
call it no-man’s land?” (148). When her son explains that there is nothing to see, and that
the “border” is in the airport, she queries,
But if there aren’t any trenches or anything, how are people to know? I mean, where’s the difference then? And if there’s no difference, both sides will be the same; it’ll be just like it used to be before, when we used to catch a train in Dhaka and get off in Calcutta the next day without anybody stopping us. What was it all for then—Partition and all the killing and everything—if there isn’t something in between? (148-9)
Part of Tha’mma’s struggles, here, have to do with the framework she is trying to fit her
experiences into: she is using images from World Wars One and Two, with their
trenches and no-man’s-land and the like. Her experience of being safely out of the
country during Partition, and then having it result in her birthplace all of a sudden
becoming another country with herself as the enemy, is something she does not know
how to reconcile; she cannot fit it into the stories she knows—as it does not fit into the
available war narratives. War should bring a nation together and separate it from its
enemies; it thus follows that if two nations have separated with hostility, then there
247
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. should be left these traces and vestiges of war. Tha’mma returns to this notion in her
speech to the narrator about Ila living in England; when she mentions that “they’ve drawn
their borders with blood” (76), she reminds the reader of her earlier disappointment that
the borders between India and East Pakistan seemed so insubstantial.
Once in Dhaka again, Tha’mma has difficulty meshing the city she sees around
her with the city in her mind. She is taken to the diplomats’ section of Dhaka and when
she says, “But this is for foreigners; where’s Dhaka?” Tridib replies, “But youare a
foreigner now, you’re as foreign here as May—much more than May, for look at her, she
doesn’t even need a visa to come here” (191). Ironically, the English May has access to
East Pakistan—still part of “the Commonwealth”—while the Dhakan Tha’mma is
estranged. This makes her all the more determined to rescue Jethamoshai, who, as it
turns out, is senile and does not want to be rescued. Mirroring some of Tha’mma’s
statements about Dhaka, Jethamoshai mutters, “I don’t believe in this India-Shindia. It’s
all very well, you’re going away now, but suppose when you get there they decide to
draw another line somewhere? What will you do then? Where will you move to?” (211).
Jethamoshai’s disbelief in borders he cannot see is a disbelief that Tha’mma shares. He
states that he was bom in Dhaka and will die there as well; and, as we soon shall see, he
does.
At the time that Tha’mma travels to Dhaka, riots have been igniting all over the
subcontinent—in Calcutta where the narrator is, and in West and East Pakistan. On the
day that everyone goes to And Jethamoshai, there has been temporary calm. But
Jethamoshai does not want to leave with Tha’mma, and is finally talked into going only if
the Muslim man who has been taking care of him will drive him in the rickshaw. They
248
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. set off, with May, Tridib, Tha’mma, and driver in a car, and Jethamoshai traveling
behind. As it turns out, an angry crowd (alerted to their presence by the fancy car) has
been waiting for them and attacks. The windshield is broken, and the driver hurt, yet he
is able to take a gun out and fire in the air, scaring the rioters off. At this moment,
however, the rickshaw catches up to them, and the crowd attacks the rickshaw, killing
Jethamoshai and the rickshaw-walla. May jumps out to help, and starts running to the
crowd, despite the fact that Tha’mma tells her that she will get them all killed. When
May later tells the story to the narrator, she explains: “I didn’t listen; I was a heroine. I
wasn’t going to listen to a stupid, cowardly old woman. But she knew what was going to
happen. Everyone there did, except me. I was the only one who didn’t” (245). May, a
child in London during World War II, might know war and its signs, but she does not
know the signs and rules of riots. This ignorance, which Tha’mma at this point rightfully
berates, is an ignorance that Tha’mma later, post-trauma, will imitate and embrace. At
any rate, at this point Tridib, who also knows the signs of riots, for a variety of reasons
needs to impress the English May; he follows her, and of course, gets pulled into the mob
and killed along with the other two men: May, an Englishwoman, does not get touched.
This story of what happened in Dhaka is most definitely not one that Tha’mma
ever shares with the narrator. In fact, the narrator’s father specifically requests the
narrator not ever to mention or inquire about Tridib’s death, and it is not until May tells
him years later as an adult that he finds out the details of what happened. This trauma
has a curious effect on those who witnessed and survived it. May returns to England, but
responds to her experience by living a life in which she embraces her version of the East
May has a successful career as an oboist in a symphony, but her passions are the
249
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. organizations she works for in her spare time: Amnesty International, Oxfam, and other
relief agencies that help the third world. Although she has a large bed in her studio
apartment, the narrator discovers that she sleeps on the floor. When the narrator asks
why, she explains that “After all, this is how most people in the world sleep. I merely
thought I’d throw in my lot with the majority” (155). The narrator also discovers that on
Saturdays May fasts “because it occurred to me a few years ago that it might not be an
entirely bad idea to go without something every once in a while: who knows what the
future has in store for me—or you, or, for that matter, the human race?” (158). The
narrator then accompanies her to her Saturday job, collecting money out in the crowds of
Oxford and Regent Streets for her various causes. This is not to dispute the worthiness of
her work and causes, but there is an element of penance to this aspect of May’s life. In
her own way she is trying to erase the differences she witnessed between the two nations.
Robi, Tridib’s much younger brother and a first cousin of the narrator’s father,
was also a witness to Tridib’s death. He is the same age as the narrator, yet has a totally
different sensibility—part of which Ghosh suggests might be a reaction to the trauma of
the riots. Like Tha’mma, Robi after the riots fashions an outlook that in many ways turns
to the West Where the narrator sees a multiplicity of possible interpretations, Robi sees
black and white. He is not an unadmirable character—he is always loyal, upright, and
fearless—yet his mindset is one that gets him a successful career in the Indian
Administrative Service (23), “running a district” and motivating policemen to search out
terrorists and the like (241); with such a mindset he is, perhaps, empire’s progeny, as he
turns towards the concrete facts of nation-building. The narrator attends university with
him and there observes how “he had no hesitation in making judgments—because there
250
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. were whole domains of conduct with which he would not admit the possibility of
argument” (81). Robi’s tendency to keep stories out ultimately limits and constricts him.
In contrast to Robi’s silent type, Tha’mma is a talker; and although she does not
tell about her riot experiences, as we have seen, she talks freely of her new-found beliefs
in riot’s opposite: war. Once safely back in Calcutta, Tha’mma finds refuge in the idea
of one nation united by war, which is in stark contrast to what she has just
experienced—one nation divided into two and each still experiencing further
fragmentations by riots between its peoples. It is thus significant that when Tha’mma
lectures the narrator about war and England she claims that “War is their religion” (76).
In Tha’mma’s view, war is the religion that unites England, whereas she sees religion as
being what divides India and causes its riots. War and the idea of a stable, powerful,
united, nation become inextricably connected in Tha’mma’s mind. Curiously, what
Tha’mma is also enacting here is the time-honored tradition of finding refuge in the
propaganda of war stories. Tha’mma, after all, turns to war in direct reaction against
what she has just experienced in the riots, and embraces the propaganda aspect of war as
glory and heroics. True war stories would of course rival the trauma of being a witness to
Tridib’s and Jethamoshai’s deaths in the riots. So like the English before her, war to
Tha’mma becomes “regimental flags” hanging in churches; as the English women did
during World War I, so Tha’mma does when conflict begins between India and Pakistan,
selling her gold necklaces to help the cause. As Tha’mma becomes more and more
infirm, she becomes more obsessed with war, telling the narrator that “This is the only
chance, she cried, her voice rising to a screech. The only one. We’re fighting them
property at last, with tanks and guns and bombs” (232). Because war is always a story to
251
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. her and not a lived experience like the riots, and because she associates war with a
unified nation, Tha’nuna becomes quite the war-mongerer.
Tha’mma is not the only militarist of the bunch, and she is not the only one who
connects war to England and empire. Her sister, Maya, begins the novel by traveling to
England in 1939 with her husband and son. Because her husband has to have an
operation that cannot be done in India, they did not have much of a choice as to when
they went. However, Ghosh portrays wartime in England—for those not on the “right”
side of the us-and-them aspect of the British Empire—as being a rather opportune time
for a visit. For who knows what will happen after the war? For the colonized, chances
are, the change will be better, and this is reflected by Maya’s experience in London at this
time. Maya and her family stay with the Prices—the newly married daughter of Lionel
Tresaw sen, her husband, and their new baby, May. Tresawsen himself remarks to Maya
that she has “chosen an unfortunate time to come to England,” yet Maya respectfully
begs to differ. While acknowledging some worry, Maya says that in many ways it is an
ideal time to be here: “the atmosphere had changed so dramatically, even within the last
few weeks. People were becoming friendlier; in the shops, on the streets...I’ve been
lucky. I’ve been able to watch England coming alive. I wouldn’t have seen that if I
hadn’t been here now” (64-5). About forty years later, the narrator echoes his Great Aunt
Maya’s sentiments. He is measuring the bombed-out London in his mind (as described to
him by Tridib) against the London before him now, and thinks that in many ways he
prefers the London of his mind: “I wanted to know England not as I saw her, but in her
finest hour—every place chooses its own, and to me it did not seem an accident that
England had chosen hers in a war” (57). Raised on the stories he has heard on the subject
252
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. of England and empire and the “theatre of war,” it is not surprising that the narrator is
such a western war aficionado.
The narrator has his own experiences of the trauma of violence, yet because they
are not classifiable under the heading of “War,” he thinks he has no use for them, and
they remain forgotten for about fifteen years, until triggered by a conversation with
friends at his university. The riot in question occurred when the narrator was about
ten—at the same time that his grandmother, Tridib, and May were visiting Dhaka.
Muslim/Hindu violence has been sweeping across the country, yet the narrator has not
(perhaps understandably, given his age at the time) heard of it. Ironically, the day begins
with everyone talking about an India/England cricket match scheduled to take place later
that afternoon. This overt East/West sports competition will get more news coverage
than the riots that will occur at the same time; the “competition” between types of
violence and between what gets remembered, remains under the surface. Discord—albeit
athletic—between countries is an established and more acceptable narrative than discord
within one country. The narrator heads off to the bus station, eager to see his friends to
discuss the cricket match. Most of his friends, however, are not there, and when the bus
arrives, it is practically empty. The few on the bus tell the narrator of a rumor about
Muslims poisoning the neighborhood wells. Their morning classes are continually
punctuated by strange sounds coming from the city outside. Again, whereas the narrator
has heard the sounds of bombs described, and “knows,” for instance, that to hear the
whistle of a bomb falling from the sky followed by a strange silence means the bomb is
about to explode nearby, knows the sounds of demonstrations, and knows the sounds of a
253
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. roaring crowd, in contrast, he has never heard or, more importantly, heard o/the sound of
riots: “a torn, ragged quality; a crescendo of discords” (197).
School is let out early, and when the narrator gets back on the bus for the ride
home, he sees that the school is surrounded by armed police. As the narrator looks out
the window, he does not recognize the city he sees. He says that “The streets had turned
themselves inside out” (199) and notices that a lot of streets have an abandoned rickshaw
at the end of them: “there was something about the angle at which it had been placed that
was eloquent of an intent we could not fathom: had it been put there to keep Muslims in
or Hindus out?” (199). The narrator—who later navigates around London by recalling
Tridib’s details about what was bombed and what was not—cannot “read” the signs of
the riots in his home city of Calcutta. Remembering this bus-ride, the narrator tries to
describe the fear he and his friends experienced, and cannot quite find the right words to
use. He says that “It is without analogy, for it is not comparable to the fear of nature,
which is the most universal of human fears, nor to the fear of the violence of the state,
which is the commonest of modem fears”—in other words, it is not the fear experienced
by, say, the English. It is not so much that what he felt was “without analogy," but that it
does not fit in with the kinds of discord he has read and heard stories about: again, the
discord of “the violence of the state” and not the violence that might occur within the
state (200). In Indian Traffic: Identities in Question in Colonial and Postcolonial, India
Parama Roy questions that “If the nation has always to be coaxed into existence, if the
idea of the nation is not native, is always imported, then who or what constitutes the
national subject?” (85). This is the same question Ghosh is having the narrator
experience during the riots, for the narrator begins to realize that the national subject he is
254
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. familiar with is the English and their national experiences. Even in families where stories
of the riots of Partition were frequently told and explained, the narrative of India’s
nationhood that children from these families then learned in schools did not necessarily
support what they were told at home. In the collection of Partition narratives assembled
and analyzed in The Other Side o f Silence, Urvashi Butalia emphasizes the effect of such
a discrepancy, explaining how “someone [like herself] who had grown up on stories of it
[Partition], stories that somehow did not match what we learnt at school, stories that,
perhaps because of that, we discounted” (275). The narrator ofThe Shadow Lines—raised
on family stories that are international, yet primarily western in bent, in which, when a
nation struggles it does so in a war setting—is not able to put what he is now
experiencing into any sort of known context; he does not even have the language to use,
and continually describes these riots in the terminology of war, despite the fact that he is
beginning here to realize how different this experience is from a “World” War, claiming
that “It is this that sets apart the thousand million people who inhabit the subcontinent
from the rest of the world...it is the special quality of loneliness that grows out of the fear
of the war between oneself and one’s image in the mirror” (200)—a “war,” of course,
which manifests itself via riots.
The narrator’s recollection of this event is prompted by a discussion at university
of the war against China. He and his friends remember the jubilation they felt, before
India lost, swiftly: “we recalled how quickly we had taught ourselves to distinguish the
shapes of their aircraft from ours, how our mothers had donated bangles and earrings for
the cause, how we’d stood at street-corners, taking collections and selling little paper
flags” (215). Take out the “bangles,” and there is nothing to distinguish this depiction of
255
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. a moment in mid-century Indian childhood from a moment in mid-century English
childhood. When his friends proclaim that this event was the most serious national event
of their childhood, the narrator brings up the Calcutta riots, and discovers that no one
knows what he is talking about When the narrator claims that the riots were “terrible,”
his friend Malik replies, “All riots are terrible... But it must have been a local thing.
Terrible or not, it’s hardly comparable to a war” (216). Bhabha writes that “the language
of culture and community is poised on the fissures of the present becoming the rhetorical
figures of a national past” (294), and that is precisely what the narrator is witnessing here.
The war against China fit nicely into the traditional rhetoric of the narratives of nation,
and thus gets told and remembered as history; in contrast, the riots that the narrator
experienced fall into these same fissures and become at best a “local” event remembered
on a personal level, and at worst forgotten. Riots are cordoned off into the negligible
category of “the local,” whereas in contrast, war gets to be a remembered national event
War will always be prioritized amongst the narratives of nation, whether or not war really
is a central subject in the story of this particular nation. The narrator suddenly finds this
unacceptable. Getting rather frantic, now, he counters with “But don’t youremember ?
Didn’t you read about it or hear about it? After all, the war with China didn’t happen on
your doorstep, but you rememberthatl Surely you remember—youmust remember?”
(216). They do not And so Malik, a good sport, accompanies the narrator to the library,
so that the narrator can look up the newspapers from 1964 and prove that the riots
occurred. At the library, Malik points out a certain shelf, which
was the section on the war of 1962. There were whole shelves of books on the war—histories, political analyses, memoirs, tracts—weighty testimony to the eloquence of war. He pointed out another set of shelves, smiling broadly: it was the section on the 1965 war with Pakistan.... But
256
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. after half an hour we still hadn’t found anything on my remembered riots. (217)
The narrator is literally experiencing here the sublation of “the local” by war—the grand
narrative of the nation. This is the framework that enables war to ripen into history: the
“histories, political analyses, memoirs, tracts” stored in the library to refresh and
refashion what is remembered. Again, we see here what Pierre Nora claims: that one of
history’s main functions is to decimate memory (9).
At this point the narrator is getting upset that he “had lived for all those years with
a memory of an imagined event” (218), and since the greater portion of the novel has
consisted of the narrator thriving on his vicarious experiences which are, to him,
“imagined events,” his sudden distress makes the reader take note. Asha Sen writes that
“The violence that erupts on both personal and political levels rescues The Shadow Lines
from its colonial nostalgia and emphasizes the danger of identifying with the petrified
images of the past” (55); what is significant here, however, is that it is not the violence
alone that is making the narrator change his way of thinking, but the reporting and
recording of this violence. He is beginning to discern how it is only certain events that
get to be included in the narrative of nation. While writing about the work of Edward
Said, Aamir Mufti shows the “exclusionary nature” of “national belonging,” and how “it
can be achieved only by rendering certain cultural practices,certain institutions,certain
ethical positions representative of ‘the people’ as such” (239). What Ghosh is illustrating
in The Shadow Lines is how closely connected these “certain positions” are to the certain
positions privileged in and by nations of the west. It is an aspect of empire that has yet to
be dismantled. The fact that the narrator’s friends have never heard of these riots make
257
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the narrator—who experienced them—question whether or not they ever happened. We
see, here, the selectivity of national history at work.
Using Mufti’s essay on Edward Said’s secular criticism can further help elucidate
the significance of what Ghosh has his narrator discover here. Mufti begins this essay by
calling attention to Said’s creation and use of the construct “secular criticism’’—which
Mufti posits is as significant as other elements of Said’s work which have received the
lion’s share of attention, such as Orientalism and contrapuntal reading. Mufti claims that
Said’s use of “secular” has often been misunderstood as the opposite of religion, and thus
has lead to accusations of Said’s championing a kind of elite cosmopolitanism (232).
However, “Said’s use of the word secular is therefore catachrestic, in the sense that
Gayatri Spivak has given to the term—that is, it is a meaningful and productive misuse”
(239), and as such is in opposition not to religion but to nationalism and its narratives.
Furthermore, Said conceives of secular criticism as criticism that should always be
“enunciated fromminority positions” (239), which he envisions as potentially the only
equitable place for power to originate. Mufti writes that secular criticism “means
rescuing the marginalized perspective of the minority as one from which to rethink and
remake universalist (ethical, political, cultural) claims, thus displacing its assignation as
the site of the local” (Mufti 244). What is useful here for my reading of The Shadow
Lines is how Said is also using “local” catachrestically. For Mufti explains that Said
conceives of the minority position as encompassing the “local attentions” of all positions;
the example he uses has to do with the Palestinians and Islamic identity: in that case “the
‘local attentions’ with which Palestinians combat their dispersed condition” would be
seen in the context of secular criticism as “the ‘local attentions’ of all Palestinians to their
258
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. lives” (243), which could have the effect of “displacing fundamentalism’s sense of itself
as a counter-universal” (243). Such a need for all “local attentions” to be included
in—and thus form a new—universal (which would also be a true counteruniversal to the
western narrative of nation) is precisely what Ghosh has his narrator comprehend when
he begins to uncover the local stature of riots as contrasted by the national status of war.
In the nomenclature of the nation state, riots are local experiences and as such do not
make it into the majority narratives of war. Ghosh’s narrator is at this moment beginning
to realize that such narrative hegemony needs to be interrupted.
The narrator and Malik finally do find a reference to riots—only the reference
they find is to riots that were occurring that same day in Pakistan: mirror-image riots
with the majority Muslims attacking the minority Hindus. Malik leaves, while the
narrator, stubborn and frantic, remains searching through the bound volumes of Calcutta
Dailies. In Imagined Communities, Benedict Anderson has written of how it was no
coincidence that the western concept of the nation came into prominence at the same time
as the novel and the newspaper (25). The narrator’s experience here illustrates that
confluence: while searching for proof that the riots he remembers are not just imagined
events, the narrator comes face to face with one aspect of how the story of a nation is
cemented as factual history—that is, what events make it to the front page of the
newspapers, triggering conversation and discussion the next day, and then existing in
archives for people like Malik and the narrator to consult What brings the narrator’s
search to fruition, ironically, is his memory of that cricket match against England that
was occurring on the same day. He finds the cricket match in the sports section, and is at
first disappointed when he turns to the front page of that issue and sees that “the lead
259
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. story had nothing to do with riots of any kind, nor with Calcutta: it was about the 68th
session of the Congress Party in Bhubaneshwar” (218). Ironically, this article quotes the
party president who “had extended an invitation to everyone who had faith in the
ideology of socialism and democracy to come together in the common task of building a
new society” (218); the narrator then sees a small blurb on the bottom of the page
mentioning riots, but as mentioned above these are the riots in Pakistan. It is not until
Malik has already left that the narrator finds significant coverage of his riots in the paper
from the following day—although the front page is split between coverage of these riots
and coverage of the India/England cricket match. Too little, too late: his epiphany has
already begun.
In his article “In Defense of the Fragment: Writing About Hindu-Muslim Riots in
India Today,” Gyanendra Pandey writes of how violence in India is treated, historically,
as “aberration and as absence” and not part of “the ‘real’ history of India at all” (27). He
explains that
The ‘history’ of violence is, therefore, almost always about context—about everything that happens around violence. The violence itself is taken as ‘known.’ Its contours and character are simply assumed; its forms need no investigation. (27)
But what Ghosh shows in The Shadow Lines is that the “aberration and absence” of the
violence of riots is filled in by the forms and frameworks of the violence of war, whose
surfaces and trappings are “known.” For example, when the war against China begins,
the narrator’s father comes home and explains it all to the young narrator, who then
follows its progress daily with his friends, waving flags, looking at maps, etc. His
grandmother, as we have seen, sells her gold jewelry; people donate blood. When the
riots occur half a year later, however, no one knows how to respond—there seems to be
260
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. no lexicon to use and no instructions to follow. This violence is “known” on a personal
and local level, but is not investigated or archived on a national level; it therefore remains
the absence which does not become part of the real and proclaimed history of India. The
narrator’s favorite uncle, Tridib, is brutally killed in the riots in Dhaka, and all the
narrator really knows about it is that Tridib died in an accident His father makes the
narrator promise that he will never speak of Tridib’s death to his friends at the park:
“You know that Meshomoshai—Tridib’s father—is a very important man in the
government? He doesn’t want people to hear about this—it has to be kept secret, so you
mustn’t talk about it” (234). The narrator is perplexed, thinking ‘There was nothing to
talk about: an accident was such a petty way to die” (234). What is significant about this
moment are the restrictions placed upon the narrator’s telling of the incident; he is not to
turn it into a narrative, because it has no place in the national narrative. Thinking it was
just an accident, the narrator sees the cause of Tridib’s death as “petty”; what, then,
would the narrator at this young age not consider to be a “petty way to die”? A heroic
war death? Homi Bhabha writes of how the national culture always needs to be recited
(303); the flip side to this, of course, is that what is not considered to be part of the
national culture is then forced to remain silent. This is what Mufti claims that Said
addresses with his call for secularism. Mufti argues that ‘To turn minority into the
language and gesture of an affiliative community is to critique the flliadve claims of
majority; it is to interrupt the narratives of filiation through which the meanings of
majority and minority are determined, fixed, and internalized” (252). To interrupt the
narratives is the first step towards changing the perceptions of how things are, on which
the power of the majority relies. The narrator’s meshomoshai, with his position of power
261
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. in the government, does not want to be connected to the riots, the narratives of which the
nation state has no use for, no matter how they are constructed and told. What the
narrator begins to realize as an adult, however, is what it means that these particular
events are silenced, and that the fact that the nation has no use for these narratives reveals
much about how the nation constructs itself and the origins of its innate criteria. The
narrator is discerning exactly what Butalia concludes about the personal Partition
narratives she has collected: ‘They illuminate what one might call the ‘underside’ of its
history. They are the ways in which we can know this event In many senses, they are
the history of the event” (8).
Thinking back on the events as an adult, the narrator sees the importance—and
the rather sinister technique—of such a silence. He realizes that “Every word I write
about those events of 1964 is the product of a struggle with silence” (213), and then
tellingly continues on:
All I know of it is what it is not. It is not, for example, the silence of an imperfect memory. Nor is it a silence enforced by a ruthless state —nothing like that: no barbed wire, no check-points to tell me where its boundaries lie. (213)
It is not, as he acknowledges, a lack of memory, but rather a memory on its own without
the framework that is used to prop memory up: no newspaper article analysis, no street-
comer discussions, no entries in the history books. It is no coincidence here that the
narrator reverts—like his grandmother when talking of the borders between India and
East Pakistan—to war imagery, for his memory is part of an absence because it is
memory of a form of violence which does not fit into the traditional narratives of war.
Pandey proposes that there is seemingly a paradox that violence creates, since violence
“produces the necessity of evidence gathering...but violence also wipes out
262
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. ‘evidence’...” (35). There is a slippage to violence that appears inherent. In England,
one way of masking such slippage has been the theatrics of war—Tha’mma’s regimental
flags hanging in cathedrals, the jewelry-selling, the following of the war’s progress with
maps, etc.—and wartime propaganda. But again, for obvious reasons, the violence of
riots cannot be treated similarly. In his oft-cited “What is a Nation?”, Ernst Renan,
writing in the 1880’s, made the claim that “Forgetting, I would even go so far as to say
historical error, is a crucial factor in the creation of a nation” and that “the essence of a
nation is that all individuals have many things in common, and also that they have
forgotten many things” (11). Good advice, perhaps, but Renan is referring to how French
citizens, for example, need to have forgotten violent events in “the thirteenth century”;
forgetting violence that took place only half a century ago, and which still reverberates
causing violence today, is a more difficult matter. Urvashi Butalia reaches the conclusion
that regarding Partition, one has to remember in order to eventually forget—that
remembering functions as the beginning of a kind of healing (19). Aamir Mufti asserts
that a Saidian critique “implies not proceeding as if Partition never took place, but rather
rigorously examining what precisely it means” (249). The opinions regarding silence,
then, are quite noisy. They do raise the question, however, of whether or not the silence
that the narrator of The Shadow Lines has discovered is a negative thing. The narrator is
not so sure. His silence is regarding violence experienced by a generation removed from
Partition, yet it can be said to originate with Partition. Ghosh has him discourse about
this silence at quite some length, alternately accepting it and raging against it. He
reminds himself that he “grew up believing in the truth of the precepts that were available
to me”—again, western precepts, and western meanings (214). Eventually, and perhaps
263
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. inevitably, the narrator’s musing brings him back to the lexicon of nations and war. He
relates, “I believed in the reality of nations and borders.... The only relationship my
vocabulary permitted between those separate realities was war or friendship” (214); when
confronted with violence within a nation, there is no model of response upon which he
can rely.
Types of violence become prioritized, with war ending up “greater than” riots;
and thus, even though the narrator begins to realize what is going on, he will continue to
be confronted by the mindset which used to be his: an example of this is his argument
with Ila which I used as the epigraph to this chapter, and in which she claims that war is
an important event, one that becomes history and one that serves as an example for
generations to come, where, in contrast, riots remain local events, “nothing that sets a
political example to the world, nothing that’s really remembered” (102). Such denial is
going to have an effect on how India sees itself in comparison to other nations, for as
Pandey writes, “the experience of violence is in crucial ways constitutive of our
‘traditions,’ our sense of community, our communities and our history” (41). The
narrator gets a sense of the narrative contortions that need to be performed in order for
Indian communities to achieve a “sense of community” and “history” that mirrors that of
the west, when he hears Tha’mma’s views on how England is a nation because of its
wars, and Ha’s views on how war is a historical event whose importance is worldwide; by
analyzing the significance of such statements, he catches a glimpse of the slippage that
exists between the stories that could make up India’s history and the stories that actually
are allowed to be that history. Cathy Caruth claims, “history, like trauma, is never simply
one’s own, that history is precisely the way we are implicated in each other’s traumas”
264
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. (24), but the point that Ghosh is trying to make here is that India’s history is still too
often more England’s history than its own, and that additional trauma is formed by the
silencing of the trauma of riots, which have no role in the nation-forming of the west.
When the narrator realizes that “the memory of the riots vanished into the usual cloud of
rhetorical exchanges” (225), he is experiencing an epiphany that is at the heart of
Ghosh’s novel: that violence that does not fit into the war framework must be analyzed
on its own terms, for if it is seen only or primarily in western terms, silence tends to be
the result 'The theatre of war, where generals meet, is the stage on which states disport
themselves: they have no use for memories of riots” (226). Generals may not, but the
narrator of The Shadow Lines must find a use for such memories and speak from the
wings.
ThroughoutThe Shadow Lines, Ghosh constructs a meticulous framework that
bolsters the narrator’s growing realizations about the specific silences surrounding riots
and the noises surrounding war. This is a framework that emphasizes and explores all of
the facets of story-telling, including both its high and low moments, its fantasies,
delusions, strengths, escapes and politics. Whereas Bhabha claims that “From the
margins of modernity, at the insurmountable extremes of storytelling, we encounter the
question of cultural difference as the perplexity of living, and writing, the nation” (311),
Ghosh’s narrator is wrestling with the truths of nation that these “extremes of
storytelling”—which he is trying to surmount—enable him to discover. It is what he
realizes about the cultural differences of “competing” stories that really contribute to his
knowledge of the implications of supposedly postcolonial nations. His special
265
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. relationship to story-telling ultimately allows him to acquire an insight that he could not
have obtained otherwise.
Story-telling is a completely integral part of the character of the narrator, and in
many ways, Ghosh establishes the narrator as being a kind of prodigy when it comes to
stories. Everyone’s lives are created from stories, and as the narrator has learned from
Tridib, if you do not choose a story to live in, you are not choosing a blank slate, but
rather unwittingly inviting in the versions and “interpretations” of others. The narrator’s
awareness of his relation to stories is distinguished in part by how Ghosh portrays other
characters’ relations to stories and story-telling. Ila, with whom the narrator is in many
ways obsessed, has quite a different relation to stories than the narrator does; her method
regarding stories is not portrayed with any redeeming features. Ghosh uses Ila to “expose
the fictionality of colonial narratives of truth, freedom, and nation” (Sen 51), and thus,
whereas at first the narrator sees Ila as a world traveler, and is envious of how she grew
up living in cities all over the world, he comes to realize what has been evident to the
reader all along: Ila lives in western stories while wearing blinders—she fits her life to
these stories, no matter what the result This difference between Ila and the narrator is
evident even when they are children. The narrator, filled with Tridib’s stories, tells Ila of
how “I longed to visit Cairo, to see the world’s first pointed arch in the mosque of Ibn
Tulun, and touch the stones of the Great Pyramid of Cheops” (20). He realizes after a
while that Ila is not listening to him and that she is “frowning with concentration”;
finally, she “gave herself a satisfied nod, and said aloud, inadvertently: Oh yes, Cairo,
the Ladies is way on the other side of the departure lounge” (20). Her guarded attention
to mundane factual details contrasts with the narrator’s more imaginative approach.
266
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Ila “lived in a present which was like an airlock in a canal, shut away from the
tidewaters of the past and the future by steel floodgates” (30). When she visits the
narrator in Calcutta, she brings her yearbooks and tells of her adventures in her
international school—adventures that are rather cardboard tales of popularity and
swashbuckling blond admirers, and which the narrator eventually discovers never
happened, for Ila was, in reality, shy and an outsider. When they are both in their
twenties, the narrator always tries to reminisce with Ila, and to get her to remember some
of their childhood moments together, but Ila will not acquiesce. These stories do not fit
into how she sees her life, and thus the narrator “could not persuade her that a place does
not merely exist, that it has to be invented in one’s imagination; that her practical,
bustling London was no less invented than mine, neither more nor less true, only very far
apart” (21). This inability of Ila’s is very much portrayed as her greatest shortcoming.
Until Tridib’s tragic death, it was Tridib’s stories that the narrator heard, liked,
and learned from the most—claiming on the first page of the novel that they were such a
part of his life that they were like tying his shoes or brushing his teeth (3); they were, in
other words, part and parcel of his routine. Tridib was well-educated and observant, and
told stories about everything; however, it was his stories about his stay in England that
caught the narrator’s fancy. Tridib was in London at the beginning of World War II, and
his family was staying with the Prices, a family known to Tridib’s family through their
active participation as colonial administrators for the British Empire in India; it is
therefore inevitable—and significant—that stories of war and empire become
interspersed with the stories in the narrator’s personal “collection.” Tridib is eight and
his mother is twenty-nine when they make their first passage to England; the narrator tells
267
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. us on the first page of the novel that he himself is eight and Tridib is twenty-nine when he
first begins to hear Tridib’s stories. Tridib is therefore positioned as the narrator’s
intellectual father figure; the narrator wants to please Tridib and to follow in his
footsteps. He cannot picture what Tridib looked like at eight, so ”[i]n the end, since I
had nothing to go on, I had decided that he had looked like me” (3). The narrator has
chosen his mentor well, for Tridib is portrayed as being an excellent teacher in many
ways. He is very knowledgeable and teaches the narrator factual information, but he is
most effective in teaching the narrator what to hear when someone tells a story, and that
what is emphasized is not necessarily what is important. For example, the narrator is
with Tridib at one point when Ila and her family are visiting. Ila’s mother tells a story of
an incident that just happened to Ila while living in Sri Lanka: in short, she begins by
describing their house and yard and then segues into the story of a huge monitor lizard (a
thala-goya) who had adopted their backyard as its new habitat. They were terrified of it
at first, but their servants, who were local, convinced them that it was good luck and a
welcome neighbor. One day Ila was reading a book outside and had an unfortunate
encounter with a poisonous snake; the snake is about to bite Ila, when the thala-goya
comes lumbering over and chases away the snake. Ila’s mother asks the narrator what he
thinks of this story, and the narrator “glanced instinctively towards Tridib” and saw that
Tridib “was waiting to hear what I’d have to say, and I didn’t want to disappoint him”
(28). The narrator, after giving it some thought, asks Ila’s mother “whether the snake
was of the species Boidae or Elapidae” and immediately sees that Tridib is disappointed.
As they leave a bit later, ’Tridib said to me casually that, if one thought about it, there
was nothing really very interesting about snakes—after all, if I saw one in the lake, for
268
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. example what would I do? I’d come back home and tell eveiyone and then forget about
it" (28). The narrator suspects that Tridib is “leading up to something else” and
eventually Tridib asks, “Did you notice that Ila’s house had a sloping roof?” (29). Tridib
leaves and the narrator at first remains completely confused:
But later that evening, and for many evenings afterwards.. .1 puzzled over what Tridib had said, and in a while I began to imagine the sloping roofs of Colombo for myself: the pattern they made if one wheeled in the sky above them, how sharply they rose if one looked at them from below, the mossiness of their dies when one saw them close up, from a first-floor window, and soon I felt that I too could see how much more interesting they were than the snake and the lizard, in the very ordinariness of their difference. (29)
In this way Tridib instructs the narrator to be a discriminating listener. As such, it is
logical that the narrator, as listener, will be the one to notice the “one note” quality of the
stories of war.
Tridib, in this example and in numerous others, does not just tell stories to the
narrator he teaches him how to survive on them and how to actively use them. The
narrator does learn from other family members as well. He combines his grandmother’s
version of the Dhaka of her youth with Robi’s contemporary version of it, making it “a
part of my own secret map of the world, a map of which only I knew the keys and the co
ordinates, but which was not for that reason any more imaginary than the code of a safe is
to a banker” (190-1). But, as the narrator explains, ‘Tridib had given me worlds to travel
in and he had given me eyes to see them with” (20). Tridib teaches technique to the
narrator. Nivedita Bagchi claims that “This, then, is the narratorial task of Ghosh’s
novel—to examine every narrative, establish its credibility...and, finally suggest the
veracity of one narrative over other narratives” (195). But “suggesting the veracity of
one narrative over other narratives” is what Ghosh has the narrator gradually realize is the
269
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. problem; such prioritizing is a habit the narrator has acquired after Tridib’s death, and it
is a habit he has to unlearn. After a fight with Ila in London, the narrator wonders
“whether I was alone in knowing that I could not live without the clamor of the voices
within me” (88); he has learned that a multiplicity of stories is necessary, and is
beginning to leant how to clear space for the quieter voices—the voices which tell of
riots instead of war, passages from India, the gradually realized interest of sloping roofs
instead of the immediate gratification of tales of snakes and lizards.
The narrator’s close association with viewing the world through a multitude of
stories throws into relief the silence surrounding the riots that he and his family
experienced in the early sixties. Once he realizes that the silence is there, the narrator
simply cannot treat it lightly or as an oversight: it is a particularly loud silence that
threatens to overwhelm the “clamor of the voices within me” which he knows he cannot
live without (88). The narrator thus apprehends that the silence itself is significant, yet
equally so is what has been talked about instead: the war with China, the war with
Pakistan—all these events which his friend Malik so confidently termed “the most
important thing that happened in the country when we were children” (214). An aspect
of the narrator’s rapport with stories that closely connects to war usurping the narrative
place of riots is how central a role England plays in the majority of the stories that he
hears and scrutinizes. Ghosh is not merely exploring how some stories are more
powerfully articulated than others, but rather he is expressly dissecting the phenomenon
of English stories displacing Indian stories as a way that the still-functioning arm of
empire continues to exercise a stranglehold on its former colonies. As the narrator
realizes what is occurring on a political level with war and riots, he simultaneously is
270
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. reaching the conclusion that the same thing is occurring on a personal level with the
stories of his own psyche.
In Rosemary Marangoly George’s book. The Politics of Home: Postcolonial
Relocations and Twentieth-Century Fiction, she compares and contrasts the construction
of the idea of home with the construction of the idea of the nation, arguing that whereas
the case for the connection between novel and nation has already been made, a similar,
yet heretofore neglected, case can be made that “The search for the location in which the
self is ‘at home’ is one of the primary projects of twentieth-century fiction in English”
(3). George challenges and expands the traditional definition of “home”; she is not using
it in the kitchen sampler sense. For George, home encompasses “a pattern of select
inclusions and exclusions. Home is a way of establishing difference.. .Home.. .long with
gender/sexuality, race, and class, acts as an ideological determinant of the subject” (2);
therefore George claims that “homes are not neutral places. Imagining a home is as
political an act as is imagining a nation” (6). This is also true for the stories in which the
narrator of The Shadow Lines is at home. For example, in a reversal of the Great Game,
the narrator learns Tridib’s stories so well that he also learns a map of London; when he
later visits London for the first time, he is able to navigate perfectly by using what Tridib
has described to him as a guide. As a young adult, however, these stories begin to lose
their luster a bit: the narrator tells his beloved relation, Ila, that he is not free, “at least in
London” (31), and that he is trapped by all the stories and images in his head. He is
conflicted, for he both wants to escape these stories while at the same time preferring
them: “I wanted to know England not as / saw her, but in her finest hour—every place
chooses its own, and to me it did not seem an accident that England had chosen hers in a
271
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. war” (57). However, is this “choice” that he mentions really England’s choice, or is it the
narrator’s own? And if so, what are the implications? It seems apparent that at least on
one level, the narrator—like his great aunt Maya before him—might enjoy London
during a war more than the native Londoners might, and that this enjoyment is connected
to what the war means for the British Empire. The Empire-at-war and on the precipice of
decline, is emblematic of a bevy of nascent possibilities for those from the soon-to-be
former colonies. The narrator’s continued return to this moment in England’s past shows
an at least unconscious awareness of what this specific time could potentially be opening
up for him. The seed has been planted here for all the major awakenings the narrator is
on the verge of experiencing regarding the stories he lives by.
One of the ways Ghosh addresses the issue of a conflict existing between the
articulation of the western concept of the nation and the eastern reality is to make The
Shadow Lines an explicitly postcolonial response to the colonial novel. The Shadow
Lines contains characters who are postcolonial versions of specific recognizable types
that populated colonial novels, and Ghosh frequently has his novel correspond in reverse
to E M. Forster’s A Passage To India, the touchstone English colonial text. As
mentioned previously, he does this right with the first sentence of the book. The reader is
immediately confronted with the fact that the passages in this novel are from east to west,
and that a new world order is coming into being. There are more details which establish
that this novel has connections to A Passage, yet is set on the other side of 1947. Like A
Passage, The Shadow Lines has an Englishwoman travel to India: Forster’s Adela
Quested makes the journey to see if she could stand marrying an English colonial
administrator and becoming part of the colonizers’ community there, and Ghosh’s May
272
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Price makes her journey to see if she wanted to further a romantic relationship with
Tridib, as well as to witness the damage that England did to India. Forster’s Mrs. Moore
becomes agitated and perhaps a bit senile after her trip to the caves, while Ghosh's
Tha’mma suffers similarly after her experience in the riots in Dhaka. Both elderly
women speak words of wisdom about relationships in the midst of some rather shocking
ranting and raving.
And then there are the obvious differences: as Robert Dixon writes, “The
characters in Ghosh’s novels do not occupy discrete cultures, but ‘dwell in travel’ in
cultural spaces that flow across borders” (4). This is in stark contrast to the English in
India in A Passage, who try to create pockets of England in India and who want to “share
nothing with the [Indian] city except the overarching sky” (Forster 8). Ghosh also makes
sure to portray a marked difference in outlook between travelers in his novel versus
travelers in Forster’s. In contrast to the very first page of A Passage, where Forster
conveys the English viewpoint of India as being “The very wood seems made of mud, the
inhabitants of mud moving” (7), Ghosh’s narrator is thrilled to be in London—to such an
extent that he frequently embarrasses the more experienced Ila. The narrator tells of how
when Ila would suggest going out somewhere, the narrator “would jump to my feet and,
before I knew it, I would cry: Yes, let’s go, let’s go on the Underground” (21). His
excitement irritated Ila, who would eventually remark, “For God’s sake stop carrying on
like a third-world tapioca farmer—it’s just the bloody Underground” (21). The narrator’s
obvious, and perhaps somewhat colonial, excitement over finally being in the London he
has heard so many stories about is tempered by the postcolonial Ila’s blasd attitude to the
city. The new porosity and multicultural aspect of nations and cities, especially London,
273
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. is also something that is emphasized and stands in contrast to Forster’s world. At one
point the narrator comments on how “the experience of hearing Bengali dialects which I
had never heard in Calcutta being spoken in the streets of London was still replete with
unexplored ironies” (236). These differences strikingly add to the effect of the realization
the narrator makes regarding war and riots, for they emphasize how different the
postimperial world has become. Bengali dialects in London! The world travels of the
narrator and his family! All contribute to the narrator’s surprise that empire’s influence is
in no way completely dislodged.
In addition to including allusions to E M. Forster’s colonial text,A Passage To
India, Ghosh creates a character, Nick Price, who functions as a colonial anachronism in
the postcolonial world, and thus as one of the tools of the narrator’s burgeoning
consciousness. Nick Price is an Englishman who was bom about one hundred years too
late. He is the much younger sibling of May Price, and thus comes from a family with a
history of serving the Empire in India. In contrast to May, who thinks the British Empire
performed atrocities in India, Nick regrets empire’s demise. Ghosh makes Nick Price the
sort who seems to have grown up reading the boys’ adventure stories that prepared their
readers for a role in empire, and thus, when he comes of age in the postimperial world, he
is unable to adapt. Fifty years ago Nick could have been one of the Administrators in
Forster’s Chandrapore: racist and entitled. With the dissolution of empire, however,
Nick is left with nothing to do. When Nick was a boy, he always said he wanted to be
like his grandfather, Lionel Tresawsen; but we leara—via the narrator’s many stories
—what Tresawsen was like, and he was the exception to the rule of empire, with his thirst
for travel, his treatment of all people as equals, his kindness, intelligence, and open mind.
274
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Nick, in contrast, is the opposite of all these qualities. When May is in India and
spending time with the young narrator, the narrator asks May many questions about Nick,
who he knew of through his cousin, Ila. May tells the narrator that when Nick is finished
with school, “He’s going to join a firm of chartered accountants, and once they’ve trained
him he’s going to get a nice job with a huge salary—preferably abroad, not in England.
England’s gone down the drain, he says” (52). Nick, then, will work outside of England
to escape its downfall, and not to perpetuate its domain.
Nick is portrayed as a cowardly buffoon who cannot achieve success in the
contemporary world. He does work as an accountant in Kuwait for a few years, and
when the narrator meets him in England, he has just returned from there—supposedly
having quit his job, although May later implies that Nick was fired because of
embezzlement Nick seems in no hurry to get a new job, and during a Christmas dinner
which Ila and the narrator also attend, Nick proclaims drunkenly:
Now Grandpa Tresawsen had a good time. How wonderful it must have been to go around the world like that: like some great Dickensian show on a stage. There’s never been anything like it before and there’ll never be anything like it again.... And what did / get? he said. Bloody old Kuwait. That’s what comes of being bom too late. (106)
Nick clearly feels disenfranchised by the loss of the availability of the role he might have
performed in colonial times. However, Nick does get what the narrator wants: Ila and
her love. Nick and Ila marry, which solves Nick’s job problem, since Ila’s rich parents
then begin to finance Nick’s ventures. Asha Sen insightfully points out here how “Nick’s
financial dependency on him [Ila’s father] suggests a reversal of roles whereby the
would-be imperialist becomes dependent upon the postcolonial middle-man his own
country helped create” (49). But Ila later learns that Nick—perhaps as a kind of twisted
275
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. statement against such dependency—has lovers who are all from former colonies. She
tearfully tells the narrator that “He said he just likes a bit of variety; it’s his way of
traveling” (185). Nick Price is an example of the colonial mind in postcolonial times: he
is Forster’s Turton or McBryde, yet the only “passage” he can make is sexual.
The narrator himself has a complex relationship to Nick, at least in his own mind,
due to the stories Ila, who temporarily lived with the Prices in London as a child, told to
the narrator when they were young. Briefly attending school in England, Ila as a ten year
old is struggling to deal with the racial taunts and bullying she is subjected to daily at the
school. The slightly older Nick, who attends the same school, does not give Ila any help;
yet when Ila tells the narrator her thinly disguised woes, Nick Price figures as the hero of
the story—a dashing blond rescuer who saves her from the attacks of the other children.
The narrator compares himself to this blond hero, and comes up lacking. In colonial
fashion, he makes this false image of Nick into a kind of mirror double against which he
magnifies what he sees as his own shortcomings.
In Conrad’s The Shadow Line, Conrad writes of how “the time, too, goes on—till
one perceives ahead a shadow-line warning one that the region of early youth, too, must
be left behind” (4). Before Ghosh’s narrator can cross his shadow line, he needs to leam
what stories he should “leave behind”. While Conrad’s narrator is dealing with the
defining event in his life—the event that will push him over the line—he looks into the
mirror and sees his “double,” a man who “had his place in a line of men whom he did not
know, of whom he had never heard; but who were fashioned by the same influences”
(53). This is exactly what Ghosh’s narrator does, at first, with his creation of his mirror
double, Nick Price. After hearing Ila speak of Nick, he states that:
276
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. After that day Nick Price, whom I had never seen, and would, as far as I knew, never see, became a spectral presence beside me in my looking glass; growing with me, but always bigger and better, and in some ways more desirable.... (49)
Growing up hearing stories of England, the narrator’s double is an English boy against
whom he constantly measures himself and comes up short The narrator has to rearrange
how he has ordered the stories he has heard; he needs to shake this habit of a western
comparison, and of seeing himself as the West’s “other”. May Price, Nick’s sister, tries
to help the narrator do this by hinting to him that “He’s [Nick] not at all like us” and
musing gently that “I wonder whether you’d like him” (52). To cross his shadow line,
the narrator has to learn this for himself. Chakrabarty writes that ‘“Europe [is]
constructed by the tales that both imperialism and nationalism have told the colonized”
(18); if tales have constructed it, then tales can also dismantle its lingering dominance
over the East When Ghosh’s narrator is confronted with the real Nick Price, and quickly
sees and experiences his many shortcomings, the narrator is forced to look critically at
the tales that have thus far been central in his life. In this way, what the narrator learns
from Nick is a more obvious and easier lesson that parallels the complex discovery he is
also making at this time regarding empire’s still-existing influence over the remembering
and processing of war and riots. What Nick exposes to the narrator prepares him for the
role he has in the novel of exposing empire.
The narrator’s need to create a mirror double or “other” in the first place is
indicative of how he is a victim of still another tentacle of empire’s western construction
of the nation state. As referred to earlier, Rosemary George has proposed that fiction and.
the novel can work as an alternative to the dictates of nationalism, as one of the main
projects of the twentieth century novel has been to create a “home” space or definition
277
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. that can contrast the definition of home put forth by nationalism. The caution that
Ghosh’s The Shadow lines adds to this theory, however, is that one has to be careful
where one’s fictional priorities and frameworks come from. And George herself
acknowledges this danger when she points out that “to rephrase Robert Frost and David
Sopher, home is neither where they have to take you in nor where they want to take you
in, but rather the place where one isin because an other(s) is kept out” (26-7). Mufti
concurs, “the experience of being at home can only be produced by rendering some other
homeless” (239). One of the cogs of empire was its establishment of—and dependence
on—the notion of the other. The empire’s us had to have a them to govern. The
narrator’s need to see Nick as his double is thus a construction with imperial roots. He
recognizes this once he comes face to face with Nick’s true character. Likewise, the
narrator must struggle to figure out just why the stories of war dominate and erase his
own memories of riots, as well as to learn the significance of this dominance. His
realization of the fallacy of the notion of the other and its connection to nation and empire
allows him to form a hypothesis about what is occurring with war silencing riots: he sees
how war is endemic to the concept of nation. By placing emphasis on the colonial ties to
and postcolonial departures from the stories and story-telling the narrator creates his life
amongst, Ghosh is able to convey how extensively empire still permeates; its stories still
echo loudly.
In Amitav Ghosh’s new novel, The Glass Palace, Ghosh creates two Indian-
Burmese families and follows several of their generations from the late 1800s through to
the present day. The novel is set mainly in Burma, and the backdrop is, once again, the
278
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. British Empire, as the novel begins with Rajkumar—a young Indian boy of twelve who
has lived most of his life in Mandalay—witnessing the British invasion of Burma and the
subsequent exile of the Burmese King and Queen to Madras. Rajkumar, in many ways
following the example of the colonizing British, becomes prosperous in the teak trade;
however, he cannot forget a brief encounter he had with Dolly, a servant or lady-in-
waiting to the Burmese princesses, and eventually travels to Madras to find out what has
become of her. Dolly, still a kind of handmaiden to these princesses, has befriended the
Indian wife, Uma, of a Cambridge-educated Indian colonial administrator; Uma
convinces Dolly to marry Rajkumar and return to a better life in Burma. It is then Dolly
and Rajkumar’s family, as well as Uma’s family, whom Ghosh focuses on as they are
confronted with the often-traumatizing events of the twentieth-century.
It is significant that once again Ghosh chooses to view these events through the
lens of war—and, more specifically, what war reveals about empire. Right away, he
creates an exchange between Dolly and Rajkumar that echoes many of the main themes
he showcased in The Shadow Lines. Rajkumar has traveled to Madras to court Dolly, and
he tells the story of when he first became infatuated with her during a minute-long
encounter as she was being paraded with the royal family to the ship that would take
them to their exile in Madras. Rajkumar had earlier been part of a mob that ransacked the
palace once it became clear that the King and Queen were now under British command.
Dolly objects strenuously to Rajkumar’s version of events:
Dolly clapped her hands over her ears. ‘It’s a lie. Every word of it. You’ve made it all up. Everything, every last word. There was not a line of truth in anything you said tonight. Min and Mebya [the Burmese King and Queen] were gods to the people of Mandalay. No one would have dared do the things you described... People cried when we were taken away.’
279
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. ‘They did. That is true. But this too is true: the mob, the palace. I was there, and so were you. You must recall.... (127)
Once again Ghosh portrays a conflict over the kinds of violence that get to be
remembered; as inThe Shadow Lines, a character resists retaining the memory of a riot in
the narrative of her past.
The commentary Ghosh is returning to regarding war as a tool of empire can best
be seen by pairing two characters with opposite sensibilities: Uma and her nephew,
Aijun. As a young teen, Uma made what was considered to be an extremely
advantageous marriage to Beni Prasad Dey, a Cambridge-educated Bengali whom Ghosh
portrays as a kind, intelligent, and politically aware man. Their marriage is rather
inexplicably bad: Dey wants a westera-style marriage of equal partners, and Uma does
not appear to know what she wants or why she is dissatisfied. Eventually Uma makes the
decision to leave the marriage, and Dey, who is also having problems with his British
superiors, commits suicide. Uma, who inherits Dey’s wealth, sets off to begin a new
kind of life, first by visiting Dolly in Burma, and then by traveling throughout the world.
Reflecting upon her husband’s life, Uma sees the pressures of empire, and how “there
seemed never to be a moment when he was not haunted by the fear of being thought
lacking by his British colleagues,” despite the fact that he was renown for his intelligence
and skill and considered to be “a model for his countrymen” (161). Uma vows to find a
remedy for the problems empire creates. The reader is privy to a few of the letters she
sends Dolly over the years, but Uma remains a secondary character until she returns from
New York to see Dolly in 1929 at the age of fifty. Dolly goes to greet Uma’s ship and is
surprised to find there a cheering crowd which is also waiting for Uma’s arrival. Uma
280
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. explains to Dolly that in New York she had become an active member of the Indian
Independence League. Uma had come in contact with a small community of Indians in
New York who had settled there to “seek shelter from the surveillance of the Empire’s
intelligence services,” and because of affordable education (191). While living amongst
that community for twenty-three years, Uma has become an active politician. She is
against the British Empire and its presence in India, particularly its military presence.
Uma explains to Dolly that “In India, on the other hand, it was the military that devoured
the bulk of public monies,” that as her colleague Lala Har Dayal pointed out, “India was,
in effect a vast garrison and that it was the impoverished Indian peasant who paid both for
the upkeep of the conquering army and for Britain’s eastern campaigns” (191). Uma
preaches against Empire’s longevity, pointing out that “it was not they themselves nor
even their children who would pay the true price of this Empire: that the conditions being
created in their homeland were such as to ensure that their descendants would enter the
new epoch as cripples...” (191-2). Uma has acquired an awareness of empire’s
inequities; she is visiting Dolly on her way back to her home in Calcutta to try to work to
defeat the British Empire and force its departure.
Uma’s visit to Dolly in Burma happens to coincide with some anti-Indian riots
there; the Indians living in Burma had built a prosperous and wealthy community, yet
because of such success were considered by the Burmese to be either working as an
extension of the British Empire or as Indian colonizers of Burma. Uma and Dolly witness
a gruesome riot, which fills Uma with dismay. These events remind her of those “that
had preceded the outbreak of the Indian uprising of 1857” (213). She sees it all as being
the fruits of Empire. Uma thinks:
281
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. The uprising and the means of its suppression were the culmination of a month-long nightmare: it was as though she were witnessing the realization of her worst fears; once again, Indian soldiers were being used to fortify the Empire. Nobody in India seemed to know of these events; no one seemed to care. It seemed imperative that someone should take on the task of letting the people of her country know. (213)
Uma returns to India aware and prepared to fight. “But she saw now that a popular
insurrection, inspired by legend and myth, stood no chance of prevailing against a force
such as the Empire—so skillful and ruthless in its deployment of its overwhelming power;
so expert in the management of opinion” (222). The riots that Uma witnesses in Burma
turn her towards Gandhi and his satyagraha; she sees that Empire will always trump riots,
so once in Calcutta, she writes to Gandhi and joins his side.
At this point, however, Ghosh complicates his presentation of the issue by
introducing Aijun, a character who initially serves as a contrast to Uma’s point of view.
Whereas Uma formed her opinions about the British Empire in India while abroad (and
ironically on travels financed by the fortune her husband made as a colonial District
Administrator), Ghosh has Aijun learn about empire the hard way: in the belly of the
beast, so to speak, as a soldier in the British military. Ghosh illustrates Aijun’s often
painful trajectory from stereotypical middleman to a defector living on the run, proposing
as he does so the limitations of war and its function as a mere projection of empire—no
matter what one’s allegiances. Aijun, the handsome nephew of Uma, is a lackadaisical
and rather aimless young man, until he applies and gets accepted to the Indian Military
Academy as an officer cadet (224). Immediately upon entering the academy, he thrives
on his newfound identity as a soon-to-be officer of the British military. Of course, Ghosh
does not portray this as a good thing. To the reader, Aijun appears a dupe as he endlessly
brags of the benefits and good deeds of the British Army in India, proudly proclaiming
282
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. that his new battalion, the 1/1 Jats, remained loyal to Britain even during the 1857 Mutiny
(228). It becomes clear that the new identity which Aijun is so fond of is inextricably
bound to British imperialism. Aijun’s “vocabulary seemed now to consist mainly of
jargon intermixed with assorted bits of English” (242); he becomes a player in the Great
Game, finding “immense satisfaction in working on the details of plans that had been
dictated by others—not necessarily people either, but manuals of procedure” (241); he has
soldier friends wherever he goes in a way that clearly illustrates how he is part of the old-
boy network (241); and he even has his own personal “other,” his batboy, Kishan Singh, a
military servant whom he describes as belonging to a class that is “very sentimental, these
faujis, despite their moustaches and bloodshot eyes. It’s true what the Britishers say: at
heart they’re very unspoilt; the salt of the earth—you can depend on them to be faithful.
Just the kind of men you’d want by your side in a tight spot” (229). Ghosh is careful to
show how Aijun has not just joined the military, but become part and parcel of the whole
narrative of empire through this association with the military (which is about to fight for
Empire). He and his friends have taken on specific Roles: “Hardy was the Spit-and-
Polish Perfectionist, Aijun a Ladies’ Man, another a Pukka Sahib and so on. These
paper-thin portraits were part of the collective lore of their camaraderie” (242). They
have become part of the story-telling of war and succumbed to the allure of its narrative.
Emphasis is placed on the aspect of this narrative which portrays the military and the
empire it represents as being a unifying force. This is in direct opposition to what will
occur when the British Empire withdraws from India: the divisions and chaos of
Partition. Aijun and his friends remark on how the military brings them all together—and
at this point in the novel they still see this as benevolent:
283
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Usually they were just ‘brothers,’ but at times they were also much more, even the ‘First True Indians.’ ‘Look at us,’ they would say, ‘Punjabis, Marathas, Bengalis, Sikhs, Hindus, Muslims. Where else in India would you come across a group such as ours—where region and religion don’t matter—where we can all drink together and eat beef and pork and think nothing of it?’ (242)
They can be “unifled” if they adapt the habits and customs of the British military, and in
disarray if they dare to step outside the lines of the imperial box.
Aijun’s twin sister Manju, with whom he corresponds and shares the tales of his
new military life, admires his new viewpoints. His aunt Uma, now back in Calcutta and
living in her half of the family home, is a much more discriminating listener, to put it
mildly. Working for Gandhi, and with her mission being to get the British out of India,
Uma disagrees with Aijun about everything. Uma and Aijun are brought together on the
day of Manju’s wedding to Dolly and Rajkumar’s oldest son, Neel. They go on what is
meant to be a quick drive to the market to pick up some last-minute items, and get held up
by a large anti-war demonstration. Aijun had heard nothing about this demonstration, and
his ignorance annoys Uma. She and Aijun, along with Dolly’s younger son, Dinu,
discuss empire and the impending world war while stuck in the car. Dinu defends the war
as being a fight against fascism, but Uma says the primary issue is one of empire.
Claiming that the war is just a tool of empire, Uma argues: “Worse still, the Empire has
become the ideal of national success—a model for all nations to aspire to. Think of the
Belgians, racing off to seize the Congo—they killed ten or eleven million people there.
And what was it they wanted, other than to create a version of this Empire? Isn’t that
what Japan and Germany want today—empires of their own?” (255-6). This sets the
three of them off, and a heady argument about Empire ensues—the kind of direct
discussion that the narrator of The Shadow Lines is not able to have. In The Glass Palace ,
284
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Ghosh has his characters more directly confront and act out the conclusions that the
narrator of The Shadow Lines ponders about empire and war.
Perhaps this conversation is responsible for sowing the seeds that will lead to
Aijun's eventual disillusionment with his military role, for from this point onwards, each
time we see Aijun he is accumulating awareness and knowledge which will change his
perspective. When Britain joins the war, Aijun’s 1/1 Jats immediately get called into
action, although they are not sure which front they will be sent to. When the Jats are
mobilized, Aijun is displayed as still being in full agreement with the empire; in fact, he
is even preparing for the war by reading World War I texts which he exchanges with his
English commanding officer “Their tastes proved to be complementary: the CO
introduced Aijun to Robert Graves and Wilfred Owen. Aijun lent him his copies of H. G.
Wells’s War o f the Worlds and Jules Verne’sTwenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea”
(271). Aijun first begins to notice the small injustices, such as the Indian officers not
being allowed to use the club pool, and the grumblings of some of his fellow Indian
officers including his best friend, Hardy; he also takes note of the comments made by the
people of Malaya that he is just a mercenary for hire by the British. When the Jats are in
the line of fire and are getting bested by the Japanese in Malaya, the discontent of
Aijun’s fellow officers becomes impossible for him to ignore. At camp one night a plane
flies overhead and scatters pamphlets signed by Amreek Singh of the Indian
Independence League, asking “do you really wish to sacrifice your lives for an Empire
that has kept your country in slavery for two hundred years?” (337). Aijun bums the
pamphlets, but he cannot stop musing over their contents. Aijun’s friend Hardy takes
Uma’s role and tries to dissuade Aijun of his loyalties to empire. Such conversations
285
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. inevitably deal with what war reveals about empire: says Hardy, “Yaar, I sometimes
think of all the wars my father and grandfather fought in—in France, Africa, Burma.
Does anyone ever say—the Indians won this war or that one? It would have been the
same here” (351).
Although Hardy soon defects to join the Indian National Army and fight on the
side of the Japanese, it is the collapse of the hierarchy as represented between Aijun and
his batman, Kishan Singh, that allows Aijun to really awaken to the meanings of his
loyalties to empire. Aijun is wounded in an attack by the Japanese, and it is Kishan Singh
who saves Aijun’s life. While hiding in a drainage pipe and waiting for the Japanese to
pass through, Aijun, weak from his injury, sees Kishan Singh for the first time as his
equal and desires to converse with him as such. However, he finds that “he did not know
the right words in Hindustani; did not even know the tone of voice in which such
questions could be asked” (370). Sounding just like the narratorThe of Shadow Lines,
Aijun wrestles with this disability: “There were things he did not know how to say.
There was so much that he did not know how to say, in any language.... How was that
possible? Was it because no one had taught them the words? The right language?
Perhaps because it might be too dangerous?” (370). It is the toppling of Kishan Singh as
“other” that frees Aijun to finally begin to understand—and reject—his role as “other” to
the British.
Arjun’s entire adult identity was shaped around being a member of the military.
When his loyalties to the British Empire are dismantled, his connection to the military and
the military mind-set makes it very difficult for Aijun to adjust to a new mentality. He
286
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. joins Hardy and the Indian National Army and breaks with his British CO. Yet in many
ways Ghosh portrays him as a man who is still “lost”. Arjun agonizes:
But who would claim his loyalty now? The old loyalties of India, the ancient ones—they’d been destroyed long ago; the British had built their Empire by effacing them. But the Empire was dead now—he knew this because he had felt it die within himself, where it had held its strongest dominion—and with whom was he now to keep faith? (380)
As a member of the Indian National Army, Arjun is recruited by Subhas Chandra Bose in
1943 and fights on. However, it is his refusal to sever himself from the ethos of war that
ultimately defeats Aijun. Aijun’s family leams of his association with Bose, and his old
friend Hardy informs his family that “Aijun was among those who had died a hero, Hardy
said. And so had Kishan Singh. That was all they knew about Aijun’s death and they
were content that it should be so” (414). Perhaps fittingly, Aijun’s family accepts his
death under the terms of the most general of war narratives: he lost his life battling for
the good of his soon-to-be new nation. Ghosh later provides the reader with the
information that Arjun’s last few days were not as tidy as this, since they comprised part
of a reality that did not fit into any war narrative. The reality of the violence of Aijun and
Kishan Singh’s deaths is silenced and usurped by the more powerful narrative of war.
Dolly’s younger son, Dinu, has one more encounter with Aijun towards the end of the
war. Dinu meets Aijun and the remnants of his INA “battalion” in the Teak forests of
Burma. Aijun, Kishan, and the rest are starving and ill—Dinu almost does not recognize
them. Arjun tells Dinu, “We rebelled against an Empire that has shaped everything in our
lives; colored everything in the world as we know it. It is a huge, indelible stain which
has tainted all of us. We cannot destroy it without destroying ourselves. And that, I
suppose, is where I am” (446). Kishan Singh tries to defect and return to his family, and
287
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Arjun, still living by the rules of the military, shoots Kishan for his defection. Aijun
explains, “Procedures. And we have to respect them. That’s how armies are run—that’s
what makes them different from street gangs” (451). Ghosh is once again making the
point that war cannot be disassociated from empire and its stigmas; Aijun realizes the
evils of empire, but he does not realize in time how war is inextricably entangled with the
priorities of empire; he cannot stop following the “procedures” of western war. Ghosh
has Arjun reach some of the right conclusions, but because of his military persona he is
not able to attain the knowledge that the narrator of The Shadow Lines achieves. To make
this point even clearer, Ghosh ends The Glass Palace with Dinu living in present-day
Myanmar, and straggling against its oppressive military dictatorship; Dinu, however, uses
art as his method of straggle, and not military tactics. His photography will tell a
different story from war.
Mufti writes that world history as a synthesis of human experience “can proceed
only by means that appear limited, partial, and local” and that such a synthesis “does not
depend on preexisting categories or at least is not a mere rearrangement of them. The
point of such synthesis is precisely not to reify the whole” (238). Ghosh makes this clear
in The Glass Palace , and it is also the epiphany of the narrator of The Shadow Lines: he
has to learn how to hear equally the “clamor of the voices within” him (88). The narrator
has been working hard to piece together the events of the riots of 1964 and how they
intersected with his family and their told and untold family stories. It is only at the end of
the novel, when he finally hears May’s version of Tridib’s death—an eyewitness version
which he could not bring himself to request—that he is able to really see and understand
288
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. this chapter of his life. The narrator says that “I was glad too, and grateful, for the
glimpse she had given me of a final redemptive mystery” (246). This “mystery” is a
healthy silence, unlike the silences that have surrounded the narrator’s experience of
riots; it is enabled by the narrator’s hearing still one more version of events, and thus the
more versions the narrator is able to hear, the closer he gets to a true understanding of the
events of his life.
Significantly, it is not only the narrator who has to leam how to discern and
rearrange all the layers of a story. For Ghosh writes The Shadow Lines in such a way that
we, as readers, must adopt the methods of the narrator we must filter, rearrange, and
prioritize as we read, as we gradually make the following discoveries: that the novel is
not written chronologically, the same story will be told at different times by different
characters, the location of the stories and of the narrator switches back and forth between
India and England without preamble, and much of what we have been trained to think of
as key pieces of information are withheld from us temporarily (Tridib’s fate) and
permanently (the narrator’s name). Our mapping out of the novel itself parallels the
narrator’s most important postcolonial project: his gradual realization that stories of
literature and history still tend to produce western versions of events. The narrator-and
the reader along with him—must learn to see the mechanism behind the prioritization of
war over riots, for such a mechanism is the remains of empire.
289
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. CHAPTER VI
CONCLUSION
In Culture and Imperialism, Edward Said instructs that, “Imperialism did not end,
did not suddenly become ‘past,’ once decolonization had set in motion the dismantling of
the classical empires” (282). I have extended this idea in Excavating the Remains of
Empire by proving that the connections between empire and the novel did not dissolve
with this official “dismantling”: on the contrary, empire still has a home in the novel.
Novels written in the second half of the twentieth-century frequently further the
preoccupations and anxieties surrounding empire that appeared in novels written at the
beginnings of empire’s end, such as E M. Forster’s A Passage To India and Virginia
Woolf’s Mrs Dalloway. At present, then, postimperialism and the novel are as intricately
involved as was imperialism and the novel. The demise of empire, and the ensuing
cultural changes such a demise has wrought, occupy empire’s well-established space in
the English novel.
There continues to be evidence that the relationship between empire and literature
is not over yet, despite the “post” in postimperialism. In a recent edition of The New
Yorker, Margaret Drabble’s sister, the novelist A. S. Byatt, has published a story called
“The Thing in the Forest” which can serve to re-emphasize the continued presence of
empire as a subtext. Worded like a fairy tale or fable, Byatt’s story begins with two
young girls, Penny and Primrose, who are being evacuated out of London to escape the
290
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. bombing of World War n. They end up staying in an old English manor estate and there
discover both that something is rotten in the state of Denmark, so to speak, and that there
is something nasty in the woodshed. Stereotypical English pastoral life, it turns out, has a
monstrous center. The two girls spy the literal beast that symbolizes this national decay
in the woods; it is a smelly and horrifying mound of rot that engulfs what is in its path
and trails bits and pieces of English domestic flotsam, such as “wire netting, foul
dishcloths, wire-wool full of pan scrubbings, rusty nuts and bolts” (83). Penny and
Primrose manage to escape from it, but a younger child who has followed them into the
forest—Alys, a young, blond, winsome English thing—is devoured. Decades pass and
both girls, now women, are leading barren and unfulfilling lives in 1980’s England. In
1984 they visit the old English manor to which they had been evacuated, and meet in one
of the rooms. They confirm that they had, in fact, experienced the beast in the forest, and
that it had ruined their lives: but they each react differently to this confirmation. Penny
ends up returning to the forest and being killed by the beast, whereas Primrose finally is
able to tell stories about it. She turns her experience into narrative. Once again, then, we
have a narrative that is set in both war-time England and 1980’s England; once again, war
reveals something monstrous at the heart of the nation that seems to be—or at least
indict—traditional English life, and in particular, the aristocratic life financially and
materially enabled by the spoils of Empire. One character succumbs to this rottenness at
the core, and the other tries to appease her experience by narrating it. The pattern seems
the same. Woolf, Barker, Drabble, and Ghosh all write about empire and access it via
war. They use fiction to make sense of history, and do so in a way that reveals the
continuing connection between imperialism and the novel.
291
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. It is war that enables Byatt’s Penny and Primrose to have the occasion to meet the
imperial “beast”; as I have demonstrated throughout my dissertation, this is not an
unusual technique. For one sure way to be aware of the continued role of imperialism in
novels is to take cognizance of how war is represented in these novels. Keeping vigil for
war inevitably leads to the observation of how the author is using it to speak to issues of
empire. As Said noted, “anti-imperialist resistance builds gradually from sporadic and
often unsuccessful revolts until after World War One it erupts variously in major parties,
movements, and personalities all over the empire...” (219). World War I signaled the
end of the British Empire, and it made this end apparent to both the colonizers and the
colonized. Thus it is that when Virginia Woolf writes a novel shortly after the war, this
anxiety over empire surfaces repeatedly. It is also because of what this war discloses
about empire that makes it the perfect setting for Barker to use to process some of the
implications of empire’s demise. Drabble chooses the Cambodian genocide as the
background in front of which her characters come to terms with empire no longer being a
passage to a different experience and view of life; and Ghosh begins with World War II
and the contrast between how his English and Indian characters react to it, and then
moves from the war against China in 1962 to riots that occurred at the same time, all the
while having his narrator evaluate such violence in relation to what it proves about the
remains of empire. For Ghosh and the other authors, war becomes an apt tool to excavate
these remains: war begins as the symptom of the crisis of empire and ends up
magnifying the workings of empire, as well as itself becoming empire’s coliseum-sized
relic.
292
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. In The Shadow Lines, Ghosh writes that “The theatre of war, where generals meet,
is the stage on which states disport themselves: they have no use for memories of riots”
(226). War’s pageantry, then, is the language of nations, and the story of a nation has to
be made to fit into the simplicity of war posturing. However, despite—or perhaps
because of—the fact that the narrative of war consists of building blocks that are binaries,
such narratives also have their own seductiveness and power. There is a familiarity to the
ingredients of war that we can immediately access. As I have shown in my chapter five,
Ghosh well captures this instant war fluency. When the narrator of The Shadow Lines is
discussing the events of the early sixties with his friends, Ghosh writes that “Over our
half-pots of tea in the canteen, we recalled how quickly we had taught ourselves to
distinguish the shapes of their aircraft from ours, how our mothers had donated bangles
and earrings for the cause, how we’d stood at street-comers, taking collections and
selling little paper flags” (215). Everyone seems instantly to know by heart their roles in
this “theatre of war”. Of course, this is the conversation that leads the narrator to realize
that the war has been documented and remembered, whereas the stories and facts of the
riots of the same time period have been silenced. He questions, “If they [journalists]
knew, why couldn’t they speak of it? They were speaking of so much else, of the
Congress conference, of the impending split in the Communist Party, of wars and
revolutions: what is it that makes all those things called ‘politics’ so eloquent and these
other unnamable things so silent?” (223). His narrator continues on to question why such
a contrast exists between war and riots, and why it is that war and its elements are so
dominant
293
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. A related questioning occurred in England after World War I. In this war, the
power of the war narrative, riddled with too much propaganda, eventually weakened.
Trudi Tateemphasizes this shift when she writes first that “the Great War was the first to
organize propaganda in a ‘scientific manner”’ (41), and then points out how “Casualty
figures were misrepresented; defeats were presented as victories; atrocity stories were
invented; accounts of real suffering were censored; opposition to the war was
suppressed” (43). Such manipulations, as she asserts “were much criticized after the
war” (41). The facts regarding earlier military events—such as the Mutiny—were of
course as distorted; but with the reality of the Great War closer to home, the curtain of the
theatre of war was often too hastily raised, so to speak, revealing the discrepancies such
manipulations were meant to disguise. It is the glitches in the war narrative, therefore,
and the slippage that war, in the twentieth century, tends to reveal about the workings of
power that make it a resourceful entry into issues of imperialism.
War is epic, and two of the four novelists I focus upon in my dissertation have
written epic trilogies featuring it, yet it is the discrepancies of war that my authors
explicate: the stories that war unwittingly drags into light, as well as the stories that war
drowns out Woolf, for example, shows the effects of war on a shell-shocked soldier,
Septimus Warren Smith, and then makes this soldier, in all his so-called insanities,
parallel an upper-class English housewife. Septimus’s trauma-induced hallucinations and
anxieties often intersect with the anxieties that the war, the British Empire itself, and the
social and cultural structures it produces and upholds, all create in Clarissa Dalloway. By
having a psychiatrist intersperse his observations and treatment of shell-shocked soldiers
with remembrances of his experiences and observations as an ethnologist in colonized
294
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Melanesia, Barker uses war and its ruptures to highlight, and thus become accustomed to
empire’s demise. Margaret Drabble’s characters are able to achieve enlightenment about
their own new postimperial cultural identity by viewing the relatively new ravages of the
wars and genocide of Cambodia; they use its postimperial chaos to assuage their own
postimperial uneasiness. And Ghosh’s narrator comes to see war and the power of its
narrative as bullying and falsely postimperial: on the contrary, the prominence of war
narratives recharges the flagging empire in detrimental ways.
One aspect of war that I have shown the novelists in my dissertation to be
elucidating and contending with is the tendency it shares with empire of categorizing
everything into one side of a binary. Woolf’s Clarissa Dalloway tries to escape the
constraints and restrictions of binary-thinking by in part complicating the traditional
binary of male and female relationships. Her penchant for the more shifting dynamics
that exist between three people is a way that Woolf herself reflects her own beliefs about
the detriments inherent in always seeing aspects of the world as either this or that, and
she frequently connects the inequalities of the gender binary to inequalities and injustices
in the binaries of war and empire. Pat Barker has her characters confront the binaries
imposed on them as soldiers fighting in World War I, as they constandy point out the
more multifaceted reality: they show how the “us” that is England fighting the war
contains a bevy of “thems” within it There is no one good and no one evil. Her
characters also try to cross the line between the binaries: Billy Prior, for example,
becomes soldier and pacifist upper and lower class, gay and straight, doctor and patient
He will not adhere to the simple falsity of one binary side. Margaret Drabble’s characters
travel East to escape the amalgam of end-of-the century London, only to find that the
295
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. East is no longer the West’s “other”. The old demarcation lines—used for creative
inspiration, economic gain, and adventurous escape—are blurred in the new world order.
Ghosh’s narrator sees how much is left out of the either/or narratives allowed a nation
today. He thinks of how “The only relationship my vocabulary permitted.. .was war or
friendship.... And things which did not fit my vocabulary were merely pushed over the
edge into the chasm of that silence” (214). He comes to the conclusion that new modes
of archiving and documenting a nation’s history need to be given space. Such binary
vision and binary philosophy are still aspects of contemporary war and politics. One
need only read a newspaper or listen to the news today to see how prevalent the binary
mindset still is. Our president claims that you are either for terrorism or against it: there
is no middle ground. His attorney general, Robert Ashcroft, is proud of being “serious
about the binary nature of the universe, which for him is defined by right and wrong,
good and evil, heaven and hell” (Toobin 54).
Furthermore, as I have consistently professed, where the binaries of war exist, the
binaries of empire are sure to follow. This is still true today—as can be seen in a recent
editorial in The Nation, in which Amitav Ghosh warns that empire seems to be making a
comeback. He claims that “References to empire are no longer deployed ironically or in
a tone of warning; the idea has become respectable enough that the New York Times ran
an article describing the enthusiasm it now evokes in certain circles” (24). Ghosh asserts
that in both the United States and in England, the idea of empire as an institution with
current potential benefit has been bandied about He contends: “The idea of empire may
seem too antiquated to be worth combating. But it is always the ideas that appeal to both
ends of the spectrum that stand the best chance of precipitating an unspoken consensus,
296
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. especially when they bear the imprimatur of such figures as the British prime minister.
That is why this may be a good time to remind ourselves of some of the reasons
imperialism fell into discredit in the first place” (24). In order to explain why empire is
not a good idea, Ghosh himself has to resort to reminding his reader of the binaries
inherent in all philosophies of empire. He writes, ‘To begin with, empire cannot be the
object of universal human aspirations. In a world run by empires, some people are rulers
and some are the ruled: It is impossible to think of a situation where all peoples possess
an empire” (24). All empires have to have a “them” to set their own identity against.
And finally, in a manner that comes full circle back to the starting point of my
dissertation, Ghosh avers that, “Those who embrace the idea of empire frequently cite the
advantages of an imperial peace over the disorder of the current world situation. This
disregards the fact that the peace of the British, French and Austro-Hungarian empires
was purchased at the cost of a destabilization so radical as to generate the two greatest
conflicts in human history: the world wars” (24). The binaries of empire lead to the
binaries of war; the simplicities of binary thinking are limiting, deceptive and ultimately
destructive. Instead, one must resist shying away from the complex and turning it into a
seductive yet false narrative of us and them, good and evil.
If, as I have proven, empire still exists in the postimperial novel in a mixture of
shame, nostalgia, melancholia, and hopeful change, is the novel as a genre affected, and
if so, how? In The Gates o f Ivory, Drabble’s character, Liz Headleand, sees the novelist
being replaced by a kind of new media hegemony. She is able to figure out what became
of her novelist friend, Stephen Cox, on his old-fashioned passage East, because a film
crew is filming the story of his life. Movies appear to be taking the place of the novel in
297
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the English culture—and, of course, movies are dominated by the American influence.
However, Drabble herself describes this movie takeover in a trilogy of novels that is well
over a thousand pages long. In other words, the novel thrives as she proposes its possible
demise. Furthermore, the new world order that her characters are gradually coming to
terms with seems a perfect match for the novel’s heteroglossia. Perhaps, then, it is time
to turn to matters of form, since all of the novels I discuss integrate empire in ways that
correspond with innovations in the form of the novel. Fredrick Jameson claims that
“traces of imperialism” can be found in modernist literature, but that “they will be
detected spatially, as formal symptoms, within the structure of First World modernist
texts themselves” (64). It is logical, therefore, to extend these observations to
postmodernist texts, for as Jameson himself contends: “it is in our time, since World War
II, that the problem of imperialism is as it were restructured...” (47). For example, one
of Virginia Woolf’s modernist innovations was to write Mrs Dalloway as a stream of
consciousness novel that flows throughout many consciousnesses; the reader will be in
Clarissa’s mind at the beginning of the page, and travel through the minds of people
Clarissa passes on the street in a way that illustrates the connectedness of the psyches of
the culture of one day in London, and how everything is interrelated and corresponds. It
is because of this stream of consciousness form, however, that Woolf is able to show how
the thoughts of the Londoners return so frequendy to anxieties over the war and the state
of the British Empire. We are able to see how people are beginning to worry about
empire and its imminent demise. It is the format that allows the reader to see the
prominence of the new anxieties over empire: we witness such worries appearing
298
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. threaded throughout everyday musings. Instead of references to it being abrupt or out of
place, empire thus appears integrated into the thoughts of the people.
The points Pat Barker makes about empire are also connected to the choices she
makes regarding some of the format elements of the structure of her trilogy. To begin
with, in The Ghost Road, especially, Barker intersperses Rivers’s reminiscences of his
times as an ethnologist viewing the colonized Melanesians with Billy Prior’s experiences
in the war. By switching back and forth from the chaos that empire causes in the colonies
to the chaos that the English themselves are experiencing in the war, Barker is able to
emphasize all that war and empire share, as well as what war can reveal about empire.
Another formal “symptom” of imperialism in Barker’s postmodern novels is her use of
historical figures alongside of fictional characters. Barker’s choice of Sassoon as a
character enables her to emphasize the role of the writer in the processing of empire’s
demise; Sassoon as writer is a witness to the chaos that empire brings about in the guise
of war. Similarly, her use of Rivers, the well-known psychoanalyst and ethnologist, is
also connected to her explications of empire and the acceptance of England’s
postimperial status. As a psychoanalyst and ethnologist, Rivers is equipped to hear the
testimony of the writer and the soldier; he is able to serve as the reader’s proxy,
mirroring—from his ideal vantage point of observer of both empire and war—how to
acknowledge and celebrate empire’s demise. Barker’s juxtaposition of fictional and
factual characters enables her to more persuasively employ fiction to explain history, as
well as perhaps assuaging and changing some of its effects.
All throughout Margaret Drabble’s trilogy, she uses moments of metalepsis where
her narrative will break down into lists of facts or possibilities, or where she will confront
299
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. the reader directly in a postmodern—and Rushdie-esque—dear reader aside. It is inThe
Gates o f Ivory—the novel that has empire as its main theme—where these moments
occur most frequently. The reader continually gets presented with facts about Cambodia,
which very much appear to be “Great Game” facts—that is, the old way that England
used to learn, know, and retain power over the East These facts of course end up not
being enough of a map of the East; her characters have to devise new ways of viewing
the world, by discarding a lot of the “facts” they thought they could be certain of. Many
of the lists of possibilities that Drabble makes—such as the possibilities of the fate of
Mitra Akrun—end up being the only information about Mitra that the reader is given.
We have to make what we will of these lists and decide which, if any, to believe.
Towards the end of the novel we discover that many of these lists are all that exists of
Stephen Cox’s postmodern novel of his passage East. His experience in the East—which
in imperial times would have been linearly and concretely related—can no longer be
turned into a narrative that would, in turn, be part of what the West used to produce its
version of, and dominate, the East. His great Eastern novel is scraps and fragments that
mirror the amalgam of the new world order. The reader has to process Stephen’s
experience as a pastiche that cannot be relegated into—and simply explained
by—binaries that continue the status quo of the old, imperial power structure.
Ghosh, too, structures his novel in a way that aptly reflects the main epiphany of
his narrator. We do not know things we are used to knowing in a novel—such as the
narrator’s name, and the various generations and connections between his family
members—and thus we have to continually stop and align the various bits of information
we are given. This is exacerbated by the non-linearity of the novel: Ghosh continually
300
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. switches from events in the narrator’s childhood to events that happened before the
narrator was bom and that he has just heard about in stories, to events of the narrator’s
adulthood. As readers, we find ourselves rearranging and prioritizing what we are told by
the narrator. Thus, when the narrator leams that there are some stories central to his
childhood that have been silenced, our own assembling of Ghosh’s novel gets indicted
along with the narrator’s positioning of the stories of his own life. We read the narrator’s
theorizing about what stories get silenced, and then can apply his own admonishments to
how we have been reading the novel itself. Because of this structure, then, Ghosh is able
to make his point about imperialism’s stranglehold on multiple levels. Postimperialism
in novels often coincides with the manipulations of the novel format; it is indeed manifest
in “formal symptoms”.
It thus is evident that shame and nostalgia for empire and the trauma of empire’s
dissolutiondo coexist in the postimperial, postwar novel. They are visible in the
structural modifications of the novel format and as the content behind the “front” of war.
For Woolf, the shame of war and empire were intricately connected; mentioning war
leads to references of empire, and vice versa. Over sixty years later, both Barker and
Drabble are still trying to appease the shame and thwart the nostalgia. Barker’s approach
to the shame of empire is to repeatedly draw parallels between the horrors of war and the
horrors of empire, while Drabble’s precise avoidance of the horrors of the British Empire
by setting her novel in Cambodia—whose horrors are not directly connected to England,
per se —speaks to this shame. In Amitav Ghosh’s The Shadow Lines, shame and
nostalgia for empire appear, but on a different axis. As Drabble’s characters learn how to
view and process their postimperial role, Ghosh’s narrator is similarly navigating his way
301
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. amongst the remains of empire; what he discovers, however, is that the “imperial” in
postimperial has not yet been completely de-fanged and disempowered. As Said asserts
that the reader of, for example, Jane Austen’s Mansfield Park, needs to be aware of how
the Bertrams finance their large English pastoral estate with their slave-worked sugar
plantation in Antigua, so I assert that the reader of Woolf, Barker, Drabble, Ghosh, and
other twentieth-century novelists should discern empire’s continued presence in their
works. Empire and the novel are cohorts yet, and as readers, we should monitor and
panopticon their continued relationship.
302
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. REFERENCE NOTES
1 For example, when Fielding tries to defend Aziz, he is instructed to “Read any
of the Mutiny records; which, rather than the Bhagavad Gita, should be your Bible in this
country” (Forster 169).
2 In Virginia Woolf against Empire, Phillips makes this case for many of Woolf’s
novels. For example, she claims that in Jacob's Room, “Jacob’s grounding in gender
prejudice makes it easier for him to reduce other whole groups to a subhuman ‘enemy’”
(xvi). Regarding The Voyage Out, she writes that “Woolf, from one end of her career to
the other, repeatedly insists on just such a linkage between the relations of countries and
those of men and women” (69). And aboutThe Years: “Otway and Pargiter thus
continue at home the tyrannies they have engaged in overseas, indicating the continuum
between family and Empire insistently pointed out in Woolf’s books” (85).
31 am using “empire at home” as synonymous with the English nation state, but
also as such a nation state is considered, at least by its own inhabitants, to be the center of
an imperial network: England is, therefore, more or less a metonymy for the British
Empire.
4 “Memory is life, borne by living societies founded in its name. It remains in
permanent evolution, open to the dialectic of remembering and forgetting, unconscious of
303
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. its successive deformations, vulnerable to manipulation and appropriation, susceptible to
being long dormant and periodically revived. History, on the other hand, is the
reconstruction, always problematic and incomplete, of what is no longer...” (8-9).
5 His accusation is not limited to historians. In fact, the main example he uses is
from literary criticism of Salman Rushdie’s Midnight’s Children: “‘Though Saleem
Sinai narrates in English. . . his intertexts for both writing history and writing fiction are
doubled: they are, on the one hand, from Indian legends, films, and literature and, on the
other, from the West-The Tin Drum, Tristram Shandy, One Hundred Years of Solitude,
and so on.’ It is interesting to note how this sentence teases out only those references that
are from ‘the W est’ The author is under no obligation here to be able to name with any
authority and specificity the ‘Indian’ allusions that make Rushdie’s intertextuality
‘doubled’” (2).
304
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. BIBLIOGRAPHY
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Adam, Ian, and Helen Tiffin, Ed. Past the I -ast Post: Theorizing Post-Colonialism and Post-Modernism. Calgary: University of Calgary Press, 1990.
Anderson, Benedict. Imagined Communities. New York: Verso, 1983.
Appadurai, Arjun. “Disjuncture and Difference in the Global Cultural Economy.” Public Culture 2.2 (1990): 1-24.
Armstrong, Nancy. Desire and Domestic Fiction. New York: Oxford University Press, 1987.
Bagchi, Nivedita. “The Process of Validation in Relation to Materiality and Historical Reconstruction in Amitav Ghosh’s The Shadow Lines.” Modem Fiction Studies 39.1 (1993): 187-202.
Bal, Mieke, Jonathan Crewe and Leo Spitzer, Ed. Acts of Memory: Cultural Recall in the Present. Hanover University Press of New England, 1999.
Barber, Stephen. “Lip-Reading: Woolf's Secret Encounters.” Novel Gazing: Queer Readings In Fiction. Ed. Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick. Durham: Duke University Press, 1997. 401-443.
Barker, Pat The Eve In The Door. New York: A Plume Book, 1993.
—. The Ghost Road. New York: A Dutton Book, 1995.
—. Regeneration. New York: A Plume Book, 1991.
Bazin, Nancy Topping and Jane Hamovit Lauter. “Virginia Woolf’s Keen Sensitivity To War. Its Roots and Its Impact on Her Novels.” Virginia Woolf and War Fiction. Reality, and Mvth. Ed. Mark Hussey. New York: Syracuse University Press, 1991. 14-39.
Bhabha, Homi. The Location of Culture. London: Routledge, 1994.
—, Ed. Nation and Narration. London: Routledge, 1990.
Bivona, Daniel. British Imperial Literature. 1870-1940: Writing and the Administration of Empire. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998.
Boehmer, Elleke. Colonial and Postcolonial Literature. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1995.
Booker, Keith. Colonial Power. Colonial Texts: India in the Modem British Novel. Ann Arbor The University of Michigan Press, 1997.
306
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Bov£, Paul A, Ed. Edward Said and the Work of the Critic: Speaking Troth To Power. Durham: Duke University Press, 2000.
Boyarin, Jonathan. Storm From Paradise: The Politics of Jewish Memory. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1992.
Brantlinger, Patrick. Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism. 1830-1914. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1968.
Braybon, Gail and Penny Summerfield. Out of the Cage: Women’s Experiences in Two World Wars. London: Pandora Books, 1987.
Briggs, Marlene A. “Veterans and Civilians: The Mediation of Traumatic Knowledge in Mrs Dallowav.” Virginia Woolf and Communities. Ed. Jeanette McVicker and Laura Davis. New York: Pace University Press, 1999. 43-49.
Bromberg, Pamela S. “The Development of Narrative Technique in Margaret Drabble’s Novels.” The Journal of Narrative Technique. 163 (1986): 179-191.
—. “Margaret Drabble’s The Radiant Way: Feminist Metafiction.” Novel 24.1 (1990): 5-25.
Brooke, Rupert. The Poetical Works. London: Faber and Faber, 1946.
Brown, Laura. Ends of Empire: Women and Ideology in Earlv Eighteenth-Century English Literature. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1993.
Butalia, Urvashi. The Other Side of Silence. Durham: Duke University Press, 2000.
Byatt, A. S. ‘The Thing In The Forest” The New Yorker 3 June 2002: 80-89.
Cain, P. J. and A. G. Hopkins. British Imperialism: Innovation and Expansion. 1688- 1914. London: Longman, 1993.
Caruth, Cathy. Unclaimed Experience: Trauma. Narrative, and History. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996.
Cassidy, John. ‘The Blair Project” The New Yorker 6 December 1999: 116-125.
Chakrabarty, Dipesh. “Postcoloniality and the Artifice of History: Who Speaks for ‘Indian’ Pasts?” Representations 37 (1992): 1-26.
Chatteijee, Partha. The Nation and Its Fragments. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1993.
307
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. —. Nationalist Thought and the Colonial World: A Derivative Discourse. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986.
Oausewitz, Carl von. On War. New York: Penguin Books, 1968.
Conrad, Joseph. The Shadow Line. New York: Doubleday, Page & Co., 1924.
Das, G. K. E. M. Forster’s India. New Jersey: Rowman and Littlefield, 1977.
Davis, Lennard. FactualFictions: The Origins nf the English Novel. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1983.
Deane, Seamus. Introduction. Nationalism. Colonialism, and Literature. By Terry Eagleton, Fredric Jameson, and Edward W. Said. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1990. 3-19.
Deleuze, Gilles. The Deleuze Reader. Ed. Constantin V. Boundas. New York: Columbia University Press, 1993.
Dirks, Nicholas B., Ed. Colonialism and Culture. Ann Arbor The University of Michigan Press, 1992.
Dixon, Robert “Travelling in the West’: The Writing of Amitav Ghosh.” Journal of Commonwealth Literature. 31:1 (1996): 3-24.
Donaldson, Laura E. Decolonizing Feminisms: Race. Gender, and Empire-Building. Chapel Hill: The University of North Carolina Press, 1992.
Drabble, Margaret. The Gates of Ivorv. New York: Viking Penguin, 1991.
—. “Living in the Pastoral.” The Threepenny Review (Fall 1997): 22-23.
—. A Natural Curiosity. New York: Penguin Books, 1989.
—• The Radiant Way. New York: Ivy Books, 1987.
Egerton, H. E. The War and the British Dominions. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1914.
Elshtain, Jean Bethke. Women and War. New York: Basic Books, Inc. 1987.
Enloe, Cynthia. Does Khaki Become You?: The Militarization of Women’s lives. London: Pandora Books, 1983.
Essame, H. The Battle For Europe. 1918. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1972.
308
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Felman, Sboshana and Don Laub, M.D. Testimony: Crises of Witnessing In Literature. Psychoanalysis, and History. New York: Routledge, 1992.
Forster, E. M. Selected Letters. Ed. Mary Lago and P. N. Furbank. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1983.
—. A Passage To India. New York: Harcourt, Brace & world, Inc., 1924.
Foucault, Michel. The Order of Things: An Archaeology of the Human Sciences. New York: Pantheon Books, 1970.
Freud, Sigmund. Bevond the Pleasure Principle. Trans. James Strachey. New York: W. W. Norton & Co., 1961.
—. Civilization and Its Discontents. Trans. James Strachey. New York: W. W. Norton &Co., 1961.
Fussell, Paul. The Great War and Modem Memory. New York: Oxford University Press, 1975.
George, Rosemary Marangoly. The Politics of Home: Postcolonial Relocations and Twentieth-Centurv Fiction. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1996.
Ghosh, Amitav. The Glass Palace. New York: Random House, 2001.
—. “Imperial Temptation.” The Nation 27 May 2002: 24.
—. The Shadow Lines. New York: Penguin Books, 1988.
Gilbert, Sandra M. and Susan Gubar. No Man’s I .and. Volume 1. The War of the Words. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1988.
—. No Man’s f .and. Volume 2. Sexchanges. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1989.
Gikandi, Simon. Maps of Englishness: Writing Identity in the Culture of Colonialism. New York: Columbia University Press, 1996.
Girard, Rend. Deceit. Desire, and the Novel: Self and Other in Literary Structure. Trans. Yvonne Freccero. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins Press, 1965.
Handley, William R. “War and the Politics of Narration in Jacob’s Room.” Virginia Woolf and War: Fiction. Reality, and Mvth. Ed. Marie Hussey. New York: Syracuse University Press, 1991. 110-133.
Hanley, Lynne. Writing Wan Fiction. Gender, and Memory. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1991.
309
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Hardt, Michael and Antonio Negri. Empire. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 2000 .
Harris, Greg. “Compulsory Masculinity, Britain, and the Great War The Literary- Historical Work of Pat Barker.” Critique 39.4 (1998): 290-304.
Harris, Michael. Outsiders and Insiders: Perspectives of Third World Culture in British and Post-Colonial Fiction. New York: Peter Lang Publishing, 1992.
Hartmann, Heidi. “The Unhappy Marriage of Marxism and Feminism: Towards a More Progressive Union.” Women and Revolution. Ed. Lydia Sargent. Boston: South End Press, 1981. 1-41.
Henderson, Diana E. “Rewriting Family Ties: Woolf's Renaissance Romance.” Virginia Woolf: Reading the Renaissance. Ed. Sally Greene. Athens: Ohio University Press, 1999. 136-160.
Here, Judith Scherer. A Passage To India: Nation and Narration. New York: Twayne Publishers, 1993.
Higonnet, Margaret Randolph et al, Ed. Behind The Lines: Gender and the Two World Wars. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1987.
Hobsbawm, E. J. The Age of Empire. 1875-1914. New York: Pantheon Books, 1987.
Hussey, Mark. “Living in a War Zone: An Introduction to Virginia Woolf as a War Novelist” Virginia Woolf and Wan Fiction. Reality, and Mvth. Ed. Mark Hussey. New York: Syracuse University Press, 1991. 1-13.
Huyssen, Andreas. After the Great Divide: Modernism. Mass Culture. Postmodernism. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1986.
Hynes, Samuel. The Soldiers' Tale: Bearing Witness to Modem War. New York: A. Lane, 1997.
James, Lawrence. Raj: The Making and Unmaking of British India. New York: S t Martin’s Press, 1997.
Jameson, Fredric. “Modernism and Imperialism.” Nationalism. Colonialism, and Literature. By Terry Eagleton, Fredric Jameson, and Edward W. Said. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1990. 43-66.
—• The Political Unconscious: Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1981.
Joll, James. The Origins of the First World War. 2nd Edition. London: Longman, 1992.
310
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Kacandes, Irene. “Narrative Witnessing as Memory Work: Reading Gertrud Kolmar’s A Jewish Mother.” Acts of Memory: Cultural Recall in the Present Ed. Mieke Bal, Jonathan Crewe and Leo Spitzer, Ed. Hanover University Press of New England, 1999. 24-38.
Kaul, Suvir. “Separation Anxiety: Growing Up Inter/National in Amitav Ghosh’s The Shadow Lines” Oxford Literary Review 16.1-2 (1994): 125-45.
Keeean. John. The First World War. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1999.
Kieman, Ben. The Pol Pot Regime: Race. Power, and Genocide in Cambodia under the Khmer Rouge. 1975-79. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1996.
Kirk, John. “Recovered Perspectives: Gender, Class, and Memory in Pat Barker’s Writing.” Contemporary Literature 40.4 (1999): 603-626.
Knutsen, Karen Patrick. “Leaving Dr. Leavis: A Farewell to the Great Tradition? Margaret Drabble’s The Gates of Ivorv.” English Studies 6 (1996): 579-591.
Lane, Christopher. The Ruling Passion: British Colonial Allegory and the Paradox of Homosexual Desire. Durham: Duke University Press, 1995.
Lanser, Susan Sniader. Fictions of Authority: Women Writers and Narrative Voice. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1992.
Levenback, Karen L. Virginia Woolf and the Great War. New York: Syracuse University Press, 1999.
London, Bette. The Appropriated Voice: Narrative Authority in Conrad. Forster, and Woolf. Ann Arbor The University of Michigan Press, 1990.
Lowe, Lisa. Critical Terrains: French and British Orientalisms. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1991.
MacDonald, Robert H. The Language of Empire: Mvths and Metaphors of Popular Imperialism. 1880-1918. Manchester Manchester University Press, 1994.
Mackenzie, John M. Propaganda and Empire: The Manipulation of British Public Opinion. 1880-1960. Manchester Manchester University Press, 1986.
Margaronis, Maria. “Blair’s Cooled-Off Britannia.” The Nation 4 June 2001: 19-23.
Marwick, Arthur. The Deluge: British Society and the First World War. New York: W. W. Norton & Co., Inc., 1965.
311
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. McCIintock, Anne. Imperial L e a th e r Race. Gender and Sexuality in the Colonial Context New York: Routledge, 1995.
Mepham, John. “Mourning and Modernism.” Virginia Woolf: New Critical Essavs. Ed. Patricia Clements and Isobel Grundy. Totowa: Barnes and Noble Press, 1983.
Meyer, Susan. Imperialism at Home: Race and Victorian Women’s Redon. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1996.
Morrison, Blake. “War Stories.” The New Yorker 22 January 1996: 78-82.
Mufti, Aamir R. “Auerbach in Istanbul: Edward Said, Secular Criticism, and the Question of Minority Culture.” Edward Said and the Work of the Critic: Speaking Truth to Power. Ed. Paul A. Bove. Durham: Duke University Press, 2000. 229-256.
—. “Secularism and Minority: Elements of a Critique.” Social Text 14:4 (1995): 75- 96.
Neuman, Shirley. “Heart of Darkness: Virginia Woolf and the Spectre of Domination.” Virginia Woolf: New Critical Essavs. Ed. Patricia Cements and Isobel Grundy. Totowa: Barnes and Noble Press, 1983.
Nora, Pierre. “Between Memory and History: Les Lieux de Me Moird.” Representations 26 (1989): 7-25.
O’Dair, Sharon. “Beyond Necessity: The Consumption of Class, The Production of Status, and the Persistence of Inequality.” New Literary History 31 (2000): 337-354.
Pandey, Gyanendra. “In Defense of the Fragment* Writing About Hindu-Muslim Riots in India Today.” Representations 37 (1992): 27-55.
Perry, Donna. “Going Home Again: An Interview with Pat Barker.” The Literary Review 34.2 (1991): 235-244.
Peel, Ellen. “Subject, Object, and the Alternation of First- and Third-Person Narration in Novels by Alther, Atwood, and Drabble: Toward a Theory of Feminist Aesthetics.” Critique 30.2 (1989): 107-122.
Phillips, Kathy J. Virginia Woolf Against Empire. Knoxville: The University of Tennessee Press, 1994.
312
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Poole, Roger. ‘“We All Put Up With You Virginia’: Irreceivable Wisdom about War.” Virginia Woolf and War Fiction. Reality, and Mvth. Ed. Mark Hussey. New York: Syracuse University Press, 1991. 79-100.
Prakash, Gyan, Ed. After Colonialism: Imperial Histories and Postcolonial Displacements. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1995.
Pykett, Lyn. “The Century’s Daughters: Recent Women’s Fiction and History.” Critical Quarterly 293 71-77.
Ray, Sangeeta. En-Gendering India: Woman and Nation in Colonial and Postcolonial Narratives. Durham: Duke University Press, 2000.
Renan, Emst. “What is a Nation?” Nation and Narration. Ed. Homi K. Bhabha. London: Routledge, 1990.
Rivers, W. H. R. The History of Melanesian Society. Volume I. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1914.
—• The History of Melanesian Society. Volume II. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1914.
—. Kinship and Social Organization. London: The Athlone Press, 1968.
—• Medicine. Magic, and Religion. London: Harcourt, Brace & Co., Inc., 1927.
—. Psychology and Ethnology. New York: Harcourt Brace & Co., Inc., 1926.
—. Psychology and Politics. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co., Inc., 1923.
—. Social Organization. London: Dawsons of Pall Mall, 1968.
Roy, Parama. Indian Traffic: Identities In Question in Colonial and Postcolonial India. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1998.
Rubenstein, Roberta. “Fragmented Bodies/Selves/Narratives: Margaret Drabble’s Postmodern Turn.” Contemporary Literature 35.1 (1992): 136-155.
—. “Severed Heads, Primal Crimes, Narrative Revisions: Margaret Drabble’s A Natural Curiosity.” Critique 33.2 (1992): 95-105.
—. “Sexuality and Intertextuality: Margaret Drabble’s The Radiant Wav.” Contemporary Literature 30.1 (1989): 95-112.
Rushdie, Salman. Imaginary Homelands. London: Granta Books, 1992.
313
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Said, Edward. Culture and Imperialism. New York: Vintage Books, 1993.
—. Orientalism. New York: Vintage Books, 1979.
Sassoon, Siegfried. Memoirs of an Infantry Officer. London: Faber and Faber, 1930.
Scarry, Elaine. The Body In Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World. New York: Oxford University Press, 1985.
Schaefer, Josephine O’Brien. ’The Great War and ‘This Late Age of World’s Experience’ in Cather and Woolf.” Virginia Woolf and Wan Fiction. Reality. and Mvth. Ed. Mark Hussey. New York: Syracuse University Press, 1991. 134-150.
Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. Between Men: English Literature and Male Homosocial Desire. New York: Columbia University Press, 1985.
Sen, Asha. “Crossing Boundaries in Amitav Ghosh’s The Shadow Lines” Journal of Commonwealth and Postcolonial Studies 5.1 (1997) : 46-58.
Sharpe, Jenny. Allegories of Empire: The Figure o f W om an In the Colonial Text. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993.
Showalter, Elaine. The Female Malady: Women. Madness, and English Culture. 1830- 1980. New York: Penguin Books, 1985.
Silkin, Jon, Ed. First World War Poetry. New York: Penguin Books, 1979.
Sizemore, Christine Wick. A Female Vision of the Citv: London in the Novels of Five British Women. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1989.
Slobodin, Richard. W. H. R. Rivers. New York: Columbia University Press, 1978.
Smith, G. Elliot. Introduction. Medicine. Magic, and Religion. By W. H. R. Rivers. London: Harcourt, Brace & Company, 1927.
—. Introduction. Psychology and Ethnology. By W. H. R. Rivers. New York: Harcourt Brace & Co., Inc., 1926.
Smith, Susan Bennett “Reinventing Grief Work: Virginia Woolf’s Feminist Representations of Mourning in Mrs Dallowav and To The Lighthouse.’’ 20th Century Literature 41.4(1995): 310-327.
Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. In Other Worlds: Essavs in Cultural Politics. New York: Routledge, 1987.
314
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. —. “Three Women’s Texts and a Critique of Imperialism.” Race. Writing and Difference. Ed. Henry Louis Gates, Jr. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986. 262-280.
Suleri, Sara. The Rhetoric of English India. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1992.
Tate.Trudi. Modernism. History, and the First World War. Manchester Manchester University Press, 1998.
Taylor, A. J. P. The First World War. New York: Penguin Books, 1963.
Thieme, John. “Passages to England.” Liminal Postmodemisms. Ed. Theo D’haen and Hans Bertens. Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1994. 55-78.
Thomas, Nicholas. Colonialism’s Culture: Anthropology. Travel and Government Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1994.
Thomas, Sue. “Virginia Woolf’s Septimus Smith and Contemporary Perceptions of Shell Shock.” English language Notes 25.2 (1987) : 49-57.
Toobin, Jeffrey. “Profiles: Ashcroft’s Ascent.” The New Yorker 15 April 2002: 50-63.
Torgovnick, Marianna. Gone Primitive: Savage Intellects. Modem Lives. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1990.
Trevelyan, Sir Ernest J. India and the War. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1914.
Tylee, Claire M. The Great War and Women’s Consciousness: Images of Militarism and Womanhood in Women’s Writings. 1914-64. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press, 1990.
Usui, Mas ami. “The Female Victims of the War in Mrs Dallowav.” Virginia Woolf and Wan Fiction. Reality, and Mvth. Ed. Mark Hussey. New York: Syracuse University Press, 1991. 151-163.
Van Alphen, Ernst “Symptoms of Discursivity: Experience, Memory, and Trauma.” Acts of Memory: Cultural Recall in the Present. Ed. Mieke Bal, Jonathan Crewe and Leo Spitzer, Ed. Hanover University Press of New England, 1999. 24-38.
Wachman, Gay. Lesbian Empire: Radical Crosswriting in the Twenties. New Brunswick: Rutgers University Press, 2001.
Warhol, Robyn R. Gendered Interventions: Narrative Discourse in the Victorian Novel. New Brunswick: Rutgers University Press, 1989.
315
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Waugh, Patricia. Practising Postmodernism. Reading Modernism. London: Edward Arnold, 1992.
Winter, Jay. “Producing the Television Series The Great War and the Shaping o f the Twentieth Century ” Profession 1999. 15-26.
Wolpert, Stanley. A New History of India. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993.
Woolf, Virginia. The Diary of Virginia Woolf. Vol. 1. 1915-1919. Ed. Anne Olivier Bell. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1977.
—. The Diary of Virginia Woof. Vol. 2.1920-1924. Ed. Anne Olivier Bell. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1978.
—. Jacob’s Room. London: A Triad Grafton Book, 1922.
—. Mrs Dallowav. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1925.
—. A Room Of One’s Own. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1929.
—. Three Guineas. London: The Hogarth Press, 1986.
—. “Thunder at Wembley.” Collected Essavs. Volume IV. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc., 1967. 184-187.
316
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.